Vista 120 Installation Manual

User Manual: Vista-120 Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 176

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

VISTA-120
Partitioned Security System
with Scheduling

Installation and Setup Guide

N5944-8V1 Rev. B 6/99

THANK YOU!
For Choosing Ademco's

Vista-120

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1

HARDWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES..... 1

Section 1:

GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................. 2

Section 2:

PLANNING A PARTITIONED SYSTEM....................................................... 6
Theory of Partitioning .......................................................................................... 6
Setting up a Partitioned System.......................................................................... 6
Common Area Logic.............................................................................................. 7
Master Keypad Setup and Operation................................................................ 10

Section 3:

FALSE ALARM REDUCTION FEATURES ................................................11
Exit Error Logic .................................................................................................. 11
Exit Delay Reset ................................................................................................. 11
Cross Zoning........................................................................................................ 12
Call Waiting Defeat ............................................................................................ 12

Section 4:

INSTALLING THE CONTROL......................................................................13
Mounting the Cabinet ........................................................................................ 13
Installing the Circuit Board............................................................................... 13
Standard Phone Line Connections .................................................................... 14
Connecting the AC Mains Transformer ............................................................ 14
Installing the Backup Battery ........................................................................... 15

Section 5:

INSTALLING THE KEYPADS ......................................................................16
Keypads That May Be Used............................................................................... 16
Wiring to the Keypads........................................................................................ 16
Using a Supplementary Power Supply ............................................................. 17
Mounting the Keypads ....................................................................................... 17
Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Checkout............................................... 17

Section 6:

BASIC WIRED ZONES 1-9 .............................................................................19
Common Characteristics of Wired Zones .......................................................... 19
Wiring Burglary and Panic Devices to • ones 1-8............................................. 19
Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1 ........................................................ 20
Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors................................................................. 20
Unsupervised Usage of Zone 1........................................................................... 21
Wiring 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zones 1-8 ................................................... 21
Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detetors .................................................................. 22
Configuring Zone 7 for Alternate Keyswitch Function .................................... 22
Wiring 2-Wire Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 ................................................ 22
Compatible Glassbreak Detectors ..................................................................... 22
Zone 9 Applications............................................................................................. 23
Checkout Procedure for Wired Zones ................................................................ 23

Section 7:

POLLING LOOP ZONES 10-128 ...................................................................24
Polling Loop Overview........................................................................................ 24
Common Characteristics of Polling Loop Zones ............................................... 24
Wiring/Addressing Polling Loop Devices .......................................................... 24
Polling Loop Limitations .................................................................................... 25
Polling Loop Supervision.................................................................................... 26
Maintenance Signal Support ............................................................................. 27
Checkout Procedure for Polling Loop Zones ..................................................... 27
Compatible Polling Loop Devices ...................................................................... 28
–i–

–ii–

Section 8:

WIRELESS (RF) ZONE EXPANSION..........................................................30
Common Characteristics of Wireless Zones...................................................... 30
Wireless System Operation and Supervision.................................................... 30
Wireless System Installation Advisories........................................................... 31
Installation and Setup of 4281/5881 RF Receivers .......................................... 31
Installation/Wiring of the 5800TM Module ...................................................... 32
House ID Sniffer Mode ....................................................................................... 32
5700 Series Transmitter Setup.......................................................................... 33
Wireless Zone Assignments for 5700 Series Transmitters .............................. 33
Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters............................................................... 35
5800 Series Transmitter Setup.......................................................................... 36
Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters............................................................... 37
Checkout Procedure for Wireless Zones ............................................................ 39

Section 9:

RELAY OUTPUTS & POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES ......................40
Output Device Basics ......................................................................................... 40
Wiring the 4204 Relay Module .......................................................................... 40
Wiring the 4300 Transformer ............................................................................ 41

Section 10:

4285 VISTA INTERACTIVE PHONE (VIP) MODULE .............................43
Mounting the 4285 VIP Module ........................................................................ 43
Wiring the 4285 VIP Module ............................................................................. 43

Section 11:

AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION (AAV) UNIT..........................................46
AAV Module Operation ...................................................................................... 46
AAV Module Connections................................................................................... 47

Section 12:

VIDEO ALARM VERIFICATION (VAV) UNIT ..........................................48

Section 13:

VOLTAGE TRIGGERS (Connector J7).......................................................49
Ground Start Trigger Setup............................................................................... 50
Open/Close Trigger Setup .................................................................................. 50
Remote Keypad Sounder .................................................................................... 50
Keyswitch Setup ................................................................................................. 51
Keyswitch by Partition Configuration............................................................... 52
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment (Long Range Radio) ........................... 52

Section 14:

EXTERNAL SOUNDERS................................................................................53

Section 15:

EVENT LOG OPTIONS ..................................................................................54
Event Log Printer Connections.......................................................................... 54
Event Logging Procedures ................................................................................. 55
Event Log Printer and Display Codes ............................................................... 57

Section 16:

FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE...............................................................58
Earth Ground Considerations............................................................................ 58
Connecting the Transformer.............................................................................. 58
Connecting The Battery ..................................................................................... 59
Polling Loop Current Drain Worksheet ............................................................ 60
Auxiliary Device Current Drain Worksheet ..................................................... 60

Section 17:

ACCESS CONTROL VIA ADEMCO PASSPOINT ACM...........................61

PART 2

PROGRAMMING THE SYSTEM ............................ 65

Section 18:

THE MECHANICS OF PROGRAMMING ................................................... 66
Using Data Field Programme Mode .................................................................. 66
System and Communication Defaults ............................................................... 66
Entering Data Field Programme Mode ............................................................. 66
Moving From One Page of Programming to Another....................................... 67
Viewing Data Fields ........................................................................................... 67
Entry Errors........................................................................................................ 67
Programming Systemwide Data fields.............................................................. 67
Programming Partition Specific Data Fields.................................................... 68
#93 Menu Mode Programming........................................................................... 68

Section 19:

ZONE INDEX & ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS............................................69

Section 20:

DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS.....................................................................72

Section 21:

#93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING ...........................................................88
#93 Main Menu Options..................................................................................... 88
Zone Programming ............................................................................................. 90
Sequential Mode Programming ......................................................................... 94
Report Code Programming................................................................................. 96
Programming Alpha Descriptors ....................................................................... 99
Alpha Descriptor Vocabulary And Character (ASCII) Chart ........................ 102
Device Programming ........................................................................................ 103
Relay Programming.......................................................................................... 104
Programming Output Devices ......................................................................... 105
Zone List Programming.................................................................................... 107
Relay Voice Descriptors.................................................................................... 108
Custom Word Vocabulary ................................................................................ 109
Custom Word Substitutes for VIP Annunciation ........................................... 109
RF Serial Number Clear Mode ........................................................................ 110

Section 22:

SCHEDULING OPTIONS.............................................................................111
Introduction To Scheduling.............................................................................. 111
Time Window Definitions................................................................................. 113
Open/Close Schedule Definitions..................................................................... 114
Programming with #80 Scheduling Menu Mode ............................................ 115
Basic Scheduling Menu Structure ................................................................... 116
Time Window Definitions Worksheet.............................................................. 117
Programming Time Windows .......................................................................... 118
Open/Close Worksheet ..................................................................................... 118
Programming Open/Close Schedules............................................................... 119
Holiday Definitions & Schedule Worksheet.................................................... 120
Programming Holiday Schedules .................................................................... 120
Time Driven Event Worksheet ........................................................................ 122
Programming Time Driven Events.................................................................. 123
Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet ........................................................ 125
Programming Access Control Schedules......................................................... 125
#81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode ............................................................. 126
Programming Temporary Schedules ............................................................... 127
#83 User Scheduling Menu Mode .................................................................... 128

Section 23:

SYSTEM COMMUNICATION......................................................................129
Reporting Formats............................................................................................ 129
Loading Communication Defaults ................................................................... 132
Contact ID Event Codes ................................................................................... 133
Communication Defaults.................................................................................. 135

– iii –

Section 24:

DOWNLOADING ...........................................................................................140
Getting On-Line with a Control Panel ............................................................ 140
On-Line Control Functions .............................................................................. 141
Access Security ................................................................................................. 141
Connecting a 4100SM Module for Direct Wire Downloading ........................ 142

Section 25:

SETTING THE REAL-TIME CLOCK.........................................................143

PART 3

SYSTEM OPERATION AND TESTING............... 144

Section 26:

SECURITY ACCESS CODES.......................................................................145
User Codes and Levels of Authority ................................................................ 145
To ADD, a Master, Manager or Operator Code .............................................. 148
To CHANGE a Master, Manager, or Operator Code...................................... 150
Adding an RF Key to an Existing User ........................................................... 150
To DELETE a Master, Manager, or Operator Code....................................... 150
To EXIT the User Edit Mode ........................................................................... 150

Section 27:

KEYPAD FUNCTIONS .................................................................................151
Arming Functions ............................................................................................. 151
Global Arming................................................................................................... 152
Access Control ................................................................................................... 152
Delay Closing Time........................................................................................... 153
Partition "GO TO" Command .......................................................................... 153
Viewing Capabilities of a User......................................................................... 153
Viewing Zone Descriptors ................................................................................ 153
Viewing Downloaded Messages ....................................................................... 153
Using the Built-in User's Manual.................................................................... 153
Panic Keys......................................................................................................... 154
Speed Key [D] (Macros) .................................................................................... 154
Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70) .............................................................. 155

Section 28:

TESTING THE SYSTEM...............................................................................156
Battery Test ...................................................................................................... 156
Dialler Test........................................................................................................ 156
LCD Display Test.............................................................................................. 156
Burglary Walk Test .......................................................................................... 156
Armed Burglary System Test .......................................................................... 157
Trouble Conditions ........................................................................................... 157
Turning the System Over to the User ............................................................. 158
To the Installer ................................................................................................. 158
REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS.................................................159
DIP SWITCH TABLES ..................................................................................160
SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................................163
PROGRAMME FORM/SYSTEM WORKSHEET ....................... Blue Insert
SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM ................Inside Back Cover

–iv–

LIST OF FIGURES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16a.
16b.
16c.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23a.
23b.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29a.
29b.
30.
31.

Installing The Lock ...................................................................................... 11
Mounting The PC Board.............................................................................. 11
Standard Phone Line Connections ............................................................. 12
AC Power And Battery Connections........................................................... 13
4300 Transformer Connections ................................................................... 13
Keypad Connections to Keypad Port Terminals ........................................ 14
Using a Supplementary Power Supply for Additional Keypads ............... 15
Zones 1-9 Wiring Connections..................................................................... 16
Wiring 2-Wire Smoke Detectors to Zone 1 ................................................. 17
4-Wire Smoke Detector Power Reset Using 4204 Relay Module .............. 18
Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors to Zone 8 ...................................... 19
Polling Loop Connections ............................................................................ 22
Polling Loop Extender Module Wiring ....................................................... 23
5881 RF Receiver (showing receiver setup) ............................................... 28
4204 Module ................................................................................................. 36
4300 Transformer Connections ................................................................... 37
XF10 Transformer Connections .................................................................. 37
PSC04 Transformer Connections................................................................ 37
4285 Voice Module Connections.................................................................. 40
Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections.......................................... 42
Connections to a Video Transmitter ........................................................... 43
J7 Connector For Voltage Triggers............................................................. 44
Ground Start Module Connections ............................................................. 45
Remote Keypad Sounding Connections...................................................... 46
Remote Keyswitch Wiring ........................................................................... 46
Keyswitch by Partition Wiring Connections .............................................. 47
Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment....................................................... 48
External Sounder Connections ................................................................... 49
AB12 Bell Box Wiring.................................................................................. 49
Event Log Printer Connections................................................................... 50
1361 Transformer and Battery Connections.............................................. 54
4300 Transformer Connections ................................................................... 54
XF10 Transformer Connections .................................................................. 54
Wiring the VISTA Gateway Module ........................................................... 63
Direct Wire Downloading Connections (With 4100SM Module)............. 142
Summary Of Connections Diagram ...........................Inside Back Cover

–v–

Conventions Used In This Manual
Before you begin using this manual, it is important that you understand the meaning of the
following symbols (icons).

These notes include information that you should be aware of before continuing with
the installation, and which, if not observed, could result in operational difficulties.

This symbol indicates a critical note that could seriously affect the operation of the
system, or could cause damage to the system. Please read each warning carefully.
This symbol also denotes warnings about physical harm to the installer.

Enter Zn Num.
(00 = Quit)

✴00

001

Many system options are programmed in an interactive
mode by responding to Alpha keypad display prompts.
These prompts are shown in a double-line box.
When programming the system, data fields are
indicated by a “star” (✴) followed by the data field
number.

PRODUCT MODEL NUMBERS: Unless noted otherwise, references to
specific model numbers represent Ademco products.

–vi–

PART 1
HARDWARE
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES

–1–

SECTION 1

General Description
NOTE: This manual describes features of Vista-120 with software revision "WAVIS120-14." New
features included in this version are indicated by margin lines.
The VISTA-120 is an 8-Partition alarm control panel that supports up to 128 zones using basic wired, polling
loop, and wireless zones. In addition, the control offers relay control and scheduling capabilities for
automating system functions. The major system features are outlined below.
New Features
This version of the VISTA-120 has enhanced features not found in the prior version. These enhancements
include the following:
• Support for unique features of 5800EU supervised
• Support for future intelligent polling loop motion
sensors that will send more data on the bus
wireless system, including RF jamming detection
and processing, activation of RF wireless siren,
• Support for Robofone version of Contact ID format
and more frequent supervision.
• Optional communication of verified intrusion
• Expansion of the number of programmable
alarm reports and provision of a unique output
outputs from 32 relays (on 4204s) to 96 via polling
• Support for the processing of high and low
loop support of up to 64 4101SN programmable
sensitivity maintenance signals from intelligent
relays and/or open collector outputs on 4208UXM
polling loop addressable smoke detectors
Mk3 zone expander modules (4 per module).
• Support for special Scandinavian required
• Integration of VISTA-120 with PassPoint Access
software features to permit insurance regulatory
Control System so that VISTA-120 status/users
approvals
can influence/control PassPoint ACS and unused
• Support for special telecom hardware/software
PassPoint zones can become part of VISTA-120’s
capabilities for PTT approvals in Finland, Norway,
complement of protection zones.
Sweden, Netherlands, Belgium, France, and
• Self actuating siren/bell support
Australia.
• Support for Final Contact Set arming mode
Basic Wired Zones
• Optional restrictions on downloading functions
Provides 9 basic wired zones:
permitted when system is armed
• EOLR supervision (optional for zones 2-8)
• Optional use of zone 9 for Telephone Line Monitor
supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors
output processing
•
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
• Optional restrictions on various keypad displays
•
Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1
during the armed or disarmed modes for higher
•
4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8 (not
security applications.
permitted for UL installations)
• Support for faster (8x) processing of polling loop
• Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on
sensor zone faults for serial number address
zone 8
devices
Polling Loop Expansion:
• Expansion of the number of zone lists for use with
Supports up to 119 additional wired zones using a
programmable outputs from 8 to 15
built-in polling (multiplex) loop interface. Current
• Optional limit on the number of zones that may be
drain can total up to 128mA. Polling loop zones
bypassed per partition
have the following characteristics:
• Optional use of the printer port to transmit ASCII
• Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices
Contact ID messages to computer systems,
• Supervised by control panel
communication networks, and other
• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
communication media
• Provision of a Contact ID data packet on the
keypad bus for interface to communication
networks and other communication media

–2–

Wireless Expansion:
Supports up to 63 wireless zones using 4281 type RF
Receiver or 128 wireless zones using 5881/5882EU
type RF Receiver (less if using basic wired and/or
polling loop zones). Wireless zones have the
following characteristics:
• Supervised by control panel for check-in signals
(except certain non-supervised transmitters)
• Supervised for low battery condition
• Cover
removal
tamper
protection
for
5800/5800EU series supervised transmitters
• Wall removal tamper protection for 5800EU
series supervised transmitters
• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
For specific information regarding number
of wireless zones supported by each RF
receiver, see the section on Wireless
Expansion later in this manual.

Pass Point Access Control System (ACS)
If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, up to
32 of these zones can be used as if they were basic
wired zones, as long as they are within VISTA-120's
total capacity of 128 protection zones.
Supervisory Zones
Provides additional zones for supervision of the
following:
J7 Trigger Outputs
Zone 973
RF Receivers
Zones 988, 990
Polling Loop
Zone 997
Peripheral Devices
Supports up to 32 addressable devices, which can be
any combination of 6139/5839EU keypads, RF
receivers (4281/5881/5882EU), relay modules (4204),
and the 4285 VIP module. Peripheral Devices have
the following characteristics:
• Terminated at the Keypad Port terminals on the
control panel (except for wireless 5839EU)
• Each device set to an individual address
(physically) according to the device's instructions
• Each device enabled in the system using the
Device Programming Mode
Optional Vista Interactive Phone Module
Supports the Ademco 4285 VIP Module, which
permits access to the security system by telephone
to do the following:
• Obtain system status information
• Arm and disarm security system
• Control relays and/or Powerline Carrier devices

8 Partitions
Provides the ability to control 8 separate areas
independently, each functioning as if it had its own
separate control. Partitioning features include:
• Up to 3 "Common Area" partitions, which arm
automatically when the last partition (1-8) that
shares the common area is armed and disarms
when the first partition (1-8) that shares the
common area is disarmed
• A Master Partition (9) to which keypads may be
assigned to view the status of all 8 partitions at
the same time
• Keypads assignable to one of 8 partitions or to
Master Partition 9 to view system status
• Ability to assign Relays/Powerline Carrier devices
to one or all 8 partitions
• Certain system options selectable for each
partition, such as Entry/Exit Delay and
Subscriber Account Number
User Codes
Accommodates 150 user codes, all of which can
operate any or all partitions. Each user, if assigned
to more than one partition, retains the same user
number across all partitions, and will only utilise
one user "slot" in the system. Certain characteristics
must be assigned to each user code as follows:
• Authority level for each partition (Master,
Manager, or several other Operator levels)
• Opening/Closing central station reporting option
• What partitions the code can operate
• Global arming capability (arm and disarm all
partitions the code has access to in one command)
• Use of a wireless transmitter to arm and disarm
the system (wireless transmitter must first be
"enrolled" into the system
Keypad Panic Keys
Accommodates three keypad panic keys: 1+✴ (A),
✴+# (B), and 3+# (C).
• Designated as zones 995 (1+✴), 996 (3+#), and
999 (✴+#)
• Activated by wired and wireless keypads
• Activated and reported separately by partition,
distinguished by Subscriber Acct. No. (or
Partition No. if Contact ID reporting is used)
Keypad Macros
Accommodates up to 4 keypad macro commands per
partition (each macro is a series of keypad
commands), which can be assigned to the A, B, C
and D keys on each partition's keypads.
This means, for example, that by pressing the "D"
key, the system can be programmed to log onto
another partition, bypass zones 2 and 3, and arm
that partition in the AWAY mode (explained in
detail later in this manual). Each macro can be up
to 32 characters in length.

–3–

Optional Output Devices (4204 Relays and
Powerline Carrier [i.e., X-10] Devices)
Accommodates the use of 32 output devices, which
can be a combination of ADEMCO's 4204 Relay
Modules or Powerline Carrier Devices (i.e., X-10),
and up to 64 polling loop trigger outputs (4 per
4208UXM MK3) or relay outputs (1 per 4101). Each
4204 module provides four "Form C" relays for
general purpose use.
Powerline Carrier Devices are controlled by signals
sent through the electrical wiring at the premises via
a 4300 transformer or other appropriate modulator
(e.g. XM10E in Europe; XF10 in Australia).
Therefore, if using Powerline Carrier Devices, a 4300
(110V) or XF10 (220V) transformer must be used in
place of the regular system transformer (plug-pack)
in the markets using those devices. Elsewhere, the
power transformer and the line carrier modulator are
separate (Europe/XM10E).
Output devices have the following characteristics:
• Can activate in response to system events
• Can activate using time intervals
• Can be activated manually using the #70 relay
command mode
• Can each have an alpha descriptor assigned to it
• Can be activated remotely from the PC
downloader during the download session
Access Control
VISTA-120 supports the capability with Ademco's
PassPoint Access Control System (ACS), PassPoint
ACS processes card reader information and controls
the locking and unlocking of doors. PassPoint also
has input zones and output relays/triggers. VISTA120 can incorporate uncommitted ACS zones as part
of its security system and can control uncommitted
ACS relays as if they were part of its own relay
group. VISTA-120 arming stations--wired and
wireless keypads and RF keys and zones--can be
used to control doors in the ACS. Conversely,
PassPoint access cards can control relays, triggers,
and X-10 AC mains signalled devices in the
VISTA-120 system. The arming status of VISTA-120
partitions can control access through doors in the
PassPoint ACS.
If programmed and PassPoint is not used, VISTA120 provides users with a command which activates
a relay for two seconds to open access doors (e.g.
area door). Each partition can be assigned one
access control relay.

–4–

Optional Keyswitch
Supports the Ademco 4146 keyswitch on any one of
the system's 8 partitions. If used, zone 7 is no longer
available as a protection zone.
In addition, supports one keyswitch per partition
via use of a serial number multiplex RPM (i.e.
4193SN) with a double pole switch (key removable
in both the arm and disarm positions).
Voltage Triggers
Provides a trigger connector whose pins change state
for different conditions. Used with Long Range
Radio transmitters or other devices such as a voice
dialler, a derived channel STU, a remote keypad
sounder, keyswitch Armed and Ready LEDs.
Event Log
Keeps a log of different event types (enabled in
programming) up to a total of 224 events.
• Can be viewed at the keypad or through the use
of V-Link upload software
• Can be printed on a serial printer using a
4100SM module as an interface to the control.
Scheduling
• Open/Close schedules (for control of
arming/disarming and reporting)
• Holiday schedules (allows different time windows
for Open/Close schedules)
• Timed
Events
(activate
relays,
autobypass/unbypass, auto-arm/disarm, etc.)
• Access schedules (for limiting system access to
users by time and/or day)
• End User Output Programming mode (provides
20 timers for relay control)
Audio Alarm Verification Option
Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification
(AAV) option which can be used in conjunction with
an output relay to permit voice dialogue between an
operator at the central station and a person at the
protected premises.
• Requires the use of an optional AAV unit, such as
Eagle model 1250
• If used, Zone 5 is no longer available as a
protection zone
Video Alarm Verification Option
Provides a programmable Video Alarm Verification
(VAV) option which can be used in conjunction with
an output relay to permit video imagery of the
protected premises using standard telephone lines.
• Requires the use of a Video Transmitter and
associated Video Receiver.

Cross-Zoning Capability
Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone
from going into alarm unless its linked zone is also
faulted within five minutes.
Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature
•System can tell the difference between a regular
alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an
Entry/Exit door open. If not subsequently
disarmed, faulted E/E zone(s) will be bypassed
and the system will arm
• Generates an "Exit Error" report by user and by
zone so the Central Station knows it was an exit
alarm and who caused it
Communication Formats
Supports the following formats for the Primary and
Secondary Central Station receivers:
• Ademco Low Speed (Standard or Expanded)
• Sescoa/Radionics
• Ademco Express
• Ademco Expanded High Speed
• Ademco Contact ID
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)
Compatibility
The initial release VISTA-120 is suitable for use in
many national telephone systems around the world,
but the latest versions of VISTA-120 have
specifically designed hardware and software
capabilities to meet the PSTN regulation
requirements of Norway, Sweden, Finland,
Netherlands, Belgium, and Australia.

Alternative Communications Media Capabilities
• Contact ID messages appear in a special keypad
bus data packet that can be extracted by Long
Range Radio transmitters, CATV modems and
various network interface devices designed to
access them.
• Contact ID messages can optionally be
transmitted in ASCII through the printer output
for RS232C interface to host computers and
various network interface devices.
Built-in User's Manual and Descriptor
Review
Contains a built-in Users Manual and Descriptor
Review mode.
• By pressing and holding any of the keypad
function keys for 5 seconds, a brief explanation of
that particular function scrolls across the alphanumeric display.
• By pressing and holding the READY key for 5
seconds and then releasing it, all programmed
zone descriptors can be displayed (one at a time).
This serves as a check for installers to be sure all
descriptors are entered properly.
Improved Downloading Speed
Uploads and downloads at 300 baud (predecessor
control rate is 75 baud), making upload/download
speed approximately four times faster.

–5–

SECTION 2

Planning A Partitioned System
This section provides the following information:
• Theory of partitioning
• Setting up a partitioned system
• Common Area Logic
• Master keypad setup and operation

Theory of Partitioning
This system provides the ability to arm and disarm up to 8 different areas, each as if it had
its own control. These areas are called partitions. Partitions are used when the user desires
to disarm certain areas while leaving other areas armed, or to limit access to certain areas to
specific individuals. Each user of the system can be assigned to operate any or all partitions,
and can be given a different authority level in each.
Facts you need to know about partitioning:
First, you must determine how many partitions are required (1-8). This must be done before
anything can be assigned to those partitions.

Keypads
Each keypad must be given a unique "address" and assigned to one partition (can also be
assigned to Partition 9 if "Master" keypad operation is desired--see Master Keypad Setup
and Operation later in this section).

Zones
Each zone must be assigned to one partition.
The zones assigned to a partition will be displayed on that partition's keypad(s).

Users
Each user can be assigned to one or more partitions. If a user is to operate more than one
partition and would like to arm/disarm all or some of those partitions with a single
command, the user must be enabled for "Global Arming" for those partitions (when entering
user codes).
A user with access to more than one partition (multiple access) can "log on" to one partition
from another partition's keypad, provided that programme field 2*18: ENABLE GOTO is
enabled for each partition you want to log on to from another.
Up to 3 partitions can be selected as "common area" partitions, and other partitions can
affect these partitions by causing arming/disarming of these partitions to be automated (see
Common Area Logic, later in this section).

Setting Up a Partitioned System
The basic steps to setting up a partitioned system are described below. If you need more
information on how to programme the prescribed options, see THE MECHANICS OF
PROGRAMMING section, as well as each corresponding section's programming procedure.
1. Determine how many partitions the system will consist of (programmed in field 2*00).
2. Assign keypads to partitions (#93 Device Programming mode).
3. Assign zones to partitions (#93 Zone Programming mode).
4. Confirm zones are displayed at the keypad(s) assigned to those partitions.
5. Assign users to partitions.
6. Enable the GOTO feature (programme field 2*18) for each partition a multiple-access user
can "log on" to (alpha keypad only).
7. Programme Partition-Specific fields (see DATA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS section).
–6–

Common Area Logic
When an installation consists of one or more partitions shared by users of other partitions in
a building, those shared partitions may be assigned as the "common area" partitions for the
system (programme fields 1*11, 1*14, 1*17). An example of this might be in a medical
building where there are two doctor's offices and a common entrance area (see example that
follows explanation).
This option employs logic for automatic arming and disarming of the common area.
Programming fields affect the way the common area will react relative to the status of other
partitions. They are: 1*12, 1*15, 1*18 (Affects Common Area) and 1*13, 1*16, 1*19 (Arms
Area).
1*12, 1*15, 1*18 Affects Common Area (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of
the common area as follows:
a. When the first partition that affects the common area is disarmed, the common area will
also be disarmed.
b. The common area cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the common
area is armed.
c. Arming the last partition that affects the common area will not automatically attempt to
arm the common area.
1*13, 1*16, 1*19 Arms Common Area (must be programmed by partition)
Setting this option to 1 for a specific partition causes that partition to affect the operation of
the common area as follows:
a. When the first partition that affects the common area is disarmed, the common area will
also be disarmed.
b. The common area cannot be armed unless every partition selected to affect the common
area is armed.
c. Arming the last partition that is programmed to arm the common area will automatically
attempt to arm the common area. If any faults exist in the common area partition, or
another partition that affects the common area is disarmed, the common area cannot be
armed, and the message "UNABLE TO ARM LOBBY PARTITION" will be displayed.
You cannot select a partition to "arm" the common area unless it has first been
selected to "affect" the common area. Enable field 1*12, 1*15, 1*18 before enabling
field 1*13, 1*16, 1*19 respectively.
The following chart summarizes how the common area partition will operate if different
options are set for another partition in fields 1*18 and 1*19.
1*12, 1*15,1*18
Affects common
Area
0
1
1
0

1*13, 1*16,1*19
Arms common
Area
0
0
1
1

Can be armed if
Disarms when
Attempts to arm when
other partitions
partition disarms?
partition arms?
disarmed?
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
---ENTRY NOT ALLOWED---

–7–

Example
Here is an example of how the area would react in a typical setup.

OFFICE #1

OFFICE #2

COMMON AREA

MAIN ENTRANCE

User #1 has access to Office #1 and the Common Area.
User #2 has access to Office #2 and the Common Area.
Office #1 is set up to affect the Common Area, but not arm it.
Office #2 is set up to affect and arm the Common Area.
For the purpose of this example, the ( ) indicate the current status of the other partition
when the user takes action.

Sequence #1:
User #1:
User #2:
User #1:
User #2:

Office 1
Disarms
(Disarmed)
Arms
(Armed)

Office 2
(Armed)
Disarms
(Disarmed)
Arms

Common Area Action
Disarms
No Change
No change
Arms

Office 2
Disarms
(Disarmed)
Arms
(Armed)

Common Area Action
Disarms
(No change)
No Change
No Change

Sequence #2:
User #2:
User #1:
User #2:
User #1:

Office 1
(Armed)
Disarms
(Disarmed)
Arms

Notice that in sequence #1, since Office #2 was the last to arm, the common area also armed
(Office #2 is programmed to affect and arm the common area). In sequence #2, the common
area could not arm when Office #2 armed, because Office #1, which affects the common area,
was still disarmed.
When Office #1 armed, the common area still did not arm because Office #1 was not
programmed to arm the common area. User #1 would have to arm the common area
manually. Therefore, you would want to programme a partition to affect and arm the
common area, if the users of that partition are expected to be the "last out" of the building.

Common Area Programming Requirements
The following should be considered when assigning common areas.
1. Common areas must be defined in ascending numerical order. That is, the common area
containing the lowest partition number should be defined as common area 1 (ex. Do not
define partition 8 as common area 1 and partition 1 as common area 2).
2. Common area 1 must be defined before defining common area 2, and common area 2
must be defined before defining common area 3.
3. A common area cannot be designated as an "affecting" and/or "arming" partition of
another common area.
4. A partition not defined as a common area can be designated as an "affecting" and/or
"arming" partition for more than one common area. If designated as an "arming"
partition, it must also be an " affecting" partition

–8–

How User Access Codes Affect the Common Area
Codes with "Global" Arming
If a code is given "global arming" when it is defined (see Section 24: SECURITY ACCESS
CODES), the keypad will ask "Arm all?" or "Disarm all?" whenever the user tries to arm or
disarm the partitions he has access to from a keypad. This allows the user to pick and
choose the partitions to be armed or disarmed, and so eliminates the "automatic" operation of
the common area. Keep in mind, however, that if attempting to arm all, and another
"affecting" partition is disarmed, the user will not be able to arm the common area, and the
message "UNABLE TO ARM COMMON AREA PART" will be displayed.
Codes with "Non-Global" Arming
If arming with a non-global code, the common area partition operation will be automatic, as
described by fields 1*12, 1*15, 1*18 and 1*13, 1*16, 1*19.

Other Methods of Arming/Disarming
When arming or disarming a partition that affects and/or arms the common area in one of
the following manners, common area logic remains active:
•

Quick-Arm

•

Keyswitch

•

Wireless Button

•

Wireless Keypad

Arming/Disarming Remotely
If arming or disarming remotely (through V-LINK downloading software), the common area
will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or disarm the
common area. The common area must be armed separately, after arming all affecting
partitions first.
Auto-Arming/Disarming
If scheduling is used to automatically arm and/or disarm partitions, the common area
partition will not automatically follow another partition that is programmed to arm or
disarm the common area. The common area must be included as a partition to be
armed/disarmed.
If using auto-arming, make sure that the Auto-arm Delay and Auto-arm Warning
periods (fields 2*05 and 2*06) combined are longer than that of any other partition
that affects the common area. This will cause the common area to arm last.

–9–

Master Keypad Setup and Operation
Although this system has eight actual partitions, it provides an extra partition strictly for
the purpose of assigning keypads as "Master" keypads for the system.
Any keypad assigned to Partition 9 in #93 Device Programming mode will become a "Master"
keypad. A Master keypad reflects the status of the entire system (Partitions 1-8) on its
display at one time. This is useful because it eliminates the need for a security officer in a
building to have to "log-on" to various partitions from one partition's keypad to find out
where an alarm has occurred.
The following is an example of a typical display:
SYSTEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS R R N N A ✴ B A
Possible status indications include:
A = Armed Away
S = Armed Stay
R = Ready
B = Bypassed/Ready

M=
I=
N=
✴=

Armed Maximum
Armed Instant
Not Ready
Alarm Memory/Trouble present

To obtain more information regarding a particular partition, enter ✴ + [Partition No.] (i.e.,
✴4). In order to affect that partition, the user must use a code that has access to that
partition. Also, in order for a user of any partition to log onto Partition 9 to view the status
of all partitions, that user must have access to all partitions. Otherwise, access will be
denied.
The following is an example of what would be displayed for a fault condition on Zone 2
(Loading Dock Window) on Partition 1 (Warehouse) when logging on from a keypad in
Partition 9:
WHSE DISARMED
KEY ✴ FOR FAULTS
This is the normal display that appears at Partition 1's keypad(s). Pressing [✴] will display:
FAULT 002 LOADING
DOCK WINDOW
Additional zone faults will be displayed one at a time. To display a new partition's status,
press [✴] + [Partition No.]. This will display the status of the new partition.
The "Armed" LED on a Master keypad will be lit only if all partitions have been armed
successfully. The "Ready" LED will be lit only if all partitions that are disarmed are "ready
to arm." Neither LED will be lit if only some partitions are armed and only some disarmed
partitions are "ready."
The sounder on a Master keypad will reflect the sound of the most critical condition on all of
the partitions. The priority of the sounds is as follows:
A. Pulsing fire alarm sounds
B. Steady burglar alarm sounds
C. Trouble sounds (rapid beeping)
The sounder may be silenced by pressing any key on the Master keypad or a keypad in the
partition where the condition exists.
A Master keypad uses the same panics as Partition 1. Master keypad panics are
sent to Partition 1, and will activate in Partition 1. Therefore, panics must be
programmed for Partition 1.

–10–

SECTION 3

False Alarm Reduction Features
This section provides the following information:
• General information about false alarms
• Exit Error Logic and related reports
• Exit Delay Reset
• Cross-Zoning
• Call Waiting Defeat

General Information
This control supports features which help minimize false alarms from occurring. Most false
alarms occur either upon exiting the premises, or because of a zone which tends to go into
alarm either due to environmental factors, or because the zone's resistance to the control
may be on the edge of acceptability. We call this condition an "intermittent sensor."
Features which prevent false alarms due to these circumstances are:
• Autobypass Logic and related reports
• Exit Delay Reset
• Cross-Zoning

Autobypass Logic
This feature is intended to reduce the incidence of false alarms due to exit doors that are left
open after the exit delay has expired. If this feature is enabled in programme field 1*20, the
following will occur:
At the end of the exit delay, if a door is left open or an interior zone is faulted, the system
will start the entry delay period, and will sound the bell(s),siren(s) and keypad sounders for
the duration of entry delay. This gives the user time to re-enter the premises and disarm the
system before autobypass occurs. If field *07 is enabled, the faulted zone(s) are autobypassed
at the end of exit delay (no entry delay is activated).
If the user does not re-enter the premises and disarm the system, the system will bypass the
faulted entry/exit and/or interior zone(s). The rest of the system will be armed. In addition,
the following dialler reports will be sent to the central station if programmed:
• Autobypass by User (not sent if using ADEMCO High Speed format
• Autobypass by Zone (Sent as regular alarm if using ADEMCO High Speed format)
• Bypass reports
NOTE: If field *07 is enabled and field 1*20 is not enabled, then faults remaining in the
exit route at the end of the exit delay will cause an immediate alarm.
Another report, designed to notify the central station that an alarm has occurred within five
minutes of arming, is called the Recent Close report. This report, as well as the
autobypass reports, are programmed in data fields 1*40 and 1*41.

Exit Delay Reset
This feature is designed to allow an operator to re-enter the premises to retrieve a forgotten
item without triggering an alarm. This feature is enabled in programme field 1*21, and
works in the following way:
When the panel is armed, the normal exit delay begins. After the user exits, and the door
closes, the exit delay time is reset to 60 seconds. If, within this 60 second period, the entry
door is re-opened, the panel will restart the exit delay sequence again using the programmed
exit delay time. This feature will only be activated once after arming.

– 11 –

Cross-Zoning
The Cross-Zoning feature is designed so that a combination of two zones must be faulted
within a five minute period to cause an alarm on either zone. This prevents momentary
faults from causing an alarm condition. You can select four pairs of cross zones, keeping in
mind the following:
• Both linked zones must protect the same area
• Both linked zones must be in the same partition
• A Fire zone must only be linked to another fire zone protecting the same physical area
(see note below)
The four pairs of cross-zones are programmed in data fields 1*22, 1*23, 1*24, and 1*25.
DO NOT cross-zone a fire zone with a burglary zone under any circumstance. A fire
zone must only be linked to another fire zone and BOTH must be protecting the
same physical area (no walls or partitions separating them). As a guideline, we
recommend that spacing between fire cross-zones be no further than 9m.

Conditions That Affect Cross-Zone Operation
1. In the event of a continuous fault on one of the linked zones that lasts longer
than five minutes, a fault on the second zone will cause an alarm immediately.
2. If one of the zones in a pair is bypassed or has a zone response type set to 0,
the cross-zoning feature will not apply,
3. If an Entry/Exit zone is linked with an Interior Follower zone, be sure to enter
the Entry/Exit zone as the first zone of the pair. This will ensure that the
entry delay time is started before the follower zone is processed.
4 a. If a relay is programmed to activate on a fault of one of the zones, the relay
will activate without the other zone being faulted.
b. If a relay is programmed to activate on either an alarm or trouble, both
zones must trip before the relay will activate, and both zones must restore
for the relay to deactivate (if relay is programmed to deactivate on a Zone
List Restore).

Call Waiting Defeat Logic
Although this option does not directly prevent false alarms, it may prevent the central
station from taking action on a potential false alarm. After the panel's initial call to report
the alarm, if the panel attempts to make an additional call, perhaps for a cancel or a zone
restoral, an operator at the central station attempting to contact the premises to verify
whether or not the alarm is valid will hear the phone ringing indefinitely and will have to
dispatch on the call if call waiting is not defeated.
This option, enabled in programme field 1*42, will attempt to defeat call waiting on the first
out-going call attempt to both the primary and secondary numbers. It does this by dialing a
special sequence preceding the phone number (but after the PABX number). The panel will
dial *70 if using TouchTone multifrequencies and 1170 if using rotary decadic dial pulses.
The panel does not attempt to defeat call waiting on each call attempt, since the
phone company may not complete the call if the sequence is dialed on a phone line
that does not have call waiting.

–12–

SECTION 4

Installing the Control
This section provides installation instructions for the following:
• Mounting the control cabinet
• Installing the cabinet lock (if used)
• Installing the main circuit board
• Standard phone line connections
• Connecting the AC transformer
• Installing the backup battery in the cabinet
• Making earth ground connections

Mounting the Cabinet
• Mount the control cabinet to a sturdy wall using fasteners or anchors (not supplied) in a
clean, dry area which is not readily accessible to the general public. The back of the
control cabinet has 4 holes for this purpose.
• Before mounting the circuit board, remove the metal knockouts for the wiring entry that
you will be using. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO REMOVE THE KNOCKOUTS AFTER THE
CIRCUIT BOARD HAS BEEN INSTALLED.

Installing The Cabinet Lock
1. Remove the lock knockout on the
control cabinet cover. Insert the key
into the lock. Position the lock in the
hole making certain that the latch
will make contact with the latch
bracket when the door is closed.
2. While holding the lock steady, insert
the retainer clip into the retainer
slots.
Use an Ademco No. N6277 Cam Lock
and No. N6277-1 Push-On Retainer Clip
(supplied).

RETAINER CLIP
(NOTE POSITION)

LOCKED

RETAINER
SLOTS
RETAINER
CLIP

UNLOCKED

CABINET DOOR BOTTOM

Figure 1. Installing The Lock

Installing the Control's Circuit Board
Refer to the Mounting the PC Board diagram.
• Hang the three mounting clips on the raised cabinet tabs. Make sure the clip orientation
is exactly as shown in the diagram to avoid damage to the clip when mounting screws are
tightened. This will also avoid problems with insertion and removal of the PC board.
• Insert the top of the circuit board into the slots at the top of the cabinet. Make certain that
the board rests in the slots as indicated in step 2 detail.
• Swing the base of the board into the mounting clips and secure the board to the cabinet
with the accompanying screws (as illustrated in the diagram).
DETAIL SIDE
VIEW OF BOARD
INSERTED INTO
SLOTS

3RD CLIP
REQUIRED

DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP AND
BOARD INSTALLED

DETAIL SIDE VIEW OF CLIP INSTALLATION
A-CABINET TAB WITHOUT CLIP
B-CABINET TAB WITH HANGING CLIP

Figure 2. Mounting The PC Board
– 13 –

Make certain that the mounting screws are tight. This insures that there is a good
ground connection between the PC board and the cabinet. Also, dress field wiring
away from the microprocessor (center) section of the PC board. Use the 2 loops on
the left and right sidewalls of the cabinet for anchoring field wiring using tie wraps.
These steps are important to minimizing the risk of panel RF interference with
television reception.

Standard Phone Line Connections
1. Connect the incoming phone line and handset wiring to the main terminal block as follows
(see Standard Telephone Line Connections diagram) :
(Does not pertain to Australia)
TB1-26:
Local Handset (TIP)
TB1-27:
Local Handset (RING)
TB1-28:
Incoming Phone Line (TIP)
TB1-29:
Incoming Phone Line (RING)
2. In Australia, plug the phone cord into the jack on the control's PCB.
3. If you want to connect the panel to phone lines that require ground start capability, then a
675 Ground Start Module must be used. This module is triggered by one of the outputs on
the connector labeled J7 (see VOLTAGE TRIGGERS section).
To prevent the risk of shock, disconnect phone lines at telco jack before servicing
the panel.

PABX
• If the communicator is connected to a telephone line inside a PABX, be sure the
PABX has a back-up power supply that can support the PABX for 24 hours. Many
PABXs are not power backed up and connection to such a PABX will result in a
communication failure if power is lost.
MAKE CONNECTIONS USING
No. 4142TR CABLE

J8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PHONE
TRANSFORMER
MODULE

➡

PREMISES
PHONES

▲

+
PLUG

N.O.

2k EOLR
(note 1,4)

PHONE
CONNECTION
JACK
EARTH GROUND

Connect to good earth
ground to maintain immunity
to transients. See Instructions
for proper grounding.

+
4190
RPM

GLASS
BREAK

N.C.

Figure 3. Standard Telephone Line Connections

POLLING LOOP

➧

TIP
RJ31X
JACK RING

Programmable Response
(Fast/Normal) Loop

DIRECT
CONNECT
CORD

TIP
RING

RED (RING)

GREEN (TIP)

GREY (RING)

INCOMING TELECOM LINE

▲

BROWN (TIP)

ZONE 8 ZONE 9

EARTH GROUND

LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

▲

TERMINALS
ON CONTROL

GROUND

{
{
26

J7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

▲

Handset

Incoming
Telecom Line

N.C.

4192SD
SMOKE

N.C.

4278EX
PIR

Polling loop rating: 128mA
maximum. See Installation
Instructions for maximum
number of devices supported
and maximum wire run length.

Australian Phone Connections

Connecting the AC Mains Transformer
1361: Wire a 1361 110VAC transformer (not supplied) to terminals 1 and 2 on the control
panel (before connecting the battery) as shown in the AC Power and Battery Connections
diagram. See wiring table below for wire size to use. In 220VAC regions, use a
16.5VAC/40VA output transformer.
Do not connect the transformer to the AC mains until you are instructed to do so.
Refer to the FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE section for information regarding
proper Earth Ground connections.
–14–

Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH

RED (+)

BATTERY
TABS

GEL CELL
BATTERY

CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7 VDC

NO CONNECTION

Connect to
24hr. source
of AC mains

TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
or 4300, XM10E, or
XF10 if X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED.

NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

BLK (–)

PRIMARY POWER
Supplied by a
transformer which
is rated at
16.5VAC, 40VA.
Caution must be
taken when wiring
this transformer to
the panel to guard
against blowing the
fuse inside the
transformer (nonreplaceable).

Figure 4: AC Power And Battery Connections
The complete wiring
for the 4300/XF10
transformer is also
covered in the RELAY
OUTPUTS &
POWERLINE
CARRIER DEVICES
section.

4300: If using 110VAC/60Hz (see page 37 for 220VAC connection) Powerline
Carrier devices, the 4300 transformer interface must be used instead of the
regular 1361 transformer. The 4300 supplies the control panel with AC, and also
sends control pulses through the premises electrical system to control the
Powerline Carrier devices. In Australia, use the XF10 and in Europe, use the
XM10E in addition to the normal 16.5VAC/40VA output transformer. See Final
Power Up section.
1. Connect terminals 1 and 3 (AC) and terminal 2 (Ground) of the 4300
transformer interface to control panel terminals 1, 2, and 30, respectively.
2. Run a 6-conductor cable between the 4300 and the panel. Splice this cable to
a 4142TR cable as shown below. Note that the white and yellow wires of the
4142TR must be spliced together.
4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

Sync Data Com

GRAY

115VAC
60Hz

YELLOW
WHITE
RED
GREEN
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK

GR IN 2
OU
ND
IN
3

J8 CONNECTOR

GR
OU
OU ND
T
OU 5
T
GR 6
O
GR UND
OU
ND

Earth
AC Ground AC

VIOLET

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4142TR CABLE
TB1 TB1
-1 -30

TB1
-2

Figure 5: 4300 Transformer Connections
Do not connect the transformer to AC mains until you are instructed to do so later in
the manual.

Installing The Back-Up Battery
If necessary, refer to the FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE section for information
regarding battery size to use, etc.
Do not attach the connector cable to the battery terminals until you are instructed to
do so later in the manual.
1. Place the 12-volt back-up battery in the control cabinet.
2. Attach Red and Black wires on the battery connector cable as follows:
a. Red to the positive (+) battery terminal on the control board (see diagram above or
the Summary of Connections Diagram for location).
b. Black to the negative (–) battery terminal on the control board.
NOTE: A dual battery harness is supplied that allows two batteries to be wired in parallel
for increased capacity.

– 15 –

SECTION 5

Installing the Keypads
This section provides the following information:
• A list of keypads that may be used
• Instructions for wiring and mounting the wired keypads
• Instructions for addressing the keypads
• A preliminary check-out procedure to ensure that the keypads are functioning properly in
the system

Keypads That May Be Used
• Two Line Alpha Display wired 6139, 6139AV and wireless 5839EU
• Up to 32 addressable devices, including keypads, may be used in the system, as long as
the auxiliary current is available (you may need to use an auxiliary power supply if the
750mA auxiliary output is exceeded)

Wiring To The Keypads
1. Determine wire size by referring to the wiring length/size chart below.
2. Wire keypads to a single wire run or connect individual keypads to separate wire runs.
The maximum wire run length from the control to a single keypad which is wired back to
the control must not exceed the lengths listed in the table.Wire Run Length Table
Wire Size

Length

0.64 mm

137 m

0.81 mm

213 m

1.0 mm

335 m

1.3 mm

533 m

A. The length of all wire runs combined must not exceed 610 metres when
unshielded quad conductor cable is used (305 metres if shielded cable used.)
B. If more than one keypad is wired to a run, then the above maximum lengths must
be divided by the number of keypads on the run (i.e. the maximum length would be
69 metres if two keypads are wired using 0.64 mm diameter wire).
For keypads connected to a single 4-wire run, determine the current used by all units
connected to the single wire run, then refer to the Wiring Run chart to determine the
maximum wire length that can be safely used for each wire size. Current drain for all devices
can be found in the SPECIFICATIONS AND ACCESSORIES section.
3. Run field wiring from the control to the keypads (using standard 4-conductor twisted wire
cable using the wire size determined in step 1).
4. Connect keypads to the Keypad Port terminals 6, 7, 8, and 9 on the control board, as
shown below.
6

RED
BLACK

B
7
GREEN
8
G
YELLOW
9
Y

KEYPADS

CONTROL
TERMINALS

Figure 6. Keypad Connections To the Keypad Port terminals.

–16–

Using a Supplementary Power Supply to Power Additional Keypads
The control provides 750mA of auxiliary standby power for powering keypads and other
devices from the auxiliary power output. Aside from this, the control can support up to 32
peripheral devices (keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, etc.). The backup battery will
supply power to these devices in the event that AC power is lost. When the control’s auxiliary
power load for all devices exceeds 750mA, you can power additional keypads from a
regulated, 12VDC power supply (e.g., AD12612). The AD12612 power supplies have a backup
battery which can power these keypads in the event of AC mains power loss.
Keypads powered from supplies which do not have a backup battery will not function
when AC mains is lost. Therefore, be sure to power at least one keypad from the
Control's auxiliary power output.
Connect additional keypads as shown below using the keypad wire colours shown. Be sure to
observe the current ratings for the power supply used.
A. Make connections directly to the screw terminals as shown. Make no connection to
the keypad blue wire (if present).
B. Be sure to connect the negative (–) terminal on the Power Supply unit to terminal 7
(AUX – ) on the control.

TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

BGY

CONTROL
TERMINAL STRIP
AUX AUX.DATA DATA
+
–
IN
OUT
6
7
8
9

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

–

TO KEYPAD GRN WIRE
TO KEYPAD YEL WIRE

TO KEYPAD RED WIRE

TO KEYPAD BLK WIRE

SUPPLEMENTARY
POWER SUPPLY

IMPORTANT:
MAKE CONNECTIONS
DIRECTLY TO SCREW
TERMINALS AS SHOWN.
MAKE NO CONNECTION
TO THE KEYPAD BLUE
WIRE (IF PRESENT).

Figure 7: Using A Supplementary Power Supply For Keypads

Mounting the Keypads
1. Mount the keypads at a height that is convenient for the user. Refer to the instructions
provided with the keypad for mounting procedure.You can either surface mount or flush
mount keypads (using an appropriate Trim Ring Kit: 6139TRK). Refer to the mounting
instructions and template included with the keypad and/or trim ring kit for specific
information.

Addressing the Keypads/Preliminary Check-out Procedure
If you want to check that the system is working before connecting field wiring from zones and
devices, do the following:
1. Temporarily connect a 2000 ohm end-of-line resistor across each of the basic wired zones
1–8, as shown in the Summary of Connections diagram. Connect a jumper across the
zone 9 terminals. Without actual zone wiring or EOL resistors connected, the keypads
will not display the “Ready” message.
2.
Power up the system temporarily by connecting the AC mains.
The keypads will not operate until they are assigned an address and enabled in the
system's Device Programming Mode.

– 17 –

3. Set each keypad to an individual address (00-30) according to the keypad's instructions.
Set one alpha keypad for address "00" and other keypads for higher addresses (01, 02,
and 03 are enabled in the system's default programme). Any keypads set for address 04
and above will appear blank until they are enabled in the system's programme.
Keypads set to the non-addressable mode (address 31) may interfere with other
keypads (as well as other devices) connected to the keypad terminals.
4. After addresses are set, the green “READY” LED should light, and the words
DISARMED...READY TO ARM should be displayed on keypads set to addresses 00, 01,
02, and 03.
If the “Ready” display does not appear on any of the keypads in the system (in either of
the partitions), or a “Not Ready” message is displayed, check the keypad wiring
connections, and make sure each of the 8 basic wired zones has a 2000-ohm resistor
connected across its terminals.
5. When the proper “Ready” message is displayed on the keypad(s) addressed at
00, 01, 02, and 03 the system is functioning properly at this point.
Do not remove the EOL resistors until you are ready to make connections to
the wired zones, to allow for testing later in the manual.
If an OPEN CIRCUIT is present on the keypad, data from the control is not reaching the
keypad. Please check your wiring.

–18–

SECTION 6

Basic Wired Zones 001-009
This section provides the following information
• Common characteristics of wired zones
• Wiring burglary and panic devices to zones 1-8
• Wiring 2-wire smoke detectors to zone 1
• Wiring 4-wire smoke detectors to zones 1-8
• Compatible smoke detectors (2- and 4-wire)
• Wiring 2-wire glassbreak detectors to zone 8
• Zone 9 applications
• Check-out procedure for wired zones

Common
Characteristics of
Wired Zones 1-8

•
•
•
•
•
•

EOLR supervision (optional for zones 2-8) supporting N.O. or N.C. sensors
Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions
Up to 16 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 1.
4-wire smoke or heat detectors on zones 1-8
Up to 50 2-wire latching glassbreak detectors on zone 8.
Zones 2-7 will sense a fault (when EOLR supervision is used) when the loop
resistance is outside of ± 50% of the EOLR value.

Wiring Burglary and 1. Connect sensors/contacts to the basic wired zone terminals (10 through 22).
• Connect N.C. devices in series with the high (+) side of the loop. The 2K EOL
Panic Devices to
resistor must be connected in series with the devices, following the last device.
Zones 1-8
• Connect N.O. devices in parallel (across) the loop. Observe polarity when
wiring smoke detectors. The 2K EOL resistor must be connected across the
loop wires at the last device.
Red Jumper
11

ZONE 4 ZONE 5

ZONE 6 ZONE 7

ZONE 8 ZONE 9

N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR

Fire
Usage

+
N.C.

SMOKE

N.C.

LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTORS

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP

(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)

ZONE 1

N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR

N.C.

Burg.
Usage

N.C.

2k EOLR

N.O.
2k EOLR

N.C.

N.O.
N.O.

2k EOLR

GLASS
BREAK

N.C.
N.O.

Programmable Response
(Fast/Normal) Loop

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

Zone resistance (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS MAXIMUM
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS MAXIMUM

N.C.

2k EOLR

Zone response time:
ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec
ZONE 9: Programmable for
Fast: 10mSec-15mSec
Normal: 350mSec-500mSec
(default response)

Figure 8: Zones 1-9 Wiring Connections
The maximum zone resistance is 100 ohms for zones 1 and 8, and 300 ohms for all
other zones (excluding the 2K EOL resistor).

– 19 –

Wiring 2-Wire
Smoke Detectors
to Zone 1

Zone 1 has the added capability of supporting 2-wire smoke detectors. This zone
provides enough standby current (2 mA) to power up to sixteen of the smoke
detectors listed on the following page. Each zone provides only enough alarm
current (20 mA) to power one smoke detector in the alarmed state. When
assigned zone type 9, the second entry of a Security Code + OFF sequence at a
keypad will interrupt power to this zone to allow detectors to be reset following
an alarm.
1. Connect 2-wire smoke detectors across zone 1 terminals (10 & 11) as shown
below. Observe proper polarity when connecting the detectors.
2. If an EOL resistor is presently connected across zone 1 terminals, remove it.
The EOL resistors must be connected across the loop wires of each
zone at the last detector.
The alarm current provided by zone 1 will support only one smoke detector in the
alarmed state.

(+)

(-)

(+)

(-)

ZONE 1

SMOKE

2k EOLR

2-WIRE
SMOKE DETECTOR

Figure 9: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Connected to Zone 1

Compatible 2-Wire
Smoke Detectors

You may use up to sixteen 2-wire smoke detectors each on zone listed in the table
below.
DETECTOR TYPE
DEVICE MODEL #
Photoelectric, plug-in head
System Sensor 2600EC
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire†
System Sensor 2300T
†
Photoelectric, direct wire
System Sensor 2400
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire†
System Sensor 2400TH
Photoelectric w/B401B base†
System Sensor 2451
Photoelectric w/heat sensor and B401B base†
System Sensor 2451TH
Ionisation, plug-in head
System Sensor 1600EC
Ionisation, direct wire†
System Sensor 1400
Ionisation w/B401B base†
System Sensor 1451
Photoelectric duct detect. w/DH400 base†
System Sensor 2451
Ionisation duct detector w/DH400 base†
System Sensor 1451DH
†
Ionisation, direct wire
System Sensor 1100
Ionisation w/B110LP base†
System Sensor 1151
Photoelectric, direct wire†
System Sensor 2100
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire†
System Sensor 2100T
Photoelectric w/B110LP base†
System Sensor 2151
† NOTE: These smoke detectors are Listed for use with the VISTA-120 and are
the only 2-wire smoke detectors that may be used in UL applications.

–20–

Unsupervised
Usage of Zone 1

Zone 1 can also be used for normally closed, unsupervised devices by doing the
following:
1. Cut the red jumper on the PC board located above Zone 1.
2. Connect closed circuit devices in series with terminals 10 and 11.

Wiring 4-Wire
Smoke Detectors
to Zones 1-8

When programmed for fire warning usage, all zones can monitor 4-wire smoke
detectors or N.O. fire alarm initiating devices. You may use as many 4-wire
smoke detectors as can be powered from the panel's auxiliary power output
without exceeding the output's rating (see FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE
section for auxiliary power ratings).
Auxiliary power to 4-wire smoke detectors is not automatically reset after an alarm
and therefore must be momentarily interrupted using either a normally-closed
momentary switch wired in series with one side of the aux. power to the smokes, or
using a 4204 relay as described below.
Using a 4204 relay allows the detectors to be reset via the second entry of a
Security Code + OFF sequence. The 4204 relay must be programmed to activate
on Zone Type/System Operation 54 (Fire Zone Reset). See RELAY OUTPUTS &
POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES section for more information.
1. Connect 12 volt power for the detectors from Auxiliary Power terminals 6 and
7 as follows:: Wire the [+] side of Auxiliary Power (Terminal 6) to the N.C.
contact of the 4204 relay. Wire the Center Arm or Pole of the Relay to the [+]
Power side of the smoke detector. Connect the [-] side of the smoke detector to
[-] Aux. Power (Terminal 7). Observe proper polarity when connecting
detectors (see diagram below).
Power to 4-wire smoke detectors should be supervised (use a System Sensor
A77-716-01 EOL relay module connected as shown).
+

TO
PANEL
ZONE
(ZONE 2-8)

{

TO
PANEL
AUXILLIARY
POWER
(TERMINALS 6, 7)

{

EOL
RELAY

–
–

4-WIRE
SMOKE
DETECTOR

–
–
+
NOTES:
• PROGRAMME THE RELAY TO
TRANSFER ON FIRE ZONE
RESET (ACTIVATION CODE 54).
SEE 4204 RELAY MODULE
SECTION FOR DETAILS.
• SECOND CODE AND OFF
ENTERED AT CONSOLE
MOMENTARILY INTERRUPTS
DETECTOR POWER.

NO CONNECTION

C NC

RESET
RELAY 1, 2, 3 OR 4
4204 RELAY MODULE

Figure 10: 4-Wire Smoke Detector Power Reset Using 4204 Relay Module
2. Connect detectors (including heat detectors, if used) across terminals of the
zone selected. All detectors must be wired in parallel. Remove the 2000
ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals. You must
connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.

– 21 –

Compatible 4-Wire
Smoke Detectors

Use any 4-wire smoke detector which is rated for 10-14VDC operation and which
has alarm reset time not exceeding 6 seconds. Some compatible 4-wire smoke
detectors are listed below.
Photoelectric, direct wire
Photoelectric w/heat sensor, direct wire
Ionisation, direct wire

System Sensor 2412
System Sensor 2412TH
System Sensor 1412

Configuring Zone
7 for Alternate
Keyswitch
Function

Zone 7 may be programmed to serve as a keyswitch input. If using a keyswitch
on zone 7, it can be assigned to only one partition. To enable the keyswitch, do
the following:
1. Enter the partition number to which the keyswitch is assigned in programme
field *15.
2. Zone 7 is automatically assigned a response type 10 (Interior w/Delay).
3. Wire the keyswitch to zone 7. Connect the EOL resistor across the zone. If
using keyswitch LEDs, wire as shown in the VOLTAGE TRIGGERS section.

Wiring 2-Wire
Latching Glass
Break Detectors
To Zone 8

Use zone 8 for connection of compatible 2-wire latching-type glass break
detectors. Wire as follows (also see diagram below):
1. Connect all detectors in parallel across zone 8 (terminals 21 and 22).

Remove the 2000 ohm EOL resistor if connected across the selected zone terminals.
You must connect the EOL resistor across the loop wires at the last detector.
GLASSBREAK
DETECTOR

SHOCK
SENSOR
SH-8

21
2000
OHMS
EOLR

(+)

ZONE 8

2000
OHMS
EOLR

(+)

(-)

LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

ZONE 8

(-)

Figure 11a. Wiring the SH-8 Shock
Sensor in Series to Zone 8

Figure 11b. Wiring Latching Glassbreak Detectors
in parallel to Zone 8.

After an alarm, the first code + OFF turns off the siren and disarms the system;
the second code + OFF clears the memory of alarm and resets the glassbreak
detector.

Compatible Glass
Break Detectors

Use detectors that meet the following ratings:
Standby Voltage:
5VDC–13.8VDC
Standby Resistance:

Greater than 20k ohms (equivalent resistance of all
detectors in parallel)

Alarm Resistance:

Less than 1.1k ohms (see note below)

Alarm Current:

2 mA–10 mA

Reset Time:
Less than 6 seconds
The IEI 735L series detectors and FBII SH8 shock sensors have been
tested and found to be compatible with these ratings. You can use up to fifty IEI
735L detectors connected in parallel. You can use up to four SH8 sensors
connected in series.

–22–

The alarm current provided by zone 8 will support only one Glass Break detector in
the alarmed state.

You can use detectors which exceed 1.1k ohms in alarm, provided they maintain
a voltage drop in alarm of less than 3.8 volts.
A. Do not use other NO or NC contacts when using glass break detectors on zone
8. Other contacts may prevent proper glass break detector operation.
B. If latching type devices are installed on both zones 1 and 8, both zones should
be assigned to the same partition. If they are not, and both devices are in alarm
at the same time, the resetting of one could cause a loss of alarm memory in the
other.

Zone 9
Applications

This zone is unsupervised and is suitable for monitoring fast acting glass break
sensors or vibration sensors. When using zone 9, keep the following in mind:
• Use only closed circuit devices connected in series with one another.
• Programme zone 9 as any response type except fire (type 09) or panic (types
6,7 or 8)
• Programme fast (10 msec) or normal (350 msec-500 msec) response in data
field *14.
Avoid using mechanical magnetic or relay type contacts on zone 9 when programmed
for fast response.

Check-Out
Procedure For
Basic Wired Zones

After installation and programming of all basic wired zones is complete, each
partition of the security system should be checked as follows:
1. Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the basic wired zones
are not in a faulted state. Doors and windows with contacts should be closed,
PIRs should be covered (use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary).
2. With all basic wired zones intact, the keypads connected to the system should
display:
DI SA R M ED
RE AD Y TO A R M.
If the following is displayed,
DI SA R M ED P re s s ✴
to show fa ult s
press the [✴] key to display the faulted zone(s). Restore any faulted zone(s)
as necessary (also make sure that you have connected a 2000 ohm EOL
resistor across the terminals of unused zones).
When the
DISARMED...READY TO ARM message is displayed, you can proceed to the
next step.
4. Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to
ensure that it is being monitored by the system. Each time a zone is faulted,
the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the
number of the faulted zone. When each zone is restored, the READY TO
ARM message should appear again.
If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition's keypad(s), check both
keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment.
5. When you get the proper displays on the keypad(s), the basic wired zones in
the system are functioning properly.
6. Disconnect AC mains.
– 23 –

SECTION 7

2-Wire Polling Loop Zones 010-128
This section provides the following information:
• Polling loop overview
• Common characteristics of polling loop zones
• Wiring RPM devices to the polling loop
• Addressing RPM devices
• Polling loop limitations
• Checkout procedure for polling loop zones

Polling Loop
Overview

You can expand the system from the basic 9 zones to up to 128 zones using the
built-in 2-wire polling loop. Each device that is connected to the polling loop has
the ability to communicate with the panel about its status. These devices are
called RPMs (Remote Point Modules). The polling loop provides both power and
data to the RPM zones, and is constantly monitoring the status of all zones
enabled on the loop. The maximum current drain of all devices on the polling
loop cannot total more than 128mA (unless using a 4297 Polling Loop Extender
Module).
Refer to the list of compatible devices at the end of this section.

Common
Characteristics of
Polling Loop Zones

Polling loop zones have the following characteristics:
• Must use RPM (Remote Point Module) devices
• Supervised by control panel
• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

Wiring/Addressing
RPM Devices

All devices on the polling loop must be wired in parallel to the [+] and [-] Polling
Loop terminals of the control panel (24 and 25, respectively). You can wire from
device to device, or have multiple branches connected directly to the control panel
in a star configuration. Be sure to observe proper polarity.
Although each polling loop device is wired in parallel, each device has its own
unique zone number (or group of zones if it is an 8- zone expander). On some
devices, this is determined by the setting of DIP switches. Other devices have a
built-in unique serial number which must be "enrolled" into the control using a
desired zone number. Whenever possible, serial number addressing mode should
be selected instead of DIP switch addressing mode for improved processing speed.
Set up the polling loop as follows:
1. Run wires to each device on the polling loop using the guidelines in the
following table for maximum wire runs per wire size Twisted pair wire is
recommended for all wire runs.
Maximum Polling Loop Wire Runs

–24–

Wire Size

Max. Length

0.64 mm O.D.

198 m

0.81 mm O.D.

290 m

1.0 mm O.D.

457 m

1.3 mm O.D.

732 m

Maximum total wire runs combined must
not exceed 1220m regardless of wire size
(610m if shielded wire is used).

When running polling loop wires, they must not be run within 15 cm of AC mains
voltage, telephone or intercom wiring. Since the polling loop is carrying data
between the control panel and the devices, interference on this loop can cause an
interruption of this communication. The polling loop can also cause outgoing
interference on the intercom or phone lines. If this spacing cannot be achieved,
shielded wire must be used. (Note that the maximum total wire length supported is
halved when shielded wire is used.)
2. Wire each device to the polling loop, making sure to use correct polarity when
making connections (refer to the device's instructions).
3. Note the polling loop devices that have DIP switches on them. Set each
device's DIP switches for the zone number you are assigning it. Refer to the
device's instructions or the DIP Switch Tables found at the end of this
manual when setting addresses.
Certain polling loop devices, such as the 998MX, 4278EX-SN, 4959SN,
4939SN and 4191SN, do not have DIP switches. Instead, they have internal
serial numbers which must be "enrolled" by the control during #93 Menu
Mode Zone Programming.
BASIC POLLING LOOP CONNECTIONS

VISTA-120

BUILT-IN POLLING LOOP

RPM
RPM

}

2- WIRE RUNS SHOWN IN
A STAR CONFIGURATION

Figure 12. Polling Loop Connections
When in a star configuration, no individual run can be longer than the table indicates,
and the total length of all the sensor star runs, combined, cannot exceed 1220m. If
using unshielded wire in conduit or shielded wire, the maximum is 610m. If longer
wire runs are needed, a 4297 Polling Loop Extender Module must be used.

Polling Loop
Limitations

The built-in polling loop has the following limitations that must be observed:
• The maximum allowable current drain from the polling loop is 128mA. Refer
to the POLLING LOOP CURRENT DRAIN WORKSHEET (found in the
FINAL POWER-UP PROCEDURE section) for current drains of various
polling loop devices. If device drain totals more than 128 mA, a 4297 Polling
Loop Extender Module is required.
• The 4297 Polling Loop Extender Module may be used to provide additional
polling loop current, to extend the polling loop wire run, and/or to provide
individual, electrically isolated polling loops. Refer to the 4297 Polling Loop
Connection diagrams later in this section.
DO NOT use the 4197 Polling Loop Extender Module with the VISTA-120.

• Regardless of current drain, no more than 64 DIP switch devices or 119 serial
number devices can be connected to the polling loop. Installations which
require up to 119 zones using DIP switch devices will require the use of zone
expanders (4190WH and/or 4208), which allow more than one zone on each
expander. Otherwise, a 4297 Polling Loop Extender must be used.

– 25 –

Make certain to include the total current drain on the polling loop when figuring the
total auxiliary load on the panel's power supply (use the AUXILIARY CURRENT
DRAIN WORKSHEET in the FINAL POWER UP PROCEDURE section.
Notes: - Do not use the 4197 module with VISTA-120.
- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.
Power for 4297
12V at (32mA + extension loop drain)
Input Polling Loop

VISTA-120

RPM

- - -

RPM

Extension Polling Loop

4297
MODULE

RPM

- - -

RPM

Figure 13a. Polling Loop Connections Using One 4297 Extender Module

Notes:

- Do not use 4197 module with VISTA-120.
- Refer to 4297 instructions for more detailed installation information.
The Limits shown below supercede the limits described in the 4297 instructions.
- Do not connect 4297 modules in series.

Extension Loop #1

Input Polling
Loop

4297

RPM

- - -

RPM

Extension Loop #2
RPM

- - -

RPM

---

4297

---

VISTA-120

Extension Loop #8

4297

RPM

- - -

RPM

Up to 8 modules may be connected in parallel.
Extension loops will be electrically isolated if
blue jumper on each 4297 is left in tact.
Combined Input and Extension Loop Limits:
- No more than 120 devices combined.

Figure 13b. Polling Loop Connections Using Multiple 4297 Extender Modules

Polling Loop
Supervision

An overload on the polling loop is indicated by a trouble on its supervisory zone
(997) and reports as a trouble condition only, even if the system is armed. As
such, it should be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is desired.
If a device on the polling loop fails (the panel cannot "see" that device), the
partition (or partitions) that use that device will display a trouble condition for
all zones associated with that device. If the panel is armed when a device fails,
the zones associated with that device will cause an alarm on the corresponding
partition(s).
A trouble on Zone 997 will not prevent a partition from being armed, as long as all
polling loop zones on that partition are bypassed.

–26–

Maintenance
Signal Support

The control monitors maintenance signals from certain smoke detectors (4192CPM,
4192SDM, 4192SDTM). Maintenance signals are triggered when a detector gets
dirty and indicate that the detector should be cleaned or replaced. If a detector
maintains a high or low sensitivity condition for longer than 24 hours, the control
sends a dialer report (trouble message for non-Contact ID reports; event code 385 or
386 for Contact ID reports), makes an event log entry, and displays HSENSxxx or
LSENSxxx at the keypads (xxx = zone number).

Check-Out
Procedure For
Polling Loop
Zones

After installation and programming of all polling loop zones is complete, each
partition of the security system should be checked as follows:
1. Make certain that all devices and sensors connected to the polling loop are not
in a faulted state. Doors and windows with contacts should be closed, PIRs
should be covered (use a cloth to mask them temporarily if necessary).
2. With all hard-wired and polling loop zones intact, the keypads connected to
the system should display:
DI SA R M ED
RE AD Y TO A R M
If the keypad(s) begins beeping and the word "CHECK" or "TRBLE" is
displayed, along with a zone or zone numbers, the system either does not see
the displayed zone(s) or the tamper switches on 4190WH, 4275EX, 4278EX,
4278EX-SN, 998MX units are faulted. Please check the DIP switch settings for
the zone(s), all connections, and/or that the covers are in place. Once the
situation has been corrected, enter the [Security Code] + [OFF] sequence twice
to clear the trouble.
If the following is displayed,
DI SA R M ED P re s s ✴
to show fa ult s
press the [✴] key to display the faulted zone(s). Restore any faulted zone(s) as
necessary. When the DISARMED...READY TO ARM message is displayed,
you can proceed to the next step.
4. Fault and then restore every contact or sensor on each zone individually to
ensure that it is being monitored by the system. Each time a zone is faulted,
the keypads in the partition to which the zone is assigned should display the
number of the faulted zone. When each zone is restored, the READY TO ARM
message should appear again.
If a zone or zones are not displayed at the correct partition's keypad(s), check both
keypad and zone programming to verify the correct partition assignment.
5. When you get the proper displays on the keypad(s), the polling loop zones in
the system are functioning properly.
6. Disconnect AC mains.

– 27 –

Compatible Polling Loop Devices

NOTE: Use of more
than 50 DIP switch
devices can greatly
impact the panel’s
ability to respond to a
change in status in a
timely manner.
DIP switch devices
that affect response
time include:
4278EX, 4275EX,
4190WH, 7500, 9500

4208U
4208UXM3

8-Zone Expander

4209U

Group Zoning Mod.
(4-Zone Expander)

4190WH

2 -Zone Expander

4190SN

2-Zone Expander

4278EX
Quad PIR
4278EX-SN

4275EX
Dual PIR
4275EX-SN

–28–

• Supports up to 8 zones via the polling loop.
• Must use serial number enrollment mode.
• The first two zones can be either normal or
fast response (DIP switch selectable).
• All zones are EOLR supervised (10k ohms),
provided with the 4208.
• The 4208UXM3 has 4 programmable O.C.
output triggers and can be configured for double
balanced zones for non-fire applications.
• Supports up to 4 zones via polling loop.
• Must use serial number enrollment mode.
• 4 supervised zones or 2 supervised zones in
"group" mode (2 zones grouped as 1 zone)
• Supports 2-wire smoke det. loops, 16 per zone if 4
zones used or 32 per zone if 2 zones used.
• All zones are EOLR supervised (2k ohms),
provided with the 4209U.
• Supports up to 2 zones via the polling loop.
• DIP switch programmable (128 addresses).
NOTE: Use of 4190SN is preferred, whenever
possible, for improved system timing.
• Tamper protected
• The left zone can be EOLR supervised, can accept
either open or closed circuit sensors, and can be
set for fast response.
• The right zone is unsupervised and can
accept closed circuit sensors only.
• Supports up to 2 zones via the polling loop.
• Tamper protected
• The left zone can be EOLR supervised, can accept
either open or closed circuit sensors, and can be
set for fast response.
• The right zone is unsupervised and can accept
closed circuit sensors only.
• Quad element mirror optics PIR with
built-in RPM
• Serial number ID "enrolled" by control (“SN”)
NOTE: Use of 4278EX-SN is preferred, whenever
possible, for improved system timing.
• 4278EX DIP switch programmable; 64 addresses.
• Tamper protected.
• Includes mirrors for both wide angle and
curtain/long range applications.
• Features an auxiliary sensor loop that is
non-supervised and can accept closed circuit
sensors only.
• 4278EX can have its walk test LED
enabled/disabled via keypad commandsrouted
over the polling loop
• Dual element PIR with built-in RPM
• Serial number ID "enrolled" by control (“SN”)
NOTE: Use of 4275EX-SN is preferred, whenever
possible, for improved system timing.
• 4275EX DIP switch programmable (64 addresses)
• Tamper protected
• Includes mirrors for both wide angle and
curtain/long range applications and can use
the 1875PA Pet Alley mirror.
• Built-in selectable pulse count capability.
• 4275EX can have its walk test LED
enabled/disabled via keypad commands
routed over the polling loop

Compatible Polling Loop Devices
998MX

Dual PIR
•
•
•
•

4297

Extender Module

5192SD

Photoelectric
Smoke Detector

•
•

5192SDT

4101SN

Photoelectric
Smoke Detector
w/Heat Detector

•

Serial Number
Single Output Relay
Module

•

•
•
•

4191SN

4193SN

Serial Number
Recessed
Reed Contact
2-Zone Monitor
Module

4293SN

1-Zone Monitor
Module

4939SN

Surface Mount
Magnetic Reed
Contact

4959SN

Aluminium
Overhead Door
Contact

7500

Acoustic
Glass Break Detector

9500

Dual Technology
Glass Break Detector

Dual element PIR eith built-in RPM
(connects directly to the polling loop).
Must use serial number enrollment mode.
Tamper protected.
Anti-creep lookdown protection
Includes Fresnel lenses for wide angle and long
range/curtain applications.
Selectable pulse count
Used to increase the polling loop current
128mA), to extend the polling loop wire run
length, and/or to provide individual,
electrically isolated loops. Connects to the
polling loop and is powered from panel’s
auxiliary power or by a separate power
supply with battery backup.
One piece photoelectric smoke detector
with built-in RPM.
DIP switch programmable (64 addresses) or
serial number enrolled.
One piece photoelectric smoke detector
57°C heat detector, and built-in RPM.
DIP switch programmable (64 addresses) or
serial number enrolled.
Form C relay rated at 2A, 28VAC/VDC with
contact supervision
One class B/style B EOLR-supervised aux
input zone
Serial number ID programmed by control
Tamper-protected cover

• Recessed (12.7mm dia.) magnetic reed
contact with built-in RPM.
• Serial number ID "enrolled" by control panel.
• Accommodates up to 2 zones via polling
loop.
• Small enough to conceal inside various sensors.
• Left zone can be EOLR supervised, can accept
either open or closed circuit switch sensors.
• Right zone is unsupervised and can only be used
with closed circuit sensors
• Usable with double pole keyswitch for keyswitch
by partition usage
• Serial number ID "enrolled" by control
• Accommodates 1 zone via polling loop
• Small enough to conceal inside various sensors.
• Serial number ID "enrolled" by control
• Surface mount magnetic reed contact with
built-in RPM.
• 1.5m jacketed cable.
• Serial Number ID "enrolled" by control.
• Aluminium overhead door/roller shutter
contact
• 0.6m armored cable
• Serial number ID "enrolled" by control.
• Glass break detector with built-in RPM.
• DIP switch programmable (64 addresses).
• Dual technology glass-break detector with
built-in RPM.
•
DIP switch programmable (64 addresses).
•
Keypad controlled test

– 29 –

SECTION 8

Wireless (RF) Zone Expansion
This section provides the following information:
• Common characteristics of wireless zones
• Wireless systems available
• Installing the wireless receiver (4281/5881/5882EU)
• Installing the 5800TM Module
• Installing the wireless transmitters (5700/5800/5800EU series)
• Checkout Procedure for wireless zones (test modes)

Common
Characteristics of
Wireless Zones

• Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain nonsupervised transmitters)
• Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions

Wireless Systems
Available

The VISTA-120 supports wireless zones which may be used exclusively or in
addition to basic wired and/or polling loop zones. The system supports either of
two wireless systems (5700 series or 5800 series) which have many similarities,
but with notable differences in the programming of the transmitters for each
system.
The following families of receivers may be used with this system, but you can use
only one family of receivers in a given installation (i.e. you cannot mix 5700 with
5800):
5700 Series
5800 Series
5800EU Series
Recvr Zones
Recvr
Zones
Transcvr Zones
4281L
up to 4
5881L
up to 8
5882EU up to 128

Wireless System
Operation and
Supervision

–30–

4281M

up to 8

5881M

up to 16

4281H

up to 63

5881H

up to 128

• The receiver responds to status and alarm signals from wireless transmitters
[345MHz (5700 series), 345 MHz (5800 series) and 433.92MHz (5800EU
series)] within a nominal range of 60m, and relays this information to the
control.
• Each 345MHz supervised transmitter sends a supervisory signal to the
receiver every 70-90 minutes (433.92MHz transmitters transmit every 25
minutes). If, after a programmed interval of time (e.g., 12 hrs), the receiver
does not hear from a particular transmitter, the word CHECK or TRBL will
appear at the corresponding partition's keypad(s) accompanied by the zone
number in question. The trouble will not prevent you from arming the panel,
as long as the zone is first bypassed.
• If, within a programmed interval of time (e.g., 12 hrs), the receiver does not
hear from any of its transmitters, a CHECK or TRBL message will appear for
zones 988 (2nd receiver) or 990 (1st receiver) if zone type 05 is assigned to
these supervisory zones. This may be an indication that the wireless receiver
is not able to "hear" signals. The same indications are provided if the 5882EU
transceiver detects that it is being jammed by a source of RF energy that is
present for 30 seconds within any 60 second interval.
• The control checks the receiver connections about every 45 seconds. If the
panel has lost communication with the receiver, a CHECK or TRBL message
will appear for the receiver zone number (8xx, where xx = receiver's device
address) if type 05 is assigned to these supervisory zones. This may be an
indication that the wiring to the receiver is incorrect, or that the DIP switches
are not set for the same address the receiver was assigned to in the panel's
Device Programming mode.
• Two identical receivers can be used to provide either a greater area of
coverage, or to provide redundant protection.
• Any zone from 1-63 can be used as a 5700 series wireless zone. Any zone from
1-128 can be used as a 5800 series wireless zone, with the exception of zone 64
(reserved for a wireless keypad).

Wireless System
Installation
Advisories

1. Place the receiver in a high, centrally located area for best reception. Do not
place receiver on or near metal objects. This will decrease the range and/or
block transmissions. Do not mount receivers or transmitters in an attic,
where extreme temperatures could prevent proper operation.
2. For maximum range, install the wireless receiver at least 3 meters from the
Control panel or any keypads to avoid interference from the microprocessors
in these units.
3. If dual receivers are used:
A. Both must be at least 3m from each other, as well as from the Control
panel and remote keypads.
B. Each receiver must be set to a different Device Address (01-07). The
receiver set to the lower address is considered the 1st wireless receiver
for supervisory purposes.
C. The house IDs must be the same (applies only to 5700 series or if using a
5827/5827BD wireless keypad).
D. Using two Receivers does not increase the number of transmitters the
system can support (63 zones using 4281H; 128 zones using the
5881H/5882EU) plus a wireless keypad).

Installation and
Setup of the
4281/5881/5882EU
Wireless
Receivers

1. Mount the receiver(s). Receivers must be mounted externally to the control
and can detect signals from transmitters within a nominal range of 60m.
Take this into consideration when determining mounting location.
2. Connect the receiver's wire harness to the control's keypad terminals (6, 7, 8,
and 9). Plug the connector at the other end of the harness into the receiver.
3. Refer to the installation instructions provided with the receiver for further
installation procedures regarding antenna mounting, etc.
4. Set the receiver's DIP switches for an address (01-07) which is not being used
by another device (i.e., keypads, relay modules, etc.).
ANTENNAS
INSERT IN
RIGHT-HAND
TERMINALS

CIRCUIT
BOARD
INTERFERENCE
INDICATOR
LED

DIP SWITCH

WIRING
OPENING
KNOCKOUT
AREA FOR
SURFACE
WIRING

TO CONTROL'S REMOTE
KEYPAD CONNECTION
POINTS. EACH RECEIVER
MUST BE ON INDIVIDUAL
HOME RUN.
ON

MOUNTING
HOLES

PLUG
&
SOCKET

}

OFF

1 2 3 4

YELLOW
RED
BLACK
GREEN

Figure 14a: 5881 Wireless Receiver (cover removed)

5839EU/5882EU NOTES:
• 5882EU cover must be removed before enrolling 5839EU keypad into receiver.
• Each 5839EU can be enrolled in only one 5882EU (do not assign a given
5839EU to more than one transceiver).

– 31 –

ANTENNAS.
INSERT IN
RIGHT-HAND
TERMINALS

YELLOW
RED
CPU FAIL LED

BLACK
GREEN

RF ACTIVITY
LED

MOUNTING
HOLES

PLUG
&
SOCKET

WIRING
OPENING
KNOCKOUT
AREA FOR
SURFACE
WIRING

DIP

TO
RELEASE
CIRCUIT
BOARD,
REMOVE
SCREWS

}

TO CONTROL'S
REMOTE KEYPAD
CONNECTION
POINTS.
USE MAX 67M OF
0.8MM WIRE OR
168M OF 1MM WIRE.

12345678

REED TAMPER
SWITCH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

NOT USED
SWITCH
POSITION

5
4
3

NOT USED
5882EU ADDRESS SETTINGS
(" " means "OFF")
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON ON
ON ON
ON ON ON ON

POSITION 7: ON selects "quiet" mode where the 5882EU
only sends signals upon alarms or if it receives a signal from
a 5839EU keypad. OFF selects normal mode. Use OFF position
if 5839EU is plugged into an external power source or if a
5840EU siren is being used.
POSITION 6: ON selects addressable mode for use with the
4140XMPT2 / VISTA-120, wherein positions 3-5 set the address.
OFF selects non-addressable mode for use with the 4111XM /
VISTA-25, where the settings of positions 3-5 must be OFF.

Figure 14b: 5882EU Wireless Transceiver (cover removed)
Take note of the address you select for the wireless receiver as this address must be
enabled in the system's Device Programming mode.

Installing the
5800TM Module

Installation of this module is necessary only if you are using one or more 5827BD
Wireless Bi-directional keypads.
The 5800TM must be located between 0.3m and 0.6m from the 4281 or 5881
receiver's antennas. The 5800TM must not be installed within the control
cabinet. Mount the unit using its accompanying mounting bracket.

5800TM Wiring
Connections

Connect the 5800TM to the control panel’s keypad connection terminals, using
the supplied connector with flying leads, as follows:
WIRE
RED (+12VDC)
BLACK (Ground)
GREEN (Data to Control)
YELLOW (Data from Control)
BLUE: Not Used

TERMINAL ON CONTROL
Terminal 6
Terminal 7
Terminal 8
Terminal 9

Cut the red jumper for address setting 28; cut the white jumper for address 29;
cut both jumpers for address 30.
This address must be enabled as an alpha keypad in the control's Device
Programming mode and then assigned to a partition.

House ID Sniffer
Mode

For additional information, refer to the 5800TM’s instructions.
This mode applies only to 5700 series systems, or if you are using a wireless
keypad (5827/5827BD) in a 5800 series system.
5700 series receivers respond only to transmitters set to the same House ID (0131) that is programmed into the control panel. This prevents system interference
from transmitters in other nearby systems. Use the House ID Sniffer Mode to

–32–

make sure you do not choose a House ID that is in use in a nearby system. To
enter this mode, proceed as follows:
1. Enter your "Installer Code" + # + 2 .
2. The receiver will now "sniff" out any House IDs in the area and display them.
Keep the receiver in this mode for about 2 hours to give a good indication of
the House IDs being used. Use a House ID that is not displayed.
3. To exit the Sniffer Mode, simply enter your Installer Code + OFF.
Since Sniffer Mode effectively disables wireless point reception, Sniffer Mode cannot
be entered while any partition is armed.

5700 Series
Transmitter Setup

Each 5700 series transmitter has DIP switches to set both the transmitter's zone
number (Transmitter ID) and the system House ID. The House ID will be the
same for all transmitters and must match the House ID programmed into the
system (via Device Programming) for the wireless receiver. This can be likened
to a family in which everyone has the same last name (House ID), but each
person has a different first name (Transmitter ID). The zone number must then
be programmed into the system using #93 Menu Mode–Zone Programming
Menus.

5700 Series
Transmitter
Supervision

• Each transmitter (except 5701 and 5727) is supervised by a check-in signal
that is sent to the receiver at 70-90 minute intervals. If at least one check-in is
not received from a transmitter within a certain period of time (Programmed
in field 1*31), the keypad will display the zone number and "CHECK."
• Each transmitter (including 5701 and 5727) is also supervised for a low
battery condition, and will transmit a low battery signal to the receiver when
the battery has approximately 30 days of life remaining. The keypad will
display the transmitter number and "LO BAT," (or "00" and LO BAT for a
wireless keypad).

5700 Series
Transmitter
Battery Life

• Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last about 2 years for 5700 series
transmitters, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless
device being used.
External factors such as humidity, high or low
temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may reduce the actual
battery life in a given installation. The wireless system can identify a true low
battery situation, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time to
arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point
within the system.
• Button type transmitters should be periodically tested by the user for battery
life (ex. 5701).
• After replacing a low or dead battery, activate the transmitter and enter the
Security Code + OFF to clear its memory of the "Low Battery" signal.

Installing 5700
Series Transmitters

A variety of wireless system transmitters can be used to make up the wireless
zones. These include window/door units, smoke detectors, PIRs, glassbreak
sensors, and panic buttons. Zone number assignments can be from 1-63.
1. Set the DIP switches on each 5700 series transmitter to the appropriate zone
number and House ID. Refer to the Compatible Transmitters Table later in
this section for zone numbers and programming information for each
particular transmitter.
2. Install each transmitter in accordance with the instructions provided with
the transmitter.
Before permanently mounting the transmitters, make sure reception of each
transmitter's signal at the proposed mounting location is adequate. To do this,
perform a Go/No Go test, which is described later in this section.
3. Programme the transmitters using the #93 Menu mode Zone Programming
option.
– 33 –

Wireless Zone
Assignments for
5700 Series
Transmitters

Each wireless zone can be assigned any zone response type, such as Entry/Exit,
Interior Follower, Perimeter, etc. (see the ZONE TYPES section for explanations
of each zone type). For 5700 series transmitters, each response type uses a
certain range of zone numbers. Each range of zone numbers is indicated below:
5700 Series Zone Response Types
Zone Type
Trans/Zone #
Entry/Exit Burg...............................1 through 47 *
Perimeter Burg................................1 through 47 *
Interior Burg ...................................1 through 47 *
32 through 47 * (5775)
Fire ...................................................48 through 63 *
48 through 55 ** (5706)
24 Hour Panic ..................................48 through 63*
(silent or audible) ............................62 or 63 *** (5701)
Day/Night Burglary ........................1 through 47 *
24 Hour Auxiliary............................1 through 47 *
* Note that zones 1-63 can be used, but have the following limitations:
1. Transmitters set for zones 48-55 will transmit once every 12 seconds while
the zone is faulted. Transmitters set for zones 56-63 will transmit once every
3 seconds while faulted. These two ranges of zone numbers could adversely
affect transmitter battery life.
2. Transmitters set for an ID of 32 through 47 will have a 3 minute lock-out
between transmissions. Use this last range of zone ID numbers for sensors
protecting frequently used doors or windows to conserve battery life.
** Transmitter IDs 48 through 55 have highest signal priority.
***Transmitter IDs 62 and 63 are unsupervised to allow removal of the 5701 off
premises -- signal priority is lower than that of fire, but higher than burglary.

–34–

Compatible 5700 Series Transmitters
Model
5701

Product
Panic Transmitter

Zone Num. Description
62 or 63 • Programmable for either silent or
audible 24 hour alarm.
48-55
• One piece smoke detector with built
in transmitter.
• Built-in 85 dB piezoelectric alarm
sounder and audible low battery
warning.

5706

Photoelectric Smoke
Detector

5711

Slimline Door/
Window Transmitter

1-63

• Can be used with any closed or open
circuit sensor.

5715WH

Universal Transmitter 1-63

5716
5716WM

Door/Window
Transmitter

1-63

• DIP switch selectable for fast
response, and open or closed sensor
usage. •
Has a tamper protected cover.
• Can be used with any open or closed
circuit sensor.
• Features a built-in reed switch.
• 5716WM includes magnet.

5742

Audio Discriminator

1-63

• For use in unoccupied areas to detect
the sound of shattering glass when a
window is broken.

5743

Dual Technology
Glassbreak Detector

1-63

• Detects the sound and shock of
breaking glass and requires the
presence of both to initiate an alarm
condition.

5775

PIR Detector

32-47

• Dual element passive infrared
detector with built-in selectable
pulse count.
Note: There is a 3 minute lock-out
between fault transmissions to conserve battery life.

5727

Wireless Keypad

House ID • Can be used to turn the burglary
protection on and off
• Features the same built-in panic
functions as wired keypads.
• Must be assigned to a partition.
• Identified as zone "00" (on wired
keypads) when it transmits with a
low battery.

5827BD

Wireless Keypad

House ID

• Same features as above plus:
Requires use of 5800TM Module
(must be enabled in Device
Programming.
• Can indicate system status via its
3 LEDs and sounder.
• House ID must be set.

– 35 –

5800/5800EU
Series Transmitter
Setup

5800/5800EU series transmitters have built-in serial numbers that must be
"enrolled" by the system using the # 93 Menu mode programming, or input to the
control via the downloader 5800/5800EU series transmitters (except 5827
described separately) do not have DIP switches
Each transmitter's zone number is programmed into the system in # 93 mode.
Some transmitters, such as the 5816, 5816EU and 5817, can support more than
one "zone" (referred to as loops or inputs). On the 5816/5816EU for example, the
wire connection terminal block is loop 1, the reed contact is loop 2. Each loop
must be assigned a different zone number and enrolled separately.
For button transmitters (wireless "keys), such as the 5804, and, you must assign
a unique zone number to each individual button used on the transmitter. Each
button on the transmitter also has a pre-designated loop or input number, which
is automatically displayed when enrolled.

5800 Series
Transmitter
Supervision

Except for some transmitters that may be carried off-premises (5802, 5802CP,
5804, 5804EU, 5804BD, 5827), each transmitter is supervised by a check-in
signal that is sent to the receiver at 70–90 minute intervals (25 minutes for
5800EU series). If at least one check-in is not received from each supervised
transmitter within a programmed time period (i.e., 12 hours for 5800 or 2 hours
for 5800EU), the "missing" transmitter number(s) and "CHECK" will be
displayed.
The supervision for a particular transmitter that may be carried off the premises
(5801, 5802MN, 5802MN2, 5802EU) may be turned off by enrolling it as a "UR"
(Unsupervised RF) type, as described later.
5800 series transmitters have built-in tamper protection and will cause a
“CHECK” or "TRBL" condition to be annunciated if covers are removed, provided
that programme field *24 (Disable Expansion Zone Tamper) is set for "0."
5800EU series transmitters (5816EU, 5839EU and 5888EU) are also tamper
protected against wall removal.

5800 Series
Transmitter
Battery Life

• Batteries in the wireless transmitters may last from 4-7 years, depending on
the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device being used. External
factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in
temperature may all reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. The
wireless system can identify a low battery situation when the battery still has
30 days of life remaining, thus allowing the dealer or user of the system time
to arrange a change of battery and maintain protection for that given point
within the system.
• Some transmitters (e.g., 5802 and 5802CP) contain long-life but nonreplaceable batteries. At the end of their life, the complete unit must be
replaced (and a new serial number enrolled by the control).
• Button type transmitters (ex. 5801, 5802, 5802CP, 5804 & 5804EU) should be
periodically tested by the user for battery life.
Do not install batteries in wireless transmitters until ready to enroll them. Though it is
not critical to remove batteries after enrolling, it is recommended in order to avoid
interference while enrolling additional transmitters.

–36–

Compatible 5800 Series Transmitters
Model

Product

5801

Wireless Panic
Transmitter

5802

Pendant
(Personal Emergency)
Transmitter

5802CP

Belt Clip
(Personal Emergency)

Enroll As
Input Type
UR or RF

BR Only

Transmitter

5802MN

Miniature
(Personal Emergency)
Transmitter

UR or RF

5802MN2 2-Button
5802EU* (Personal Emergency)
Transmitter

UR or RF

5804
Wireless Key
5804BD Transmitter
5804EU*

BR Only

5806
5807
5808
5808EU*
5816
5816EU*

Wireless RF
Photoelectric
Smoke Detectors

Door/Window
Transmitter

Description
• Has four pushbuttons, each with a
unique input (loop) code.
• Programmable responses (e.g.,
Panic, Arm–Stay, Arm–Away,
Disarm, etc.
• For arming/disarming functions,
button must be assigned to a user
code when "adding a user."
• Has single pushbutton.
• Usually programmed for
response type of 24Hr. Audible or
24 Hr. Silent (other zone
responses are possible.
• Contains a non-replaceable
battery.
At the end of the
battery's
life, the entire unit must be
replaced.
• If using for arming/disarming, the
button must be assigned to a user
code when "adding a user."
• Has single pushbutton.
• Usually programmed for a
response type of 24 Hr. Audible or
24 Hr. Silent (other zone
responses are possible.
• If using for arming/disarming, the
button must be assigned to a user
code when "adding a user".
• Both buttons must be pressed at
the same time.
• Usually programmed for a
response type of 24 Hr. Audible or
24 Hr. Silent.
• Has 4 pushbuttons, each with a
unique input (loop) code, and has
a replaceable battery.
• Programmable responses (e.g.,
Arm–Stay, Arm–Away, Disarm,
etc.).
• If using for arming/disarming,
the unit must be assigned to a
user code when "adding a user."
• 5804BD has status LEDs and a
status piezo sounder.
• One piece smoke detectors with
built in transmitter.
• Only 5806CN is UL approved.
• Has two unique input (loop) codes
one for a wired closed circuit
contact loop; the other for a
built-in reed switch (used in
conjunction with a magnet).

* CE approved and specifically type approved in France, Germany, Italy, Netherlands, and Spain

– 37 –

Model

Product

Enroll As
Input Type

5816
TEMP

Low Temperature
Sensor

• Transmits a fault condition when
temperature drops below 7.2°C.
• Enrolled into the system by the
internal reed switch using a
magnet.

5817

Multi-Point Universal
Transmitter

• Has three unique input (loop)
codes: one for a "Primary" contact
loop with programmable options;
the others for two "Auxiliary"
closed circuit contact loops.

5818

Recessed Transmitter

• Reed switch magnetic contact
sensor that is easily concealed in
the frame and edge of a door or
window.
• Has one unique input (loop) code.

5819
5819S

Shock Sensor Analyzer RF
Transmitter

• Shock sensor analyzer for Ademco
Inertia Cross-Bar, Ultrak, Litton,
Inertiaguard shock sensor.
• Built-in reed magnetic contact.
• Programmable analyzer response.
• 5819S includes a built-in shock
sensor

House ID

Description

5827

Wireless Keypad

• Can be used to turn the burglary
protection on and off
• Features the same built-in panic
functions as wired keypads
• The keypad is identified as zone
"00" on wired keypads when it
transmits a low battery .

5827BD

Wireless
House ID
Bi-directional Keypad

(used with 5800TM Module)
• Operates the system similarly to
wired keypads
• Can indicate system status via its
3 LEDs and sounder.
• Includes 3 panic keys.
• House ID must be set.
• Requires 5800TM Transmitter
Module (must be enabled in #93
Menu Mode –Device Programming
and assigned to a partition in 1*48

5849

Glass Break Detector

• Requires both sound and shock of
breaking glass to cause alarm to
be transmitted.
• Has unique input code.

5850

Glass Break Detector

• Requires both sound and shock of
breaking glass to cause alarm to
be transmitted.
• Has unique input code.

5890
5888EU*

PIR Detector

• Dual element passive infrared
detector/transmitter with built-in
selectable pulse count.
• Has unique input code
• 5888EU has an anti-creep zone
Note: There is a 3 minute lock-out
between fault transmissions to conserve battery life.
* CE approved and specifically type approved in France, Germany, Italy, Netherlands, and
Spain
–38–

Check-Out
Procedure for
Wireless Zones

Go/No Go Test Mode
Before mounting transmitters permanently, conduct Go/No Go tests to verify
adequate signal strength and reorient or relocate transmitters if necessary.
During this mode, wireless receiver gain is reduced by 50%. Testing in this mode
assists in determining good mounting locations for the transmitters and verifies
that the RF transmission has sufficient signal amplitude margin for the installed
system. Transmitters must be programmed before performing this test.
1. Enter the Installer Code and press 5 (TEST) .
For multi-partition systems, all partitions must be disarmed and in Test
mode in order for the RF signal gain to be reduced.
The keypad will display "Burg Walk Test, Reduced RF Sens."
2. Once transmitters are placed in their desired locations and the approximate
length of wire to be run to sensors is connected to the transmitter's screw
terminals, fault each transmitter. Do not conduct this test with your hand
wrapped around the transmitter as this will cause inaccurate results.
• If a single receiver is used, the keypad will beep three times to indicate
signal reception. If two receivers are used, the keypad will beep once if the
first receiver received the signal, twice if the second receiver received the
signal and three times if both receivers heard the signal (which is
desirable for redundant configurations).
• If the keypad does not beep, reorient or move the transmitter to another
location. Usually a few centimeters in either direction is all that is
required.
3. Mount the transmitter according to the instructions provided with the
transmitter.
4. Exit the mode by entering Installer Code + 1 (OFF) .
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode
When all transmitters have been installed and programmed, use the Transmitter
Sniffer Mode to test that they have all been properly programmed.
1. Enter Installer Code + # 3. The keypad will display all zone numbers of
wireless units programmed into the system.
2. Fault each wireless zone, causing each device to transmit. As the system
receives a signal from each of the transmitters, the zone number of that
transmitter will disappear from the display.
A transmitter not "enrolled" (5800 series) or with incorrect DIP switch settings (5700
series) will not turn off its zone number.
3. To exit the Transmitter Sniffer mode, enter the Installer Code + 1 (OFF) .

– 39 –

SECTION 9

Relay Outputs & Power Line Carrier
(X-10) Devices
This section provides the following information:
• Output Device Basics
• Wiring the 4204 relay module
• Wiring the 4300 transformer

Output Device
Basics

Relays and Powerline Carrier devices (i.e., X-10 brand devices) are programmable
switches that can be used to perform many different functions. They can be used
to turn lights on and off, control sounders, or for status indications. In this
system, each device must be programmed as to how to act (ACTION), when to
activate (START), and when to deactivate (STOP). Each of these is described in
#93 Relay Programming mode
The system supports a total of 32 relays (provided by 4204 Relay modules) and/or
Powerline Carrier devices. Each 4204 module provides 4 relays with Form C
(normally open and normally closed) contacts.
Powerline Carrier devices are controlled by signals sent through the electrical
wiring at the premises via a 4300 (110V) or XF10 (220V) transformer. Therefore,
if using Powerline Carrier devices, a 4300 or XF10 transformer must be used in
the markets using these devices in place of the regular system transformer.
This section is used to programme output devices to activate in response to a
programmed condition. The system can also be programmed to activate these
devices at specific times by using the #80 Scheduling Menu Mode–Time Driven
Events function.

Wiring the 4204
Relay Module

1. Set the 4204 DIP switches for a device address between 01-15 that is not being
used by another device (keypads, RF receivers, etc.). If using more than one
module, each module must be set to a different address.
The relay module will not operate until the device address you have chosen is
enabled in the control's Device Programming mode.
2. Connect the 4204 module(s) to the control's keypad terminals (6, 7, 8, and 9).
Use the flying lead cable supplied with the relay module when mounting it in
the control's cabinet. Use standard 4-conductor twisted cable when mounting
the 4204 outside the cabinet.
3. Directly wire each 4204 back to the panel. The maximum wire run length
from the panel to the 4204 must not exceed:

–40–

SWITCH
POSITION

➞ ON

4204 ADDRESS SETTINGS
("—" means "OFF")

➞
➞
➞
➞

—

4204

10 11 12

➞

NO
C
NC
NO

RELAY

➞
EITHER OR BOTH
CAN BE USED ➞

➞

TB1

16
YEL

▲

DATA IN
FROM CONTROL

BLK

NO
NC

COVER TAMPER (REED) SWITCH
4-PIN KEYPAD PLUG

NC
C

RELAY

TYPICAL
(SHOWN "OFF")

➞

NOTE: DIP switch
position 1 = ON enables
tamper protection. OFF
disables tamper
protection.

RELAY

DIP SWITCH
FOR SETTING DEVICE ADDRESS
AND ENABLING/DISABLING TAMPER

—

➞

OFF

➞

Wire Size Maximum
Length
0.64mm
38m
0.81mm
60m
1.0mm
90m
1.3mm
150m

NO
TB2

(–) GROUND

GRN
RED

DATA OUT
TO CONTROL
(+) 12V

Figure 15: 4204 Relay Module
X-10 Powerline Carrier devices are either plugged into standard AC outlets
or wired into the AC electrical system by a licensed electrician, depending on
the type of device used. They respond to "on" and "off" commands sent from
the panel, through the 4300/XF10/XM10E, to the receiving devices. Connect
the 4300 transformer as follows:
1. Run a 6-conductor cable between the 4300 interface and the panel. Splice
this cable to a 4142TR cable as shown in the diagram below. Note that
the white and yellow wires of the 4142TR must be spliced together.
2. Set the proper House and Unit Codes for each device following the
instructions provided with each device. Note each device's setup, as these
codes will be used to programme the devices later.

Wiring the 4300
Transformer
NOTE: Be sure to
set data field 1*56
50Hz/60Hz to the
appropriate value.

NOTE:

If required, a low-pass filter (available from X-10) can be installed
at the exit of the premises AC network to avoid possible conflict
with nearby powerline carrier systems.

4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

Sync Data Com

GRAY

GR IN 2
OU
ND
IN
3

J8 CONNECTOR

YELLOW
GR
OU
WHITE
OU ND
RED
T
OU 5
GREEN
T
GR 6
OU
BROWN
GR ND
OU
BLUE
ND
BLACK

Earth
AC Ground AC

VIOLET

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

115VAC
60Hz

4142TR CABLE
TB1 TB1
-1 -30

TB1
-2

Figure 16a. 4300 Transformer Connections

– 41 –

EARTH
GROUND

16VAC IN
1
2

BLUE

GRO
UND BLACK

BROWN
OUT
6

GRO
UND

GREEN
OUT
5

WHITE

YELLOW

GRO
UND
RED

YELLOW

220/230VAC
50HZ

IN 3

VIOLET

TRANSFORMER

GRO
UND GREY

J8 CONNECTOR

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

RED / GREEN

TRANSFORMER MODULAR
CORD COLORS
SYNC
DATA
COMMON

YELLOW

WHITE

RED

GREEN

J8 CONNECTOR
AT CONTROL

BLACK

BROWN

BLUE

XM10E
POWERLINE INTERFACE

GR
OU
OU ND
T
5
OU
T
6
GR
OU
GR ND
OU
ND

VIOLET

IN
2
GR
OU
ND

GRAY

Figure 16b. XF10 Transformer Connections

4142TR CABLE

SYNC

BLK
GRN

COM
DATA

1234

RED

MODULAR PHONE CORD
1 - BLACK
2 - RED
3 - GREEN
4 - YELLOW

YEL

RJ11 JACK

Figure 16c. XM10E Modulator Connections

–42–

SECTION 10

4285 Vista Interactive Phone
(VIP) Module
This section provides the following information:
• General information about the 4285 VIP module
• Mounting and wiring the 4285 VIP module
• Checkout procedure for the 4285 VIP module

General
Information

The 4285 VIP Module is an add-on accessory that permits the user to access the
security system and relays via a TouchTone (DTMF multifrequency) phone
(either from the premises or by calling the premises from a remote location). This
module must be enabled in the #93 Device Programming Mode as device address
4, and must be assigned to a partition.
Only one VIP Module can be used in a security system and partition assignment is
done via #93 Menu Mode–Device Programming.
The 4285 VIP Module enables the user to do the following via a DTMF
multifrequency telephone:
• Receive synthesized voice messages over the phone regarding the status of the
security system.
• Arm and disarm the security system and perform most other commands using
the telephone keypad.
• Control 4204 relays and/or Powerline Carrier devices using the #70 relay
mode.
• Provides voice annunciation over the phone to confirm any command that is
entered.

Facts You Need to
Know

• The VIP Module can announce many of the same words that would normally
be displayed on a keypad under the same system conditions (see the words in
bold in the Alpha Vocabulary list found in #93 MENU MODE
PROGRAMMING section). If the VIP module cannot annunciate a word in a
zone descriptor, it will not annunciate the descriptor at all, but will still
annunciate the zone number.
• Remote access to the VIP Module can be toggled on and off by using the
[Security Code] + # 91 command (see VIP Module instruction manual). You
must use the master or installer code only.
• The VIP Module reports trouble as zone 804 (800 + ECP device address 04 =
804) if data communication with the control is lost.
• Detailed operating instructions for phone access to the security system are
provided with the VIP Module. In addition, a Phone Access User's Guide is
supplied with the VIP Module for the user of the system.

Mounting the 4285
VIP Module

The VIP Module may be mounted in the control cabinet if space is available or, if
this is not possible, on the side of the cabinet or adjacent to it. Pry off the VIP
Module's cover prior to wiring.
1. When the VIP Module is mounted inside the control cabinet, attach it to the
cabinet's interior surface with double sided adhesive tape. You may leave the
module's cover off if it is mounted within the cabinet.
Do not mount the VIP Module on the cabinet door or attempt to attach it to the PC
board.

– 43 –

2. When mounting the VIP Module outside the cabinet, use the screw holes at
the rear to mount horizontally or vertically (double sided adhesive tape may
be used, if preferred). You can bring wires out from the side or back (a round
breakout is also available on the back).
3. Affix the 4285 connections label (supplied separately) to the inside of the VIP
Module's cover if the cover is used. Otherwise, affix the label to the inside of
the control cabinet's door.

Wiring the 4285
VIP Module

The 4285 is wired between the control panel and the premises handset(s). It
listens for multifrequency (DTMF) tones on the phone line and reports them to
the control panel. During on-premises phone access, it powers the premises
phones; during off-premises phone access, it seizes the line from the premises
phones and any answering machines. Wire as follows:
1. Make 12V (+) and (–) and data in and data out connections from the VIP
Module to the control*, using the connector cable supplied with the VIP
Module (see below).
RED
6 (AUX +)
BLACK
7 (AUX -)
GREEN
8 (DATA IN)
YELLOW
9 (DATA OUT)
* These are the same connections as for remote keypads.
2. Insert the keyed connector at the other end into the mating header on the
VIP Module.
2. Connect terminals 1 through 5 on the VIP Module as shown in the VIP
Module Connections diagram.
You must use an RJ31X jack (CA38A in Canada) with a direct-connect cord and
make all connections exactly as shown. If the leads on the direct-connect cord are
too short to reach their assigned terminals, splice additional wires to them, as
required.

Terminal Block Connections

–44–

4285 Terminal

Connects to:

1. Phone In (Tip)

Terminal (26) on control.

2. Phone In (Ring)

Terminal (27) on control.

3. Phone Out (Tip)

BROWN lead from direct-connect cord.

4. Phone Out (Ring)

GREY lead from direct-connect cord.

5. Ground

Earth ground terminal (30) on control.

6. Audio Out 1

Future use

7. Audio Out 1

Future use

4285 WIRING NOTES:

Incoming
Handset Telecom Line

{
{

▲

TO EARTH GROUND (COLD WATER PIPE, ETC.)
INCOMING TELECOM LINE

TIP
RING

RED (RING)

DIRECT
CONNECT
CORD

➧

TIP
RJ31X
JACK RING

▲

PREMISES ANSWERING
MACHINE AND PHONES

BROWN (T)

PLUG

GREY (R)

4285
VOICE MODULE

GREEN (TIP)

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR
EXISTING INSTALLATIONS:
EXISTING WIRES
CONNECTED TO THE
"HANDSET" TERMINALS ON
CONTROL MUST BE MOVED
FROM THERE TO TERMINALS
3 AND 4 ON THE 4285.

MUST CONNECT TO 2
ON 4285
(RING)

UNIT

1 2345 6 7

MUST CONNECT TO 1
ON 4285
(TIP)

CALLER ID

▲

➡

▲

TERMINALS
ON CONTROL

GROUND

1. If multifrequency (DTMF) tones are not present following phone access to the security system via an
on-premises phone, try reversing the pair of wires connected to terminals 3 & 4 on the 4285, and the
pair of wires connected to terminals 26 & 27 on the control.
2. Connection to the incoming Telco line via a RJ31X (CA38A) jack and direct-connect cord, as shown in
this diagram, is essential, even if the system is not connected to a central station. The 4285 will not
function if this is not done.
3. The house phone lines must be connected to the VIP Module terminals only! If they are connected
directly to the control panel or to the incoming line, an error tone will be heard when trying to access
the VIP Module from an on-premises phone.
4. If the telephone system on the premises includes a Caller ID unit, connect the unit directly to the
"Handset" terminals (26 and 27) on the control.

ANSWERING
MACHINE

TO GND TERMINAL
ON CONTROL
▲

NOT INSTALLER
ADJUSTABLE
KEYED
HEADER

▲

CONNECTOR
WITH FLYING
LEADS

* NOTE: IF THE TELEPHONE HAS BUILT-IN CALLER ID,
THE CALLER ID FUNCTION MAY NOT WORK.

➡
UNUSED

YELLOW: TO DATA OUT (term. 9)
NO CONNECTION
RED:
TO AUX (+) (term. 6)
BLACK: TO AUX. GROUND (–) (term.7)
GREEN: TO DATA IN (term. 8)

TO CONTROL
PANEL
TERMINALS
USED FOR
KEYPAD
CONNECTIONS

@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

4285
TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS
1 - TIP
PHONE INPUT
2 - RING
3 - TIP
PHONE OUTPUT
4 - RING
5 - GROUND
6AUDIO OUT 1
7(FOR FUTURE USE)

}
}

}

@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@ ?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@

Figure 17. 4285 VIP Module Connections

– 45 –

SECTION 11

Audio Alarm Verification (AAV)
This section provides the following information:
• General information about the AAV option
• AAV operation
• Connecting an Eagle AAV Module

General
Information

An Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) module (also known as two-way voice), such
as the Eagle 1250, is an add-on accessory that permits voice dialogue between an
operator at a central station and a person at the alarm installation, for the
purpose of alarm verification. This feature is supported only if alarm reports are
programmed to be sent to the primary phone number.
The AAV module connects from module terminals 7 & 8 to the control's zone 5
terminals 16 & 17. The purpose of this connection is to silence and restore the
sounders at the premises. It is also used to postpone non-critical dialler reports
while the AAV session is in progress. Note that zone 5 is then no longer available
as a protection zone. When using the AAV, zone 5 must be assigned a zone
response type (e.g. response type 10), and option 1*60 and 1*66 must be selected
as 1 to silence sounders on the premises. If 1*60 and 1*66 are not enabled,
conversation with the premises will be difficult (too much noise on the premises).

AAV Module
Operation

After all messages have been sent during a reporting session to the primary
phone number, the control will trigger the AAV if at least one of the messages
was an alarm report. If Contact ID format is selected for the primary phone
number, and the cancel report field *81 is programmed as non-zero, the control
will send a "listen-in to follow" message (event code 606), which signals the
685(rev. 4.6 or higher) to hold the phone connection open for 1 minute.
Once triggering occurs, the control will give-up the phone line to the AAV
module, without breaking the connection with the central station. During the
time the AAV is active, all sirens and all continuous keypad sounds in all
partitions will be shut off if fields 1*60 and 1*66 are enabled. When the AAV
indicates that the audio alarm verification session is completed, all keypad
sounds will be restored. Sirens will be restored if the alarm timeout period has
not expired.
As part of its fail-safe software, the control will limit all audio alarm verification
sessions to 15 minutes (this is because once the session begins, the AAV module
controls the duration). If a new fire alarm should occur during a session, the
control will break phone connection and send the new fire alarm report, then retrigger AAV mode. All other dialler messages triggered during on-going
conversation will be held until either the AAV module signals that it is inactive,
or the 15 minute timeout occurs.
One way to trigger the AAV module is by selecting option 3 in field 1*46 and
make connections as shown in the VOLTAGE TRIGGER diagram. Field 1*46
can be used to set ground start, remote console sounding, or long range radio
open/close trigger. If any one of these functions are absolutely necessary in a
given installation, the alternative AAV trigger method is via the use of a 4204
relay as shown in the RELAY TRIGGER diagram. If this method is selected, the
start and stop conditions for that relay must be set to choice 60 = "Audio Alarm
Verification" during relay programming, via #93 menu mode.
Some AAV modules allow remote triggering by ring detection at the alarm
installation. Please be advised that if this option is selected, it may defeat
modem download and 4285 VIP module remote access capability. The DIP
switch settings shown on the triggering diagrams disable the remote AAV
module trigger option. The control also requires that the AAV module trigger
type is falling edge, which is set using the 1250's DIP switches.

–46–

1. 685 Receiver software must be rev. 4.6 or higher. Earlier versions will not hold the
phone line connection open.
2. Contact ID code for "listen-in to follow" is "606." Contact ID is the only reporting
format that will send a "listen-in-to-follow."
Connect the Audio Alarm Verification module's falling edge trigger input to J7
connector trigger output, or to a 4204 relay module, as shown in the various AAV
Connection diagrams.

Audio Alarm
Verification Module
Connections

If also using a 4285 VIP Module, be sure to follow the corresponding diagram when
making connections.
(–) EDGE TRIGGER (YELLOW)

PIN 3

}

}
16 17

(–)

26 27 28 29 30

(+)

RED (R)
GREEN (T)
GREY (R)
BROWN (T)

SYSTEM POWER (RED)

16 17

(–)

(+)

RJ31X

26 27 28 29 30

EARTH
GROUND

RED (R)
GREEN (T)
GREY (R)
BROWN (T)

➤
➤

SYSTEM GROUND (BROWN)

EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE

EARTH
GROUND

CONTROL/
DIALLER HEADER

RED
123456

123456

DIP Switch

NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.

TO PREMISES
HANDSET
INCOMING
PHONE LINE

BROWN

13 V+
14
15 GND
16

4204
RELAY 1
SHOWN
OFF

TO PREMISES
HANDSET
INCOMING
PHONE LINE

DIP Switch

NO NC C
YELLOW
BROWN (–)

••
••
•

BROWN (–)
RED (+)

RED (+)
NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.

EAGLE
1250

EAGLE
1250
TIP
RING

TIP
RING

AAV alone

AAV with 4204

(–) EDGE TRIGGER (YELLOW)

PIN 3

••
••
••
••

CONTROL

}

ZONE 5
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE

(+)

(–)

16 17

(–)

SYSTEM POWER (RED)

(+)

EARTH
GROUND

26 27 28 29 30

RED (R)
GREEN (T)

RJ31X
➤
➤

SYSTEM GROUND (BROWN)

CONTROL/
DIALLER HEADER

NOTE:
REFER TO AAV MODULE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR
CONNECTIONS TO AUDIO
SPEAKERS AND MICROPHONE.

BROWN (–)

••
••
•

TO PREMISES
HANDSET
GREY (R)

123456

DIP Switch

INCOMING
PHONE
LINE

BROWN (T)

••
••
•

RJ31X
➤
➤

(+)

ZONE 5

ZONE 5
EAGLE
SUPPLIED
CABLE

••
••
••
••

•••
•
•••
•

CONTROL

4 3 2 1

RED (+)

EAGLE
1250
TIP
RING

4285

AAV with 4285

Figure 18: Audio Alarm Verification Module Connections

– 47 –

SECTION 12

Video Alarm Verification (VAV)
This section provides only general information about the VAV option. Detailed information is in the
manual provided with the VAV Transmitter.
General
Information

A Video Alarm Verification (VAV) transmitter (e.g.VTP-50/Transpac receiver) is an add-on accessory
that permits video imagery of the area where an alarm was detected to be transmitted on standard
switched network telephone lines to the monitoring location using the same phone line and phone call
on which the alarm is digitally communicated to the monitoring location.
The VAV transmitter connects to the control’s handset telephone line (via a modem) and connects to 2
relays on a 4204 Relay Module: a “kissoff” relay, which signals the VTP-50 to begin communication, and
a “hold the line” relay, which holds the phone line for 6 seconds to allow time for the VTP-50 to make
connection to the Transpac receiver. In addition, a “camera” relay for each camera is used to trigger the
cameras connected to the VTP-50.
Program the 4204 relays as follows:
Device Type = 4
Relay Type = 1 (ECP)
ECP Address = (module’s device address)
Relay Number = (actual relay number used on
the module)
Relay “A” (kissoff):
action = 1 (closed for 2 seconds)
start zone type = 60 (alarm verification)
stop zone type = 60 (alarm verification)
Relay “B” (hold the line):
action = 2 (stay closed)
start zone type = 60 (alarm verification)
stop zone type = 57 (yyy seconds set in field
1*75; set to 6 sec.)
Relay “C” (camera):
action = 1 (closed for 2 seconds)
start event = 1 (alarm)
start zone list = “n” (zone list** number
containing camera zones for this relay)

VAV
Operation

** A zone list must be programmed which contains all zone
protected by the camera being triggered by the “camera” relay.

VISTA-120

Keypad
Terminals

4204 RELAY MODULE
RELAY 4
HOLD THE LINE

N.C.

INCOMING
PHONE LINE

N.O.
RELAY 3
KISSOFF

COM
N.C.
N.O.

RELAY 2
CAMERA

PHONE LINE
TO HANDSET

COM
N.C.
N.O.

New alarms will automatically
disconnect the video transmission and
will be reported to the central station.
(Connection diagram is for reference
only. Refer to the instructions
accompanying the video transmitter
being used for actual connections.)

COM

}

After all messages have been sent to the
primary phone number during a
reporting session, the control will
transmit the VAV report (609) to a 685
(revision 4.73 or higher), which prepares
the Transpac receiver to receive images.
The “kissoff” relay activates, causing the
VTP-50 to begin communication with the
Transpac receiver, and the “hold the
line” relay activates, giving the VTP-50
time to make connection to the Transpac
receiver without breaking connection
with the central station. The video
image of the areas covered by the zones
in the “camera” relay zone list is then
transmitted to the Transpac receiver.

Data Field Programming
*30 = (TouchTone dialing)
*33 = primary phone number
*41 = 0 (use EOLR)
*45 = 1 (Contact ID)
*81 = enable cancel reports in order to send verification code
(9th entry)
*84 = 00 (intermittent sensor disabled)
1*66 = 0 (disable silence of sounders during video alarm
verification operation)
1*67 = 1 (must also be selected to assure that Contact ID report
Event 609 will be transmitted to the monitoring location
after the alarm transmission.)
1*75 = 006 (6 seconds)

VTP-50
IN 0
NOTE:
(8 INPUTS ARE
AVAILABLE)

IN 1

MODEM

Figure 19. Connections To The Video Transmitter
–48–

SECTION 13

Voltage Triggers
This section provides the following information:
• General information about the voltage triggers
• Ground Start trigger setup
• Open/Close trigger setup
• Keyswitch setup
• Remote keypad sounder setup
• Long Range Radio or other transmission media triggering
Connector J7, located on the right hand side of the main PCB, provides 4 trigger
outputs. These outputs may be configured in a number of ways, depending upon
the requirements of the installation. They may be used for:
• Operating the 675 Ground Start Module
• Operating the 4146 Keyswitch LEDs
• Operating a remote piezo sounder that imitates the keypad sounder
• Triggering auxiliary alarm signaling equipment (such as long range radio
transmitters)
• Operating an Audio Alarm Verification (AAV) module (see previous section on
AUDIO ALARM VERIFICATION.
These output triggers can be enabled by partition via programming field 2*20.

The pin assignments of this connector are shown below. Use only the 4142TR
9-wire cable (available as an option) for making connections to this connector.
Output 1:
Operates, by default, as a trigger for the 675 ground start module. This
output may optionally be programmed to operate as an open/close trigger, a
remote keypad sounder output, or an AAV module output (programmed in
data field 1*46). Only one of these options may be used at a time.
Output 1 Rating:
When Activated: 10 - 13.8 VDC through 4K ohms
When De-activated: 100 ohms to ground
Outputs 2 & 4:
Operates, by default, as Fire and Silent Panic/Duress triggers, respectively.
These triggers may optionally be programmed to act as Arm and Ready status
indicators when it is desired to use the 4146 keyswitch (programmed in data
field *15). Output 2 can alternatively be programme selected to be a CPU fail
output.
Output 2 & 4 Rating:
When Activated: 10 - 13.8 VDC through 5K ohms
When De-activated: 1K ohms to ground
Output 3:
Operates as a Burglary/Audible Panic trigger. There are no other options for
this output.
Output 3 Rating:
When Activated: 10-13VDC through 5K ohms
When De-activated: 1K ohms to ground
1

J7 CONNECTOR

BLACK

Figure 20: J7
Connector For Voltage
Triggers

OUT
4

OUT
3
BROWN
GRO
UND
BLUE

OUT
2
RED
GRO
UND
GREEN

OUT
1

YELLOW
GRO
UND WHITE

N/U
GRO
UND
GRAY

General
Information

4142TR CABLE
OUT 1: GROUND START, OPEN/CLOSE, REMOTE SOUNDER, OR AAV
OUT 2: FIRE OR KEYSWITCH ARMED LED OR CPU FAIL
OUT 3: BURGLARY/AUDIBLE PANIC/AUXILIARY
OUT 4: SILENT PANIC/DURESS OR KEYSWITCH READY LED

– 49 –

Ground Start
Trigger Setup

Output 1 may be used to trigger an optional 675 Ground Start module for
installations having telephone lines which require ground start instead of loop
start operation to obtain dial tone from the telecom central office.
When the control has a message to transmit to the central station, it will seize
the line, go off hook, and then trigger the 675 module to connect the "RING" side
of the telephone line to earth ground. The panel will cause the module to break
the connection between "RING" and earth ground when it obtains a dial tone.
1. Connect the 675 Ground Start Module to the panel's J7 connector trigger
output 1, to auxiliary power, and to the "RING" side of the telephone line as
shown in the diagram below.
2. Use the following procedure to determine which side of the telephone line is
the "RING" side:
a. Connect the "+" lead of a DC voltmeter to earth ground, and the "-" lead
to one side of the telephone line.
b. The wire which reads +50VDC is the "RING" side.
3. Programme field 1*46 must be set to 0.
J7 CONNECTOR

4142TR CABLE

BLACK

OUT
2

WHITE
RED

TO AUX. POWER
TERM. 6
(50mA CURRENT DRAW

GRO
UND

BROWN

OUT
4

BLUE
BLACK

IF USED.
1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER
USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE
(SEE FIELD 1*46).
2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE
USED TO PROVIDE ALARM
STATUS INDICATIONS OR TO
OPERATE A KEYSWITCH
(SEE FIELD *15).
3. THE 675 IS NOT UL LISTED.

GREEN

TO
TO EARTH
TELECOM GROUND
RING

OUT
3

GREEN

GRO
UND

VIOLET
BROWN

TO AUX. POWER
TERM. 7

(CUT ORANGE
JUMPER)

YELLOW

GRO
UND

GREY

BLUE

OUT
1

675
GROUND
START
MODULE

GRO
UND

N/U

GROUND START
TRIGGER

Figure 21. Ground Start Module Connections

Open/Close
Trigger Setup

Output 1 may alternately be programmed to change states when the system is
armed in the away mode and then disarmed. If field 1*46 is set to 1, the output
will be set high when the system is in the "disarmed" state, and will switch to "0"
volts when the system is armed in the "away" mode. This trigger will not change
state unless all partitions are armed, and will change state again as soon as one
partition is disarmed.

Remote Keypad
Sounder

Output 1 may alternately be programmed for a remote keypad sounder. You may
use an Ademco PAL 328N piezoelectric sounder for installations where you want
the sounds produced by the keypad's built-in piezo sounder to be duplicated in
another location for one partition. The panel will send all sounds remotely (i.e.
alarm, trouble, chime, entry/exit, etc.) except for the short clicks associated with
keypad key depression.
One application of this feature might be to produce chime sounds in a location
which is distant from the panel's keypads. You can also accomplish this by using
relay outputs (see RELAY OUTPUTS AND POWERLINE CARRIER DEVICES
section).
•

–50–

Connect the Ademco piezo between the panel's auxiliary power and the J7
connector trigger output as shown in the Remote Keypad Sounding
Connections diagram.

WHITE
RED

GRO
UND

GREEN

OUT
2

–

YELLOW

GRO
UND

GRAY

BLACK

OUT
1

N/U

GRO
UND

AMSECO PAL-328N
PIEZO SOUNDER

OUT
3

RED
GRO
UND

BROWN

TO AUX POWER +
TERMINAL 6
(10mA CURRENT DRAIN)

J7 CONNECTOR

4142TR CABLE

IF USED.
1. OUT 1 IS NO LONGER
USABLE FOR OPEN/CLOSE
OR GROUND START (SEE
FIELD 1*46).
2. OUT 2, 3, 4 CAN STILL BE
USED TO PROVIDE ALARM
STATUS INDICATIONS OR
TO OPERATE A KEYSWITCH
(SEE FIELD *15).

BLUE

OUT
4

BLACK

Figure 22. Remote Keypad Sounding Connections
If using an optional Remote Keyswitch for remote arming and disarming of the
system, its switch must be connected to Zone 7 and its Ready and Armed status
LEDs must be connected to the trigger outputs and programmed in order to
become operational.

Keyswitch Setup

Note that a zone 7 keyswitch may be used in one partition only.

The keyswitch must be connected to Zone 7, which is then no longer available as
a protection zone. A momentary short across this zone will arm the partition in
the "AWAY" mode. If the short is held for more than 3 seconds, the partition will
arm in the "STAY" mode. After the partition has been armed, the next time Zone
7 is shorted, the partition will disarm.
1. Connect the 4146 keyswitch's normally open momentary switch to Zone 7.
2. Connect a 2k EOL resistor across the switch regardless of whether or not
zones 2-8 are selected to use EOL resistors.
3. Connect the keyswitch Armed and Ready LEDs to the J7 connector as shown.
4. Connect an optional closed circuit tamper switch (ex. No. 112) in series with
zone 7.
5. Assign the keyswitch to its appropriate partition in programme field *15.
Enable open/close reporting (user #0) for the keyswitch in field *40 (if
desired).
TO AUX POWER
(TERMINAL 6)
YELLOW

WHITE
GREEN
(READY)

RED
(ARMED)

820ohms

820ohms
RED

BLACK

TO J7/OUT 2
TO J7/OUT 4

NOTE:
When the keyswitch is
removed from the wall, the
tamper switch will open causing
a fault (trouble or alarm) on
zone 7 and causing the panel
to disable keyswitch operation
until the partition is disarmed
from a keypad.

LED indications are defined as follows:
Green Red
Meaning
Off
Off
Disarmed & Not Ready
On
Off
Disarmed & Ready
Off
On Steady
Armed Away
Off
Slow Flash
Armed Stay
Off
Rapid Flash
Alarm Memory

TAMPER SWITCH
TO ZONE 7(– )
(TERMINAL 19)
TO ZONE 7(+)
(TERMINAL 20)

BROWN
BROWN
LOCK SWITCH
(NORMALLY OPEN)
BLUE

BLUE
2K EOLR

BROKEN LINES REPRESENT
INSTALLER WIRING CONNECTIONS

Figure 23a. Remote Keyswitch Wiring

– 51 –

In addition to being able to support a 4146 keyswitch on zone 7 of the control, you
can add one keyswitch per partition via the use of a DPST or a DPDT keyswitch,
wherein the key is removable in two positions: AWAY and OFF (disarm). Ademco
does not manufacture a packaged keyswitch with status LEDs (if status LEDs
are desired, each must be driven by a programmed relay output).

Keyswitch By
Partition
Configuration

To use this configuration, connect each switch to Ademco's 4193SN 2-zone serial
number RPM as shown below.
KEYSWITCH
N.C.
GREEN

N.O.
N.C.

N.O.
UNSUPERVISED LOOP = ARM AWAY
(program as zone type 21)

RED (+)

BLACK

4193SN

EOLR SUPERVISED LOOP = DISARM
(program as zone type 22)

10k

BLACK (–)

TO CONTROL’S
POLLING LOOP
TERMINALS

WHITE

N.O.

OPTIONAL
TAMPER SWITCH

Figure 23b. Keyswitch By Partition Wiring Connections
NOTE: The switch shown is Chicago Lock Company model EXA-112-2.
When the switch is NOT activated or is in the NC position, the partition is armed
AWAY. When the switch is activated, the partition is disarmed. The
unsupervised loop's zone must be assigned to zone type 21 (arm away) and the
supervised loop's zone must be assigned to zone type 22 (disarm).
PROGRAMMING NOTE:
Each zone of the 4193SN must be "enrolled"
individually, but when the switch is turned, both zones activate. Therefore,
before "enrolling" the serial number of a zone of the 4193SN, temporarily
disconnect the wire from the side of the switch NOT being enrolled. After that
zone is enrolled into the system, reconnect the wire, then temporarily disconnect
the other wire to "enroll" the other zone.

Auxiliary Alarm
Signaling
Equipment

The J7 header provides triggers for fire alarm, burglary/audible panic alarm,
silent/duress alarm. These triggers are programmed as the defaults for Outputs, 2,
3, and 4. These may be used to trip auxiliary alarm signaling equipment such as
Long Range Radios, Voice Diallers, Direct Wire Transmitters.
The triggers for Fire (Output 2) and Silent Panic/Duress (Output 4) may be used to
operate keyswitch armed and ready LEDs instead when field *15 is enabled.
When used as alarm triggers, these outputs are normally low, and go high when
the corresponding alarm condition occurs. These triggers remain high until the
security code + OFF is entered at the keypad, with the exception of the Silent
Panic/Duress trigger, which is a 2-second pulse. The diagram that follows shows
how to make connections to the radio.

VISTA-120

4142TR
CABLE

GROUND (GREY)

▲

470

FIRE (RED) TO ZONE 1
J7

470

SILENT PANIC/DURESS (BLACK) TO ZONE 2
470

BURG/AUDIBLE PANIC (BROWN) TO ZONE 3
470

Figure 24: Auxiliary Alarm Signaling Equipment

–52–

V-TRAN
V7050
RADIO
TRANSCEIVER

SECTION 14

External Sounds
The Control provides one bell/siren relay output used to power external alarm
sounders. This output is rated at 10-13.8VDC, 2.8A maximum (including
auxiliary current drain).

General
Information

Exceeding the prescribed current limits will overload the power supply or may possibly
trip the bell output circuit protector.
Make connections to terminals 4
(positive output) and 5 (negative
return).

Wiring

–

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT 10VDC - 13.8VDC
(10.7VDC - 14.5VDC in VISTA-120FR)
2.8A maximum

BELL

–

SIREN

Figure 25. External Sounder
Connections
AB12M WIRING NOTES:
• Program the zone which
monitors AB12M tamper for
day trouble/night alarm (type
05) or 24 hour audible alarm
(type 07) response. A 24 hr.
alarm response must be
used in multiple partition systems.

AB12M BELL/BOX WIRING

TO ZONE 1-8 (–)

TO ZONE 1-8 (+)

TO PANEL'S BELL –
(EG: TERMINAL 5)

TO PANEL'S BELL +
(EG: TERMINAL 4)

2k EOLR

• Wire the VISTA-120 door
tamper switch in series with
the AB12M tamper zone.

@@@@@@@@e?
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e
@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@h?
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

• Program bell output for 16 or
more minute timeout and for
confirmation of arming ding.

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

TAMPER
SWITCHES

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@g
@@@@@@@@
@@@@@@@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

• All wiring from AB12M to
panel must be run in conduit.
AB12M OUTER BOX
INNER LINER

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

BELL

@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@
@@

?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@e?@@@@@@@@?e@@@@@@@@

?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@
?@@@@@@@@
?@@@@@@@@

Figure 26: AB12M Bell Box Wiring

Compatible
Sounders

702

719

747
747F
ABB1031
PA400B (beige)
PA400R (red)
AB12M

The total current drain from this output
can be up to 2.8 amps. A battery must be
installed since current in excess of 750mA
is supplied by the battery. Up to two 702
sirens can be used, wired in series. Up to
two 719 sirens can be used wired in
parallel.

Programming Option
Programme field *08 permits the external
sounder output to be altered so that it is
activated normally to charge the battery
in a self-actuated external sounder and is
interrupted
for
alarm
conditions
(continuosly for intrusion/audible panic
sounding and pulsed for fire alarm
sounding).

Outdoor Siren

Self-contained siren (driver built-in) and weatherproof for
outdoor use. Can be wired for either a steady or yelp sound
and is rated at 120 dB @ 3m. This siren can also be tamper
protected, or can be mounted in a metal cabinet (716), which
can be tamper protected.
Compact Outdoor Compact, self-contained siren (driver built-in), and weather
Siren
proof for outdoor use. Can be wired for either a steady
or yelp sound, and is rated at 90 dB @ 3m. A 708BE cabinet is
available, which can be tamper protected if necessary.
Indoor Siren
Attractive, self-contained indoor siren (driver built-in),
provides steady or warble tones and is rated at 95dB @ 3m.
Motor Bell & Box AMSECO motor bell & box, rated at 81 dB @ 3m.
Indoor Piezo
System Sensor indoor piezo sounder.
Sounder
(red or beige), rated at 90 dB @ 3m.
Armoured Bell
For High Security Commercial Burglary installations.

– 53 –

SECTION 15

Event Log Options
This section provides the following information:
• General information about the Event Log
• Event Log printer connections
• Displaying/Printing the Event Log

General
Information

This system has the ability to record up to 224 events of various types in a
history log (224 event capacity). Each event is recorded in one of five categories
with the time and date of its occurrence (if real-time clock is set). These
categories are:
• Alarm
•
Open/close
• Supervisory/check
•
System conditions
• Bypass
The log may be viewed (Display Mode) on an alpha keypad, or can be printed
(Print Mode) on a serial printer (connected to the system via a 4100SM serial
interface module.

Event Log Printer
Connections

• Connector J8, located above connector J7 on the right side of the main PC
board, provides triggers for powerline carrier devices (see Final Power Up
section) and provides pins for connection to a local serial printer via the
4100SM serial interface module, in applications where you want to print the
event log on a local printer.
• Mount the 4100SM using its clip bracket to attach it to the side wall of the
control cabinet. Make connections between J8, the 4100SM module and the
serial printer as shown below. Refer to the event logging commands paragraph
for a description of the commands which initiate event log printing.
1

J8 CONNECTOR
BLACK

BLUE

ND
OU

GREEN

RED

BROWN

OU
GR

OU
T6

OU
ND
OU
T5

PR IN 2
INT
GR ER D VIOLET
OU TR
ND
GREY
IN
3
YELLOW

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
4100SM SERIAL MODULE
To TB6 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB7 Aux. Power (-)

4100SM JUMPERS
(CUT TO SET RESPECTIVE SIGNAL FLOATING)
COLOR
RED
BLUE
WHITE

FUNCTION
CD
CTS
DSR

PIN#
8
5
6

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

DTR

RED

USE GENDER CHANGER
SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM
IF PRINTER HAS DB25
MALE CONNECTOR

BLUE WHITE

3M
Cable
Supplied with
4100SM

SERIAL PRINTER
SET FOR: 8 DATA BITS
NO PARITY 1
STOP BIT
300/1200 BAUD
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE
USING DTR SIGNAL

Figure 27. Event Log Printer Connections
NOTES
1. Printer must be configured as follows:
• 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
• 300 or 1200 baud (1200 preferred)
• Hardware handshaking using DTR signal
–54–

The 4100SM module package includes a 3m RS232 cable. You can use a longer
cable or an extension cable if the Control and serial printer are separated by
more than 3m. The total cable length should be less than 15m.
3. Most printers either ignore the CTS, DSR and CD signals, or require them to
be high (i.e. 3-15VDC as measured on RS232 DB25 connector pins 5, 6 & 8
respectively with respect to ground pin 7). The 4100SM module sets these pins
high. If the printer being used will not operate with these pins high, then clip
the blue (CTS), white (DSR) or red (CD) jumpers on the 4100SM module to set
the corresponding signal floating. Important pins on the RS232C cable are pin
3 (data out), pin 7 (ground) and pin 20 (DTR - ready).
4. The DTR signal, as measured at 4100SM TB1, should be high (9.5-14VDC)
when the printer is powered, properly connected, on-line and ready to print.
This signal will be low (0-1.5VDC) when the printer is not powered, not
properly connected, off-line or out of paper. The Control will not send data to
the printer unless the DTR signal is high.

Event
Logging
Procedures

In order for proper time and date stamping to occur, the system's real-time clock
must be set. Refer to the SETTING THE REAL TIME CLOCK section.

If you have selected the printer to be "on-line" (field 1*72), events will print
automatically, as they occur. To display or print on demand, the following
commands apply:
Commands
Display Mode:
Print Mode:
Clear Event Log:
To EXIT Event Log:

installer or master code + [#] + [6] + [0]
installer or master code + [#] + [6] + [1]
installer or master code+ [#] + [6] + [2]
Press ✴ at any time.

Display/Printing: After entering either the Display or Print mode, the
following will be displayed:
ENTER0=RECENT
1=COMPLETE

SCAN LOG BY PART
0=NO 1-8=PART #

The Event Log holds up to 224 events, and can
display or print all events in a category (complete),
or only those events in a category occurring since
the last Clear Event Log command (recent). Note
that once the Event Log is full, the oldest event will
be erased upon the logging of any new event. Press
the desired display mode key, 0 or 1.
The system allows viewing of any partition's event
log. Enter the partition number for the partition
whose events are to be displayed. Entering 0 (NO)
will display all events that occurred in the system
regardless of partition. Events are displayed in
chronological order, from most recent to oldest.
For display and printing purposes, events are
stored on a partition by partition basis (except
system events), and are grouped into five
categories as follows.

– 55 –

Use the [3] & [1] keys to scroll to the next and previous screens
respectively:
ALARM EVENT LOG
TYPE

CCC UUU

CHECK EVENT LOG
TYPE

CCC UUU

BYPASS
LOG
TYPE

EVENT

CCC UUU

OP/CL EVENT LOG
TYPE

CCC UUU

SYSTEM EVENT LOG
TYPE

CCC UUU

ALL EVENT LOG
TYPE

Displays time/date for zones that have either
caused an alarm or have been restored in selected
partition.
Displays time/date for zones that have caused a
trouble or supervisory condition in selected
partition.
Displays time/date for zones that have been
bypassed in selected partition.

CCC UUU

Displays time, date and user number for each
arming and disarming of the system for the
partition selected.
Displays time/date for system problems, such as
AC Loss, communication failure, etc., regardless
of partition.
Displays all categories of events in chronological
order, from most recent to oldest.

To display the events in a particular category, press [8] at the desired
category screen.
If in Display Mode, the most recent event is displayed. Press [1] to display
older events, press [3] to go forward in time.
If in Print Mode, the first press of [8] will cause the printer to print all events
in that category, with each event automatically scrolled on the display
keypad. The following is a typical display:
P8 01/01

12:02AM

BURGLARY

003

Shows burglary alarm occurred in zone 3 of
partition 8, at 12:02AM on January 1.

After the last event in the selected category has been displayed (using either
the [1] or [3] keys), the following will appear for a few seconds:
END OF EVENT LOG
TYPE

CCC UUU

CLEAR EVENT LOG
0=NO 1=YES

ARE YOU SURE?
0=NO 1=YES

Press [1] if Event Log is to be cleared from
memory. All events in the log will still be
displayed if the COMPLETE option is selected.
Only those events occurring from the time of the
CLEAR command will be displayed if RECENT
display option is selected. Press [0] if event log is
not to be cleared at this time.
If [1] is pressed, the following will appear:
Press [1] if it is desired to clear the event log.
Press [0] if event log is not to be cleared.

SCREEN DEFINITIONS
RECENT
Events since last CLEAR
COMPLETE
Displays all events
TYPE
Type of event (Burg., Fire, etc.)
CCC
Zone (contact) number
UUU
User number
–56–

EVENT LOG PRINTER and DISPLAY CODES
AC Power Fail.............................................AC LOSS
AC Power Restore .......................................AC RESTORE
Auto Disarm................................................DISARM-AUTO
Backup Battery Test Failed........................BAT TST FAIL
Burglary Alarm...........................................BURGLARY
Burglary Alarm Cancel...............................CANCEL
Burglary Alarm Restore .............................BURG RST
Communication Restore .............................COMM RESTORE
Dialer Restored to Service ..........................DIALER RST
Dialer Shutdown.........................................DIALER SHUT
Disarmed.....................................................DISARMED
Duress Alarm..............................................DURESS
Duress Restore............................................DURE RST
Entry to Test Mode .....................................TEST ENTRY
Event Log....................................................LOG OVERFLOW
Event Log Cleared ......................................LOG CLEARED
Event Log at 50% Capacity ........................LOG 50% FULL
Event Log at 90% Capacity ........................LOG 90% FULL
Exit Error Occurred....................................EXIT ERR
Exit From Programme Mode ......................PROGRAM EXIT
Exit From Test Mode ..................................TEST EXIT
Failure to Communicate .............................FAIL TO COMM
Fire Alarm ..................................................FIRE
Fire Alarm Restore ............... .....................FIRE RST
Fire Zone Trouble .......................................FIRE TRB
Fire Zone Trouble Restore ..........................FRTR RST
Intrusion Verify ..........................................INTRSN VERIF
Non-Burglar Alarm.....................................AUXILARY
Non-Burglar Restart...................................AUX RST
Panel is Calling Download Computer ........CALL BACK
Panic Alarm ................................................PANIC
Panic Alarm Restore...................................PNC RST
Poll Loop Restore ........................................EXP RST
Polling Loop RPM Restore..........................RPM RST
Poll Loop Short ...........................................EXP SHRT
Poll Loop Smoke Det. Tested† ....................TESTED
Poll Loop Smoke Det. Not Tested† .............UNTESTED
Poll Loop Smoke Det. Test Failed†.............FAILED
Polling Loop Short ......................................EXP TRBL
Polling Loop Tamper ..................................EXP TMPR
Printer Failure............................................PRINTER FAIL
Printer Restore ...........................................PRINTER RST
Programmed Access Schedule Change.......ACC SKED CHG
Programme Change...................................PROG CHANGE

Programme Mode Entered ......................... PROGRAM ENTRY
Programmed Schedule was Changed......... SCHEDULE CHANGE
Real-Time Clock was Set............................ TIME SET
RF Expander Module Fail.... ..................... RF EXPND
RF Expander Module Restart .................... RF RST
RF Receiver Trouble................................... RF TRBL
RF Receiver Trouble Restore ..................... RF RST
RF Transmitter Low Battery ..................... RF LBAT
RF Transmitter Low Battery Restore........ RFLB RST
RF Transmitter Low Battery Test ............. RF LB OK
RF Transmitter/Recvr Supervision Fail .... RF SUPR
RF Transmitter/Recvr Supvs, Trble Rest. . RF RST
Scheduled System Arming Failed.............. ARM FAILED
System Armed ............................................ ARMED
System Armed STAY Mode........................ ARMED-STAY
System Armed by Downloader................... ARMED-REM
System Armed Using Quick-Arm............... ARMED-QUICK
System Armed with RF Key....................... ARMED-KEY
System Armed Using Schedule .................. ARMED-AUTO
System Armed Earlier Than Schedule ...... ARMED-EARLY
System Armed Later Than Schedule ......... ARMED-LATE
Sys Batt Fail or Disconnection................... BATTERY FAIL
System Battery Restore ............................. LOW BATTERY
System Correction of Internal Time .......... TIME ERROR
System Did Not Arm Using Schedule ........ MISS ARM
System Did Not Disarm by Schedule......... MISSED DISRM
System Disarmed Remotely ....................... DISARMED-REM
System Disarmed by RF Key ..................... DISARMED-KEY
System Disarmed Earlier than Schedule .. DISRMD-EARLY
System Disarmed Later than Schedule ..... DISRMD-LATE
System Low battery ................................... LOW BATTERY
Supervised Relay Trouble .......................... RLY TRBL
Supervised Relay Restore .......................... RLY RST
System Restored After Shutdown .............. SYSTEM RST
System Watchdog Timer Reset .................. SYSTEM RESET
Tamper ....................................................... TAMPER
Tamper Restore .......................................... TMPR RST
Test Report Transmitted............................ SELF TEST
User Code Added ........................................ Uxxx ADD BY
User Code Changed.................................... Uxxx CHG BY
User Code Deleted...................................... Uxxx DEL BY
Zone Bypass................................................ BYPASS
Zone Trouble............................................... TROUBLE
Zone Trouble Restore ................................. TRBL RST

† Occurs after fire walk test activated.

– 57 –

SECTION 16

Final Power-Up Procedure
This section provides the following information:
• Earth ground considerations
• Connecting the AC transformer
• Connecting the backup battery
• Auxiliary and Polling Loop Current Drain Worksheets

General
Information

• You can power the control from a 1361 transformer, rated 16.5VAC, 40VA,
which plugs directly into a 24 hour, 120VAC, 60 Hz outlet.
• If using power line carrier devices, you can use the 4300 transformer instead
in 120VAC, 60Hz countries, and the XF10 in 220/240VAC, 50Hz countries
where transformers can be located outside of the control cabinet (e.g.
Australia).

Earth Ground
Considerations

In order for the lightning transient protective devices in this product to be
effective, the designated earth ground terminal (terminal 30), must be
terminated in a good earth ground. We recommend using 1.3mm diameter
copper wire run at a maximum length of 7.5m. The following are examples of
good earth grounds available at most installations:
• Metal Cold Water Pipe: Use a non-corrosive metal strap (copper is
recommended) firmly secured to the pipe to which the ground lead is
electrically connected and secured.
• AC Power Outlet Ground: Available from 3-prong power outlets only. To
test the integrity of the ground terminal, use a three-wire circuit tester with
neon lamp indicators.

Connecting the
Transformer

1. Use the Polling Loop Current Drain and Auxiliary Device Current Drain
Worksheets found later in this section to make sure that the currents
consumed by the devices connected to the system do not exceed the system's
respective ratings.
Failure to observe the polling loop current rating will cause polling loop malfunction
(CHECK 997 will be displayed). Failure to observe the auxiliary output current rating
will result in a battery which does not charge properly or possibly a tripped circuit
breaker.
2. Connect all installed devices to the control.
3. Wire the transformer to the panel (before connecting the battery) or wire
the 4300 or XF10 transformer (if using Powerline Carrier devices) in
countries where the transformer can be located outside of the control
cabinet (refer to the following diagrams).
4. Plug the transformer into a 24 hour, uninterrupted, AC mains outlet.
After a few seconds, the keypad display will appear.

–58–

BATTERY
TABS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA
ADEMCO No.1361
or 4300, or XF10
if X-10 DEVICES
WILL BE USED.

Sync Data Com

BLUE
BLACK

GREEN
BROWN

VIOLET

Earth
AC Ground AC

GR IN 2
OU
ND
IN
3

Connect to
24hr. source
of AC mains

NO CONNECTION

CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.7VDC

GREY

YELLOW
WHITE
RED

GR
OU
OU ND
T
OU 5
T
GR 6
OU
GR ND
OU
ND

GEL CELL
BATTERY

NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, PLUG THE
TRANSFORMER IN BEFORE
CONNECTING THE BATTERY.

4300 TRANSFORMER/INTERFACE

RED (+)

Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH

BLK (Ð)

PRIMARY
POWER
Supplied by a
transformer which
is rated at
16.5VAC, 40VA.
Caution must be
taken when wiring
this transformer to
the panel to guard
against blowing the
fuse inside the
transformer (nonreplaceable).

4142T
TB1 TB1
-1 -30

TB1
-2

Figure 29a. 4300 Transformer Connections

Figure 28. 1361 Transformer and Battery
Connections
16VAC IN
1
2

EARTH
GROUND
30

BLUE

BROWN
OUT
6

GRO
UND BLACK

GREEN
OUT
5

WHITE

YELLOW

GRO
UND
RED

YELLOW

GRO
UND

220/230VAC
50HZ

IN 3

VIOLET

TRANSFORMER

GRO
UND GREY

J8 CONNECTOR

BLACK

4142TR CABLE

RED / GREEN

TRANSFORMER MODULAR
CORD COLORS
SYNC
DATA
COMMON

Figure 29b. XF10 Transformer Connections

Connecting The
Battery

In the event of an AC power loss, the Control panel will still operate for a period
of time (time period varies depending on size of battery used) because the control
has a back-up, rechargeable gel type (sealed) lead acid battery. ADEMCO 467
(12V, 4AH) and ADEMCO 712BNP 12V, 7AH batteries are recommended.
The standby battery is automatically tested every 4 minutes for 13 seconds (or
every 50 seconds for 1.5 seconds, as a function of programme selection) and every
24 hours for 10 minutes, beginning 24 hours after exiting programming mode. In
addition, entry into the test mode will cause a battery test to be initiated. A
"SYSTEM LOBAT" indication will display if the battery voltage is low (less than
approx. 11.5VDC).
1. Use the Battery Standby Table to select the appropriate battery for the
installation.
2. Connect the battery. Do not connect the battery until all devices have
been wired to the control.
BATTERY STANDBY TABLE
AUXILIARY STANDBY
CURRENT DRAIN
AMP-HRS.
4.0
6.0-7.0

200mA 400mA 600mA 750mA
6 hrs. 4 hrs. 3 hrs. 2.5 hrs.
11 hrs. 7 hrs. 5.5 hrs. 4 hrs.

NOTE: These figures are
approximate, and may vary
depending upon the age, quality,
and capacity of the battery at the
time of the AC mains loss.

– 59 –

Use the following formula to determine the battery size needed:
Calculating the
Battery Size Needed [Total Current Drain (Amps)] X [Number of Hours Standby Needed] = [Battery Ampere Hours].
Example: If the total current drain is 550mA (.55 Amps), and 24 Hr. standby is
needed: .55 X 24 = 13.2 Ampere/Hour battery. In this example, two 7 Amp/Hr
batteries connected in parallel must be used.

Polling Loop Current Drain Worksheet
RPM DEVICE

CURRENT

4194WH Contact
4191SN Contact
4193SN
4293SN
4939SN-WH Contact
4959SN O/H Door Contact
4192SD Photo Smoke Detector
4192SDT Smoke w/Heat
4192CP Ion Smoke Detector
4275EX Dual PIR
4278EX/4278EX-SN Quad PIR
4190 2-Zone RPM

1 mA
1mA
1.5mA
1mA
1mA
1mA
0.4 mA
0.4 mA
0.4 mA
1 mA
1 mA
1 mA (LOW)
2 mA (HIGH)
29 mA
25mA
1.5 mA
1.5 mA
1 mA

4208U 8-Zone RPM
4208UXM MK3 8-Zone RPM
7500 Glass Break
9500 Glass Break
998MX PIR

# UNITS

TOTAL
CURRENT

TOTAL **

If the total current drain exceeds 128 mA, a 4297 Loop Extender module must be used. This module is
powered by the control's auxiliary power output and provides a separate polling loop output which can
support an additional 128mA.

Auxiliary Device Current Drain Worksheet
DEVICE

CURRENT

6139 Keypad
675 Ground Start Module
Built-in Polling Loop
4281 RF Receiver
5881/5882 RF Receiver
5882EU RF Transceiver
4297 Poll Loop Extender
4204 Relay Module

100mA
50 mA
(total poll loop worksht)
35mA
50mA
60mA
50 mA
15mA standby
40mA per active relay

# UNITS

TOTAL
CURRENT

TOTAL (750mA max)

* If using wired devices such as PIRs, refer to the specifications for that particular unit's current drain.

–60–

SECTION 17

Access Control
(via ADEMCO PassPoint ACS)
This section provides the following information:
• General Information
• Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point
• Wiring the Vista Gateway Module
• Programming the Vista Gateway Module

General Information
The Vista-120 supports the capability to interact with the Ademco PassPoint Access Control
System, (PassPoint ACS). The Vista-120 processes fire, burglary, arm, disarm information,
etc. The PassPoint ACS processes card reader information and controls the locking and
unlocking of doors. The sharing of information between the two systems is provided by the
Vista Gateway Module, (VGM).
The VGM is connected between the ECP bus (keypad terminals) of the control and the
network bus of the PassPoint ACS, (see figure 14-1). The control sends the VGM its status
information, event log entries and entry/exit requests, (inputs programmed with response
type Access Point), from wired/wireless keypads, wired zones, and RF transmitters. The
VGM then, reformats and retransmits this information to the Main Logic Board, (MLB) on
the PassPoint ACS network bus.
The Vista-120 can control access points on the PassPoint ACS.
The PassPoint ACS can control on the Vista-120:
• Relays
• Arming/Disarming Schedules
• Keypad Display
• Time/Date Synchronisation of the Two Systems
See the documentation included with the PassPoint ACS for details.
The PassPoint ACS can dedicate some of its inputs for use as regular Vista-120 wired zones,
(zone response type ACS). The PassPoint ACS can also utilise the Vista-120 dialler for
reports to the central station.

Access Control of an Entry/Exit Point
The control can send entry and exit requests to the PassPoint ACS utilising keypads, wired
zones, and RF transmitters. A zone is programmed with a response type 27, (Access Point)
and an appropriate input type, (wired/wireless keypad, wired zone, RF zone).

Using the Alpha Keypad
There are three entries that can be entered at the keypad to provide access to a door.
• Code + #73 (unlocks door for time programmed in ACS software)
• Code + #74 (prompts for specific point to be unlocked)
• Code + #75 (prompts for specific point and desired function)
This entry requires the VGM and the PassPoint ACS. The functions available are Grant,
Protect or Bypass. Grant temporarily unlocks a door to force an access. Protect unlocks
the door only when a valid access is received. Bypass permanently unlocks the door to
allow continuous access.

– 61 –

Programming the Keypad
1. Enter the ZONE PROGRAMMING section in the #93 Menu Mode.
2. Programme the zone with a response type 27 (Access Point).
3. Enter the access point number (00-31) of the door and indicate whether this is an entry
or exit keypad.
4. Enter the partition number,
5. Enter the input type as Keypad Input (09)
6. Enter the keypad ecp address.
See the ZONE PROGRAMMING section for a detailed explanation.

Using an RF Transmitter Zone
An RF button type transmitter (5804/5804EU), can be used to provide access to or egress
from up to 4 doors. One button will control one door. Also a button can be used to provide
access or egress due to a panic or duress condition.
An RF transmitter (5816/5816EU) can be used with a remote switch to provide an exit in
case of a fire alarm.
The PIR (5890/5888EU) can be used to provide exit while preventing entry through a door.
The smoke detector (5808/5808EU), can be used to provide egress in emergency situations.

Programming the RF Transmitter
1. Enter the ZONE PROGRAMMING section in the #93 Menu Mode.
2. Programme the zone with a response type 27 (Access Point).
3. Enter the access point number (00-31) of the door.
4. Enter whether RF device is for entry or exit.
5. Enter the partition number
6. Enter the input type supervised RF (03), unsupervised RF (04), or button RF (05).
7. Enter the loop number
8. Enroll the serial number.
See the ZONE PROGRAMMING section for a detailed explanation.
RF buttons and pendants must be assigned to a user number in order to function. See the
USER ACCESS CODES section for the procedure.

Wireless Keypads
The wireless keypads (5827 & 5827BD) can provide another way of entering or exiting the
premise. They function the same as the alpha keypads, except when the code + # 73 is
entered. This entry will momentarily allow access to ALL access points in the partition to
which the keypad is assigned

Programming the Wireless Keypad
1. Enter the partition to which the keypad is assigned in field 1*48.

Using ACS Zone Inputs
If the PassPoint ACS has uncommitted zones, these may be used by the Vista-120 as wired
zones.

Programming the ACS Zone Inputs
1. Enter the ZONE PROGRAMMING section in the #93 Menu Mode.
2. Programme this zone as any other zone and indicate the input type as ACS (10).
3. Enter the PassPoint ACS’s zone ID (00-31).
See the ZONE PROGRAMMING section for a detailed explanation.

–62–

Control of Lighting and Appliances
Lighting and appliances can be controlled when an access or exit event occurs. Lights or
appliances can be automatically turned on or off when a valid entry or egress request is
presented at an access point. The Vista-120 relays or the ACS relays or triggers would be
used with keypads and/or RF transmitters whose response type is Access Point (27) to
control these devices.
Programming the Control of Lighting and Appliances
1. Enter the RELAY PROGRAMMING section in the #93 Menu Mode.
2. Programme all the information for the relay
3. Select the relay type, ECP (1) for the 4204 and X10 (2).
See the RELAY PROGRAMMING section for a detailed explanation.

Access Control Dialler Events
All PassPoint ACS events can be sent to the Vista-120’s dialler via the VGM. These events
will also be logged into the control’s event log. This is enabled in the PassPoint ACS. See the
PassPoint ACS documentation for a detailed explanation.

Wiring the Vista Gateway Module
The Vista Gateway Module is connected between the ECP bus, (Vista-120 keypad terminals)
and the network bus of the PassPoint Access Control System. See Figure 30 for the proper
wiring connections:

}

PROM C

ECHELON NETWORK
(PASSPOINT ACS)

4-PIN
KEYPAD
PLUG

TRANSFORMER

BLACK

GREEN

RED

YELLOW

}

TO
CONTROL’S
KEYPAD
TERMINALS

Figure 30 Wiring the Vista Gateway Module

Programming the Vista Gateway Module
Set the VGM’s ecp address by running the ACSTERM, which configures the PassPoint ACS.
See the PassPoint ACS documentation for a detailed explanation.
1. Enter “M” (menu mode), and then an 8 digit user code.
2. Select (1),
3. Configure the access system
4. Enter programme mode (1).
5. Select configure modules (3)
6. Go to the module number that the VGM is located at on the Echelon Bus of the PassPoint
ACS. This screen will have arbitrary dialler information displayed. Ignore this screen.
7. Enter (Z). This screen contains the VGM ecp address entry.
8. Enter the desired ecp address. This address must match the address programmed in the
DEVICE PROGRAMMING section of the #93 Menu Mode of the Vista-120.

– 63 –

PART 2

PROGRAMMING THE SYSTEM

–64–

SECTION 18

The Mechanics of Programming
This section provides the following information:
• Using Data Field Programme Mode
• System and communication defaults
• Entering Data Field Programme Mode
• Moving from one level (page) of programme fields to another
• Entering and viewing data fields
• Programming partition-specific data fields
• #93 Menu Mode Programming

Using Data Field
Programme Mode

Data Field programme mode is the programme mode through which many
system options are programmed. The field numbers on the programme form
show the number of entries required for each field. When an entry is completed,
the keypad "beeps" three times and advances to the next field. At this point, you
can either make the required entry in the new field, or press [*] + the next field
number you want to programme.
There are several "question and answer" modes, which we call "Menu" modes
that can be accessed once Data Field programme mode has been entered. These
modes prompt the user for information.

System and
Communication
Defaults

• The system is shipped with a set of pre-programmed default values that are
designed to meet the needs of many installations. These can be changed by the
installer to suit specific needs if desired.
• There are four sets of pre-programmed communication defaults available,
including Low Speed, 4+2 Express, Ademco High Speed, and Ademco Contact
ID. Loading one of these defaults automatically programs industry standard
codes that will suit most of your needs.
• These defaults can be changed directly from the keypad, or they can be
changed by using V-LINK downloading software (be sure that the software
version used includes a VISTA 120 with scheduling menu selection).
Downloading can be performed either remotely from an IBM compatible
computer (using an approved modem) or at the job site (direct-wire download
using the 4100SM Serial Module)
The factory loaded defaults (*97) enable keypad addresses 00-03 only. A keypad set
to one of these addresses must be used to programme the system.

Entering Data Field
Programming
Mode

1. Enter programme mode using either method A or B:
A) Press both the [*] and [#] keys at the same time within 30 seconds after
power is applied to the Control.
B)

Enter the [Installer Code] + [8] + [0] + [0] + [0] keys. The factory
installer code can be changed once in the programme mode (field *00).

Local keypad programming can be disabled through V-Link downloading software. If
this is done, programming can only be accomplished via the downloading software.

2. After entry into the programme mode, the following will be displayed:
Program Mode
*Fill # View -00
3. Following this display, enter ✴ and the first field number to be programmed.
– 65 –

Enter the first field number to be programmed (ex. *00, installer's code) and
make the desired entry. When the field is complete, the keypad will normally
"beep" three times and will advance to the next field. If you do not desire to
change the next field, press [✴]and the next field number to be programmed.
First Page of Fields
(*00-*90)
press *99 or *98 to exit programme mode

Moving from One
Page of
Programming to
Another

• The data fields are grouped into three levels (referred to as "pages"). The first
page is accessed as soon as programming mode is entered.
• The second and third pages of data fields are indicated at the keypad by a "1"
or "2" respectively in front of the 2-digit field address. The words "ALT
PROGRAM MODE" along with a "100" or "200", depending on which page of
programme fields is accessed, to indicate the higher page of fields.
1. To access the next level of fields, press *94.
2. Then press [✴]+ [XX], where XX=the last two digits of the programme field,
and make the desired entry.
3. To return to the previous page of fields, press *99.
press *94 to move to 2nd page
press *99 to move back to 1st page
Second Page of Fields
(1*01-1*77)
press *94 to move to 3rd page
press *99 to move back to 2nd page
Third Page of Fields
(2*00-2*24)

Viewing Data
Fields
Entry Errors

To view the contents of a data field, press [#] plus the 2-digit field address.
The field's entries will be displayed, but no changes can be made.
• If an address is improperly entered, the keypad will display FC.
• If a programme entry is improperly entered (for example, a larger number
than that which is permitted), the keypad display will go blank.
• In either of the above cases, simply re-enter ✴ + the correct field number.
*94
*99
*91
*98

Programming
System-Wide Data
Fields

SUMMARY OF DATA FIELD PROGRAMMING COMMANDS
Next page of fields
Previous page of fields or exit programming mode with no installer
lockout
Select partition for programming partition-specific fields
Exit programming mode with installer lock-out

Values for some programming fields are system-wide (global), and some can be
different for each partition (partition-specific). Note that the partition-specific
programming fields are automatically skipped when programming the global
fields. If the system has only 1 partition, the partition-specific fields will not be
automatically skipped. To programme system-wide data fields, do the following:
1. Enter Programme Mode: Installer code + 8 0 0 0.
2. When the programme screen is displayed, press *00 to begin programming the
Installer Code data field.
When you have completed the entry, the keypad sounds three beeps and
automatically displays the next programme field in sequential order.
3. To programme specific data fields out of sequence, press ✴ plus the 2-digit
field address of the field number you want to programme, then make the
required entry.
If the number of digits that you enter in a data field is less than the maximum
permitted (ex. phone number), the keypad displays the last entry and waits.

–66–

To proceed, enter ✴ + the next data field you wish to programme (ex. press
*05).
Partition-Specific programming fields are skipped.
4. To change to the next page of fields, press *94.
To return to the previous page of fields, press *99.

Programming
Partition-Specific
Data Fields

To program partition-specific data fields once in programme mode, do the
following:
1. Press *91, which will prompt you for the partition number desired.
2. Enter a partition-specific field number (ex. *09) to begin programming. When
the first field’s entry is completed, the next partition-specific field will
automatically be displayed.
When all partition-specific fields are
programmed, the system returns to the global programming fields (page 1
fields). To return to the global programme fields before finishing all fields,
enter any global field number.
3. Repeat this procedure for each partition in the installation.
PROGRAMMING PARTITION-SPECIFIC FIELDS
Press *91 to select a partition

Enter the partition to be programmed

Enter a partition-specific field # and make entry

After partition -specific fields are programmed,
press *91 to select next partition.
Enter any global field number to return to the global fields at any time.

#93 Menu Mode
Programming

The #93 Menu Mode is a mode through which much of the system's programming
is done. It offers main menu selections for the following:
Zone Programming
Serial Number Programming
Alpha Programming
Device Programming
Relay Programming
Relay Voice Descriptors
Custom Index Programming (VIP Module substitute words)
Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0
will display the next choice in sequence. The keypad will then prompt you with
questions regarding the programming of a particular zone or device.
The following is a list of commands used while in the menu mode.
#93 Menu Mode Key Commands
#93
Enters Menu mode
[✴]
Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.
[#]
Backs up to previous screen.
0
Press to answer NO
1
Press to answer YES
00+[✴] Escapes from menu mode, back into data field programming
mode, if entered at the first prompt of each main menu
option.
– 67 –

SECTION 19

Zone Index & Zone Type Definitions
This section provides the following information:
• Zone number designations
• Zone Type Definitions

Zone Index

The VISTA-120 has 128 physical zones, as well as supervisory zones for relays,
ECP devices (devices which communicate through the keypad terminals), and
system troubles. These zones are designated as follows:
ZONE No.
001 - 128
601 – 696

ZONE FUNCTION
ACTUAL ZONE
Protection zones
As indicated
Relay zones (to supervise relay, 6 + 2-digit relay number
use the Zone Programming menu (e.g. relay number 03, if
to enter response type 5 or 19 for supervised, is zone 603
that relay’s zone number)

800 - 830

ECP
Device
Supervisory
Zones 8 + 2-digit Device Address,
(includes keypads, wireless receivers, e.g., Device Address 01, if
VIP Module, relay modules, etc.)
supervised, is zone 801. The
4285 VIP module is zone 804
(since its Device Address
must be set to 4).
System Supervisory Zones
988: 2nd Wireless Receiver
- not receiving signals
990: 1st Wireless Receiver not receiving signals
997: Polling Loop overload
Keypad Panics
995: 1+✴ panic (A key)
996: 3 + # panic (C key)
999: ✴ + # panic (B key)

900 - 990 & 997

995, 996, 999

Response types for zones are enabled in #93 Menu mode Zone Programming.
Supervisory zones should be given a response type of either 19 (24-Hr. Trouble)
or 05 (Trouble-by-Day, Alarm-by-Night).

Zone Response
Type Definitions

Each zone must be assigned a zone response type, which defines the way in which
the system responds to faults in that zone. In addition, there are three keypad
activated zones (PANIC keys) for each partition, a polling loop supervision zone,
and two RF supervisory zones, one for each RF Receiver installed. The following
table lists the zone numbers and the types of sensors that can be used with each
in this system:
Zone
1
7
8
1-9
1-63
1-128
10-128
995
996
999

Sensors
2-wire smoke detectors (if used)
keyswitch (if used)
latching type glass break detectors (if used)
traditional wired zones
5700 series wireless devices
5800 series wireless devices
polling loop devices
*/1 (A key) panic
#/3 (C key) panic
*/# (B key) panic

Zone types are defined on the next page.

–68–

ZONE RESPONSE TYPE DEFINITIONS
Type 00: Zone Not Used
Programme a zone with this zone type if the zone is
not used.

Type 01: Entry/Exit #1 Burglary.
This zone type provides entry delay whenever the
zone is faulted if the control is armed in the Away or
Stay modes. When the panel is armed in the Instant
or Maximum modes, no entry delay is provided. Exit
delay begins whenever the control is armed,
regardless of the arming mode selected. These
delays are programmable. This zone type is usually
assigned to sensors or contacts on doors through
which primary entry and exit will take place.

Type 02: Entry/Exit #2 Burglary.
This zone type provides a secondary entry delay
whenever the zone is faulted if the panel is armed in
the Away and Stay modes. When the panel is armed
in the Instant or Maximum modes, no entry delay is
provided. Secondary exit delay begins whenever the
control is armed, regardless of the arming mode
selected. These delays are programmable. This zone
type is usually assigned to sensors or contacts on
doors through which more time is needed to get to
and from the keypad. Delay times for this zone type
must be greater than Zone Type 01. (Ex.: a garage,
loading dock, or basement door)

Type 03: Perimeter Burglary
This zone type gives an instant alarm if the zone is
faulted when the panel is armed in the Away, Stay,
Instant or Maximum modes. This zone type is
usually assigned to all sensors or contacts on seldom
used exterior doors and on windows.

Type 04: Interior, Follower.
This zone type gives a delayed alarm (using the
programmed Entry /Exit time) if the Entry/Exit
zone is faulted first. Otherwise this zone type gives
an instant alarm. This zone type is active when the
panel is armed in the Away or Maximum modes.
Maximum mode eliminates the entry delay. This
zone type is bypassed automatically when the
panel is armed in the Stay or Instant modes.
This zone type is usually assigned to a zone covering
an area such as a foyer, lobby, or hallway through
which one must pass upon entry or exit(After
faulting the entry/exit zone to reach the keypad to
disarm the system.)
Since this zone type is
designed to provide an instant alarm if the
entry/exit zone is not violated first, it will protect an
area in the event an intruder hides on the premises
prior to the system being armed, or gains access to
the premises through an unprotected area.

Type 05: Trouble by Day/Alarm by Night.
This zone type will give an instant alarm if faulted
when armed in the Away, Stay, Instant or
Maximum (night) modes. During the disarmed state
(day), the system will provide a latched trouble
sounding from the keypad (and a central station
report, if desired). This zone type is usually
assigned to a zone which contains tamper switches,
or to a zone covering a "sensitive" area such as a
stock room, drug supply room, etc. This zone type
can also be used on a sensor or contact in an area
where immediate notification of an entry is desired.
There are programming options to prohibit bypass
of this zone type except by installer and to prohibit
restoration of the system (or partition) to the
disarmed, ready to arm state subsequent to a
trouble or alarm condition related to this zone type,
except by the installer.

Type 06: 24-hour Silent Alarm.
This zone type sends a report to the Central Station
but provides no keypad display or sounding. This
zone type is usually assigned to a zone containing
an Emergency button.

Type 07: 24-hour Audible Alarm.
This zone type sends a report to the Central Station,
and provides an alarm sound at the keypad, and an
audible external alarm. This zone type is usually
assigned to a zone that has an Emergency button.

Type 08: 24-hour Auxiliary Alarm.
This zone type sends a report to Central Station and
provides an alarm sound at the keypad. (No
bell/siren output is provided). This zone type is
usually assigned to a zone containing a button for
use in personal emergencies, or to a zone containing
monitoring devices such as water sensors,
temperature sensors, etc.

Type 09: Supervised Fire. (No Verification)
This zone type provides a fire alarm on short circuit
and a trouble condition on open circuit. The
bell/siren output will pulse when this zone type is
shorted. This zone type is always active and cannot
be bypassed. This zone type can be assigned to
any wired zone except zone 9, and can be
assigned to certain wireless system zones.

– 69 –

Type 10 : Interior w/Delay.
This zone type gives entry and exit delays (using the
programmed entry/exit time), if tripped when the
panel is armed in the Away mode. This zone type is
also active during Maximum mode, but no entry
delay is provided (alarms occur immediately if zone
is tripped). This zone type is bypassed when the
panel is armed in the Stay or Instant modes.
Delay begins whenever sensors in this zone are
violated, regardless of whether or not an entry/exit
delay zone was tripped first. If an entry/exit zone is
not tripped first, the entry/exit delay for a type 01
zone is used.

Type 19: 24 Hour Trouble
An open or short on a zone with this zone type
causes a trouble response. No external alarm
sounders are activated.

Type 20: Arm-Stay*
This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800
series wireless pushbuttons or a enroll mode polling
loop device, and which will result in arming the
system in the STAY mode when the zone is
activated.

Type 21: Arm-Away*
This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800
series wireless pushbuttons or a enroll mode polling
loop device, and which will result in arming the
system in the AWAY mode when the zone is
activated.

Type 22: Disarm*
This is a special purpose zone type used with 5800
series wireless pushbuttons or a enroll mode polling
loop device, and which will result in disarming the
system when the zone is activated.

Type 23: No Alarm Response
This zone type can be used on a zone when an
output relay action is desired, but with no
accompanying alarm (ex. lobby door access). There
are programming options to event log and
communicate zone faults for this zone type.
* Note that these zone types are for use by 5800
series devices or serial numbered polling loop
devices only.

Type 27: Access Point
This zone type can be used on zones that are to
signal to the Ademco Passpoint ACS to request
unlatching of a door lock linked to this zone.

– 70 –

Type 28: Main Logic Board
(MLB) Supervision
This zone type assigns a zone to supervise the ACS
MLB. If communication between the MLB and the
Vista Gateway Module (VGM) fails, this zone will be
displayed on the keypad as having a "CHECK"
condition. Also, if this zone fails, all Access Control
System, (ACS) input zones will display "Check".
NOTE FOR PANIC KEYS: Keypad panic zones share
the same zone response type for all 8 partitions, but
panics may be individually enabled for each
partition.
IMPORTANT! FAULT ANNUNCIATION
Polling loop and RF troubles (zones 988, 990 & 997)
will report as trouble conditions only, and as such,
should be assigned zone type 05 if annunciation is
desired. See SUPERVISION notes in POLLING
LOOP and WIRELESS EXPANSION sections for
more information.

Zone Type Defaults
Following are the zone type defaults for zones on
the VISTA-120:
Zone No.
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009–128
601-632
800–831
988
990
995
996
997
999

Zone Type
09
09
03
03
03
03
03
03
00
05
00
00
00
00
00
19
06

SECTION 20

Data Field Descriptions
The following is a description of all data fields provided by this control. Make
entries as described for each field.
*00

INSTALLER CODE

| | |

0001-9999 = 4-digit installer's code
The Installer's Code is reserved for installation company use, and is the
only code that can be used to enter Programme mode from the keypad.
This code cannot be used to disarm the system if it was not used to arm
the system. This code cannot reenter programming mode if exited by the
*98 command.
*01

INSTALLER CODE RESTRICTION
1=
0=

*03

0=
*04

[0]

Yes, the exit delay will be infinitely long and the system will arm 5
seconds after the Zone Type 01 exit door opens and closes or closes if
already open and that condition was allowed prior to arming
No

AUTOBYPASS EXIT ROUTE FAULTS (partition-specific)
1=

0=
*05

Yes,Master Code keying opens a 15 second time window in which the
Installer Code can be used (Norwegian requirement)
No, normal usage of Installer Code during disarmed period

FINAL CONTACT SET (partition-specific)
1=

[0]

[0]
Yes, autobypass of unsealed burglary zones after a 2nd attempt to
arm within 15 seconds after arming is rejected and the open zones
are displayed (Swedish requirement)
No

ARM WITH LOW BATTERY
1=
0=

[0]
Yes, allowing the user to override a system low battery condition and
arm the system or a partition
No, arming is prohibited when a low system battery is present
(ANPI requirement)

*06

[0]
ZONE TYPE 5 ALWAYS ALARM
1 = fault of a type 5 (tamper) zone shall cause a full alarm in any
arming mode (disarmed or armed)
0 = fault in a type 5 zone shall cause a trouble in the disarmed state and
a full alarm in any armed mode

*07

ALLOW ARMING WITH FAULTS IN EXIT ROUTE
[0]
1 = arming can proceed with zone faults present in any of the exit route
zones (zone types 1, 2, 4 and 10), wherein a fault remaining in any of
these zone types at the end of exit delay (for AWAY/MAXIMUM
arming and in zone types 1 and 2 for STAY/INSTANT arming) will
result in a burglary alarm. Automatic bypass of the faulted zones is
achieved (instead of alarm) if field 1*20 is also enabled.
0 = all zones must be intact in order for arming to take place

*08

SELF ACTIVATING SIREN OUTPUT
1=
0=

[0]
Yes, alarm output is normally activated and turns off during alarms
(ANPI requirement)
No, alarm output is normally off and activates during an audible
alarm
– 71 –

*09

ENTRY DELAY #1 (partition-specific)

*10

EXIT DELAY #1 (partition-specific)

*11

ENTRY DELAY #2 (partition-specific)

*12

EXIT DELAY #2 (partition-specific)

*13

SOUNDER TIMEOUT (partition-specific)

*14

ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME

*15

KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT

[02] |
01-15 times 15 seconds
00 = no delay
Entry delay defines the delay time which allows users to reenter the
premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry delay
door (zone type 01)and disarm the system without sounding an alarm.
The system must be disarmed within this period or an alarm will occur.
Maximum delay of 225 seconds (entry 15 times 15 seconds).
[03] |
01-15 times 15 seconds
00 = no delay
Exit delay defines the delay period that allows users to leave the
premises through a door that has been programmed as an entry/exit
delay door(zone type 01) after arming the system without setting off the
alarm. ), up to a maximum delay of 225 seconds.
[06] |
Entry Delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Entry Delay #2 zone type.
Note that this delay must be longer than Entry Delay #1.
[08] |
Exit delay 2 is used for the zone assigned to Exit Delay #2. Note that this
delay must be longer than Exit Delay #1.
[02] |
01-15 minutes
Defines the length of time an external sounder and the keypad's sounder
will sound for all audible alarms. This duration can be overridden by the
Fire Timeout Disable option (field *21) for fire alarms.
[0]
1 = fast response mode (10msec) for appropriate devices wired to zone 9
0 = normal response, 350msec
[0]
1-8 = partition in which the zone 7 keyswitch is being used
0 = zone 7 keyswitch not used
Requires the use of zone 7 wired loop (zone 7 no longer available as
protection zone when used for keyswitch operation). If the keyswitch is
used, the fire and panic alarm voltage triggers automatically become
ARMING and READY status outputs for support of the Keyswitch LEDs.

NOTE: Zone type 10 is automatically assigned to zone 7 if a keyswitch is
used. Reports openings/closing by user "0" if reporting is enabled in field
*40.
*16

CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING (partition-specific)

[0]
1/2 second external alarm sounding ("ding") at the end of exit delay
(or after kissoff from the central station, if sending closing reports.)
0 = no arming ding
1=

– 72 –

*17

AC MAINS LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING

*18

MAINS PRESENCE DISPLAY

[0]
1 = enable sounding at the keypad (rapid beeping) when AC power is
lost (sounding occurs about 2 minutes after actual AC loss)
0 = no AC power loss keypad sounding
[0]
1 = Yes, display AC presence (AC) in lower right corner of keypad display
0 = No

*19

RANDOMISE AC MAINS LOSS REPORT

*20

[00] [11] |
|
TELEPHONE MODULE PHONE CODE
01-09 = first digit
11 (for ✴) or 12 (for #) = second digit
To disable the voice module, enter 00 for the 1st digit and enter 11 for the
2nd digit of the code (disable code = 00,11).
This is the 2-digit phone code used to access the system via the 4285
telephone module.

*21

PREVENT FIRE TIME-OUT

*22

KEYPAD PANIC ENABLE (partition-specific)

[0]
1 = randomise AC loss reporting between 30-60 minutes after an actual
AC loss
0 = normal AC loss reporting (about 2 minutes after actual AC loss)
Selecting this option helps prevent an overload of AC loss messages at
the central station during a community blackout.

[0]
1 = disable (no timeout) the alarm sounder duration for any zone
designated as a fire zone, regardless of partition, so that fire
sounding continues until the system is reset
0 = the normal burglary alarm sounder duration (programmed in
partition-specific field *13) should apply to fire alarms.

1 = enable the appropriate keypad panics used in this partition
0 = disable keypad panics
*23

*24

[001]

| |

995 996 999

MULTIPLE ALARMS (partition-specific)

[0]
1 = enable multiple alarms
0 = disable multiple alarms
Determines whether or not more than one alarm can be sounded in a
given zone during an armed period. Note that multiple alarm soundings
will not occur more frequently than allowed by the programmed alarm
sounder duration. This selection applies to local sounding and has no
impact on the number of communication messages transmitted. Refer to
Intermittent Sensor Suppression for limiting communication messages.

IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER

[0]
1 = disable (ignore) tamper
0 = tamper detection is desired (ANPI requirement)
Only applicable to certain polling loop sensors with tamper switches or
5800 series transmitters. This option is used to disable tamper detection
on these devices.

*25

BURGLARY TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8

*26

INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING

*27

TEST REPORT INTERVAL

[1]
1 = allow optional triggering of the voltage output on pin 7 of the J7
header to include zone response type 8 (24hr. auxiliary).
0 = only burglary and audible panic alarms (zone type 7) will trigger pin
7.
[0]
1 = no test report sent if any other type of report was sent since the last
test report
0 = test reports are to be sent at the set intervals, regardless of whether
or not other reports have been sent
[000]

| |

001-999 = test reporting interval in hours
000 = no test reporting is desired.
If a test report is desired, enter a test code in fields *81 & *82, location 7.
Set first test report time in field *83.

– 73 –

*28

POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE

[1]
1 = upon power-up, after a prolonged power loss which caused the
system's battery to discharge, the system will assume the system
status prior to the power loss.
0 = the system will always power up in a disarmed state.
When the system powers up armed, an alarm will occur 3 minutes after
arming if a zone is faulted. When so armed, reports closing as User #0 if
open/close reporting for installer was enabled in field *39. Note that if
the previous state was armed AWAY or STAY, the system may not
respond to sensor changes for a small period of time (1-3 min.), which
allows sensors such as PIRs to stabilise.
Note that authority levels 0 or 5 cannot be used to disarm the system if
control powers up armed.

*29

QUICK ARM (partition-specific)

[1]

1 = enable arming of the burglary system in AWAY, STAY, INSTANT or
MAXIMUM modes by using the # key instead of the security code.
When armed, reports closing as User 0 if open/close reporting for
User #2 (typically a master level user) was enabled for a given
partition.
0 = Quick Arm is not desired. (The security code must always be used to
disarm the system.)
Note that if quick arm is used, the installer code and authority level 5
code cannot disarm the system.
*30

MULTIFREQUENCY OR PULSE DIAL

[0]

1 = DTMF multifrequency service is being used
0 = pulse dial (decadic) phone service is used
If selecting multifrequency, make sure the subscriber has requested and is paying for
multifrequency service. Note that whether or not multifrequency dialing for call
placement is permitted, communication by the use of DTMF signaling (Ademco
Expanded High Speed, Ademco 4+2 Express, Ademco Contact ID) will still take place.
See field 1*33 for multifrequency w/pulse dial backup.
*31

PABX ACCESS CODE

| | |

Enter up to four 2-digit numbers 00-09; B-F (11-15).
If not required, enter nothing and proceed to next address; otherwise,
enter prefix needed to obtain an outside Telecom line.
*32

PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #
(partition-specific)

Enter 00-09; B-F (11-15) [15

|
15

|
15]

Enter a 3 or 4 digit (depending on report format) primary subscriber
account number 00-09; B-F (11-15).
Each number requires a 2-digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal
digits (B-F). If a 3 digit account number is to be used, only enter data in
the first 3 locations, leaving the last one unfilled, by entering a *.
*33

PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

Enter the primary central station phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9;
enter #11 for *, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2 sec. pause.
This is the phone number the control will use to transmit alarm and
status messages to the central station. Do not fill unused spaces. Note
that back-up reporting is automatic only if a secondary phone number is
entered (8 calls are made to the secondary phone number if no
acknowledgment is received after 8 attempts to the primary number).
– 74 –

*34

SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

Enter the secondary phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for *,
#12 for #, and #13 for a 2 sec. pause.
It is used if communication on the primary number is unsuccessful, or if
split/dual reporting is desired. Do not fill unused spaces. If this field is
programmed, a secondary subscriber account number (field *90) must
also be programmed (can be the same as the primary account number).
*35

DOWNLOAD PHONE NO.

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

Enter the downloading phone number, up to 17 digits, 0-9; enter #11 for
*, #12 for #, and #13 for a 2 sec. pause. Do not fill unused spaces.
This field is applicable only if downloading will be utilized.
*36

DOWNLOAD ID NO

Enter eight digits, 00-09; A-F (10-15).
Only applicable if downloading will be utilized. Make entries as 2-digit
numbers as follows:
00=0
02=2 04=4 06=6 08=8 10=A 12=C 14=E
01=1
03=3 05=5 07=7 09=9 11=B 13=D 15=F
*37

DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES
Dialler
Shutdwn

System

Restrict
Shutdwn Access†

1 = enable a function
0 = disable a function

Remote

Remote Remote

Upload

Bypass

Disarm

Programme

Arm

Download
Programme

† Restrict Download Access When Armed: Can
only arm unarmed partitions, upload the programme/
event log, command relays, and request status

Each of the various remote functions can either be enabled or disabled
through V-Link downloading software. Disabling a function means that
you will not be able to perform that function with respect to this system.
See field 1*53 to disable the download callback option.
*38

PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS (partition-specific)

[000]

| |

001-128
= zone number that cannot be bypassed by the user
000
= all zones can be bypassed
This selection does not affect fire zones, which the system prevents from
being bypassed.
*39

OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE
(partition-specific)

[1]

1 = open/close reporting for the installer is desired
0 = no open/close reporting for the installer
*40

OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH

[0]

1 = enable open/close reporting for the keyswitch
0 = keyswitch open/close reporting is not desired
*41

NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 2-8)

[0]

1 = end-of-line resistors are not used, in which case only normally
closed devices must be used.
0 = end-of-line resistors used
*42

SUPPRESS FIRE ALARM RELAY

[0]

1 = suppress fire alarm relay activation on 4204/Powerline Carrier
Device relays
0 = 4204/Powerline Carrier Device fire alarm relay activities on fire
alarms
– 75 –

*43

SUPPRESS WIRELESS SIREN ACTIVATION FOR
FIRE ALARMS

[0]

1 = suppress wireless siren activation on fire alarms (sounds for
burg. Alarms)
0 = wireless siren sounds for fire alarms (and burglary alarms)
*44

*45

[0] |
RING DETECTION COUNT
01-14 = ring counts of 1-14
00 = disable ring detection
15 = select answering machine defeat mode, which allows the system to
receive calls even when a telephone answering machine is
connected to the same phone line. In the answering machine mode,
the caller should let the phone ring once, then hang up, and call
again within 30 seconds. The system, upon hearing one ring
followed by nothing, will not answer the first call, but will ready
itself to pick up on the first ring of the next incoming call that is
received within 30 seconds (the downloader calling again).
Only applicable if using a 4285 telephone module and/or if remote
initiated downloading will be used.

PRIMARY FORMAT

[0]

0 = Low Speed
2 = Ademco Expanded High Speed
1 = Contact ID
3 = Ademco Express
Selects the reporting format for use on the primary telephone number.
*46

LOW SPEED FORMAT (PRIMARY)

[0]

0 = Ademco Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics
*47

SECONDARY FORMAT

[0]

0 = Low Speed
2 = Ademco Expanded High Speed
1 = Contact ID
3 = Ademco Express
Selects the reporting format for the secondary telephone number.
*48

LOW SPEED FORMAT (SECONDARY)

[0]

0 = Ademco Low Speed
1 = Sescoa/Radionics
*49

*50

[0]
CHECKSUM VERIFICATION
1 = either or both primary/secondary formats send a verification digit to
validate the message at the receiver without having to send two
message rounds. Selection is valid for 3+1, 4+1, and 4+2 reports.
0 = no checksum verification

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

[0]

0 = Radionics format with hexadecimal 0-9, B-F reporting
1 = SESCOA format with only numeric reporting (0-9).
Selection applies to both primary and secondary phone numbers.

DUAL REPORTING

*51

[0]
1 = all reports sent to both primary and secondary phone numbers. If
used with Split Reporting option 1 (1*34), alarms go to both primary
& secondary numbers, while all other reports go to secondary only. If
used with Split Reporting option 2, alarms go to both lines,
open/close and test messages go to secondary only, while all other
reports go to primary.
0 = no dual reporting

*52

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT PRIMARY

[0]

0 = standard reporting for the primary phone number
1 = expanded reporting for the primary phone number
Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.
*53

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT SECONDARY
0 = standard reporting for the secondary phone number
1 = expanded reporting for the secondary phone number
Note: Expanded overrides 4+2 format.

– 76 –

[0]

*54

MAXIMUM No. OF DIALLER ATTEMPTS

[8]

1-8 = number of dialler attempts
*55

TELEPHONE SYSTEM SELECTION

[00]

00=Latin America, Spain, Italy, Eastern Europe, China
01= Australia †
02= Belgium†
03= Denmark†
04= Finland †
05= France †
06= Netherlands †
07= Norway †
08= Sweden
† options 01-07 require special hardware configuration
*56

CONTACT ID DATA ON KEYPAD BUS FOR
ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA REPORTING
INSTEAD OF DIGICOM
1=
0=

*57

Yes
No

[0]
CONTACT ID DATA ON KEYPAD BUS FOR BACK-UP
ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA REPORTING IF
DIGICOM FAILS
1=
0=

*58

[0]

Yes
No

SELECTION OF CONTACT ID MESSAGE DATA ON KEYPAD
[0][0][0][0][0][0]
BUS FOR SUBSCRIBER ID#1
Alarms

Troubles

Bypasses

Open/
Close

System
Test
Conditions Reports

1=Yes
0=No
*59

SELECTION OF CONTACT ID MESSAGE DATA ON KEYPAD
[0][0][0][0][0][0]
BUS FOR SUBSCRIBER ID#2
Alarms

Troubles

Bypasses

Open/
Close

System
Test
Conditions Reports

1=Yes
0=No
*60

VERIFIED ALARM REPORT ENABLE

[0]

1= Yes, a special Contact ID report if 2 burglary alarms are detected
within 45 minutes (Swedish requirement)
0= No
*61

ROBOFON VERSION OF CONTACT ID
1=
0=

*79

[0]

Yes (Swedish requirement)
No

ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 1-8
1

1 = enable restore reporting for individual zone types
0 = no restore report for a zone type
*80

ZONE TYPE RESTORES FOR ZONE TYPES 9/10
1 = enable restore reporting for individual zone types
0 = no restore report is desired for a zone type

– 77 –

*83

|
|
|
FIRST TEST REPORT TIME
00-07 = day that the first test report shall be transmitted
00-23 hours/00-59 min. = time that the first test report shall be
transmitted
00 = immediately upon exiting programme mode
00 entry in the day location will cause the report to be sent at the next
occurrence of the time that is set.
Day 01=Monday. See fields *81 & *82 for assigning the Test Report code.

*84

INTERMITTENT SENSOR SUPPRESSION (partition-specific) [03]

01-15 = number of messages (alarms or troubles) sent for a specific
channel in an armed period (Intermittent Sensor Suppression)
00
= all alarm or trouble codes are reported.
*85

ENABLE DIALLER REPORTS
FOR PANICS & DURESS (partition-specific)

[0]
995 996 999 Duress

1 = enable panic/duress reporting for each location
0 = disable panic/duress reporting
*86

REPORT/LOG ZONE TYPE 23

*87

ENTRY WARNING (partition-specific)

[0]
1 = faults of zone type 23 zones communicated in Contact ID format and
logged in the event log.
0 = zone type 23 zone faults are not to be communicated or event logged
[1]

1 = slow beeps that continue for the entire entry delay period
0 = 3 short beeps
*88

*89

BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY (partition-specific)
1 = 16-second delay (no delay on 24-hour reports)
0 = no delay on burglary alarm communication

[0]

RESTORE REPORT TIMING

[0]

0 = instant restore report as zone restores
1 = reporting after siren timeout if zone restored
2 = restore report when system is subsequently disarmed
*90

|
|
|
|
SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #
(partition-specific)
[15
15
15
15]
00-09; B-F (11-15) = enter the 3 or 4 digit number (depending on report
format) for the secondary subscriber account, . Each number requires a 2digit entry so as to allow entry of hexadecimal digits (B-F). If a 3-digit
number is to be used, only enter data in the first 6 locations, leaving the
last two unfilled. Default=15 15 15 15. Erase the field by entering *90*.
NOTE: This field must be programmed if a secondary phone number is
used (field *34). This account number can be the same as the primary
account number.

1*00

CONTACT ID REPORTING IN ASCII THROUGH
PRINTER PORT
1=
0=

1*01

ACK not required
ACK required

ASCII CONTACT ID BAUD RATE
0=
1=
2=

– 78 –

Yes
No, event log usage

ASCII CONTACT ID REPORTING WITH OR WITHOUT ACK [0]
1=
0=

1*02

[0]

1200
2400
4800

1*05

BYPASS ENABLE FOR FIRE ZONES
1=
2=

1*06

SUPPRESS ALL KEYPAD DISPLAYS
WHEN SYSTEM IS ARMED
1=
0=

1*07

1*08

1*09

[0]

Yes, allow bypass of fire zones
No, fire zones cannot be bypassed
[0]

Yes
No

[1]
DISPLAY TRBL INSTEAD OF CHECK
1 = display the letters TRBL instead of CHECK when a zone or system
trouble occurs.
0 = display the letters CHECK when a zone or system trouble occurs.
[0]
SUPPRESS USE OF "ARMED" LED ON KEYPADS
(For countries where Red is only for alarm)
1= Yes
0= No

SUPPRESS KEYPAD ARMING STATUS INDICATIONS
WHEN SYSTEM IS ARMED
1=
0=

[0]

Yes
No

1*10

ALARM DISPLAY LOCK

1*11

COMMON AREA 1 PARTITION

[0]
1 = the keypad display for alarms will always display the first zone to go
into alarm. Subsequent alarm zones shall only be displayed if the
READY key is pressed.
0 = zones in alarm scroll continuously in numerical order
[0]

1-8 = common area 1 partition
0 = none
1*12

AFFECTS COMMON AREA 1 (partition-specific)

1*13

ARMS COMMON AREA 1 (partition-specific)

1*14

COMMON AREA 2 PARTITION

[0]
1 = this partition affects common area 1. This partition will cause
common area 1 to disarm when this partition disarms.
0 = this partition does not affect common area 1
[0]
1 = arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the
common area 1 partition automatically. Can only arm common area
1 if all other affecting partitions are armed. To enable this function,
field 1*12 (partition-specific) must also be enabled.
0 = does not apply
[0]

1-8 = common area 2 partition
0 = none
1*15

AFFECTS COMMON AREA 2 (partition-specific)

1*16

ARMS COMMON AREA 1 (partition-specific)

[0]
1 = this partition affects common area 2. This partition will cause
common area 2 to disarm when this partition disarms.
0 = this partition does not affect common area 2
[0]
1 = arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the
common area 2 partition automatically. Can only arm common area
2 if all other affecting partitions are armed. To enable this function,
field 1*12 (partition-specific) must also be enabled.
0 = does not apply

– 79 –

1*17

COMMON AREA 3 PARTITION

[0]

1-8 = common area 3 partition
0 = none
1*18

AFFECTS COMMON AREA 3 (partition-specific)

1*19

ARMS COMMON AREA 3 (partition-specific)

1*20

[0]
AUTO BYPASS FAULTED EXIT ROUTE ZONES
1 = enable automatic bypass of exit route zones remaining faulted at the
end of the exit delay. Must be selected only if field *07 is enabled.
0 = automatic bypass function is not desired

1*21

EXIT DELAY RESET

[0]
1 = this partition affects common area 3. This partition will cause
common area 3 to disarm when this partition disarms.
0 = this partition does not affect common area 3
[0]
1 = arming this partition causes the system to attempt to arm the
common area 3 partition automatically. Can only arm common area
3 if all other affecting partitions are armed. To enable this function,
field 1*12 (partition-specific) must also be enabled.
0 = does not apply

[0]

1 = reset Exit Delay to 60 seconds after door is closed
0 = Exit Delay not to be reset
1*22

CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE

| |
| |
= first pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five
minute period to cause an alarm
000, 000 = disable
001-128

1*23

CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO

| |
| |
= second pair of zones which must both be faulted within a
five minute period to cause an alarm
000, 000 = disable
001-128

1*24

CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE

| |
| |
= third pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five
minute period to cause an alarm
000, 000 = disable
001-128

1*25

CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR

1*26

|
|
|
|
PANIC BUTTON OR SPEED KEY
(partition-specific)
A
B
C
D
01-32 = the number of the multi-keystroke macro associated with
each of the lettered keys on the keypad
00
= each of the lettered keys (with exception of the D key, where
00 signifies "not used") which shall remain single press panic
keys.

1*27

FIELD 1*31 RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN SUPERVISION [0]
INTERVAL TO BE MULTIPLE OF 1 HOUR INSTEAD OF
2 HOURS

| |
| |
001-128 = fourth pair of zones which must both be faulted within a five
minute period to cause an alarm
000, 000 = disable

1 = 1 hour (must be 1 hour for CENELEC compliance)
0 = 2 hours
1*28

– 80 –

RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND

[0]
0 = audible beep and display annunciation upon RF transmitter low
battery condition is desired only in disarmed state.
1 = audible beep and display is desired in both armed and disarmed
states.

1*29

[0]
RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE
1 = a trouble message for RF transmitter low battery conditions sent to
the central station.
0 = no report for transmitter low battery is desired. Note that a trouble
message will be sent for a transmitter supervision failure
independent of this selection.

1*30

RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL

[06]
= the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour
increments (4-30 hours).
00
= disable receiver supervision
If selected, failure of a receiver to receive any RF signal within the time
entered will result in activation of the response type programmed for
zone 990 for the first receiver and zone 988 for the second receiver and
their related communication reports.
02-15 times 2 hours

1*31

RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL

[12] |
= the check-in monitoring interval in 2-hour
increments (4-30 hours)
00
= disables transmitter supervision
If selected, failure of an individual transmitter to send a supervision
signal within the time entered will result in a trouble response and
related communication report.
02-15 times 2 hours

1*32

RECEIVER TYPE

[0]

0 = none
1 = using 4281 series receivers
2 = using 5881 series receivers
1*33

MULTIFREQUENCY DIALLING W/ PULSE DIAL BACKUP [0]
1 = enable pulse dial back-up dialling if communicator is not successful
in dialling using multifrequency DTMF on first attempt.
0 = this option is not desired

1*34

COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION

[0]
0 = split reporting disabled
1 = alarm, alarm restore & cancel reports sent to primary Telecom
number, all others to secondary Telecom number
2 = open/close & test reports sent to secondary Telecom number and all
other reports to primary.
This field allows certain reports to be directed to either the primary or
secondary phone number. See *51 for split/dual reporting comments.

1*35

LOW BATTERY TEST INTERVAL

[0]

1 = 1.5 second test every 50 seconds (Norwegian requirement)
0 = 13 second test every 4 minutes (ANPI requirement)
1*36

CPU FAIL TRIGGER OUTPUT

[0]

1 = yes, Output trigger 2 on J7 to be CPU fail output, overriding any
other selection for Output 2 (CENELEC requirement)
0 = no, normal use for Output 2
1*37

TLM INPUT ON ZONE 9

[0]

1 = yes, telephone line fault monitor output to be fed into zone 9
0 = no, normal use for zone 9
1*38

USER RESET OF TAMPER ALARMS INSTEAD
OF INSTALLER ONLY RESET

[0]

1 = yes
0 = no (ANPI requirement)

– 81 –

1*39

USER BYPASS OF TAMPER FAULTS INSTEAD OF
INSTALLER ONLY BYPASS

[0]

1 = yes
0 = no (ANPI requirement)
1*40

MAX. NUMBER OF ZONES THAT CAN BYPASSED PER [00]
PARTITION (partition-specific)

01-15, 00 = no restriction (must not be 00 for ANPI compliance)
1*41

[0]
BYPASS/UNBYPASS ZONES WHEN ARMED
1 = able to bypass and unbypass non-fire zones while the system is
armed.
0 = zone bypass during the armed mode is not desired.

1*42

[0]
CALL WAITING DEFEAT
1 = the panel defeats call waiting on the first attempt (DO NOT enable
unless call waiting is being used.
0 = no call waiting defeat

1*43

[0]
PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
(partition-specific)
1 = backlighting for the keypad display remains on at all times.
0 = display remains unlit unless a key is pressed. The backlighting then
turns off again after a period of keypad inactivity. Note that when a
key is pressed, display backlighting turns on for all keypads in that
partition.

1*44

WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT

[0]

1 = enable tamper detection on wireless keypad (ANPI requirement)
0 = tamper detection is not desired.
If this feature is enabled, any attempt to tamper by means of many trial
entries at a wireless keypad will be blocked by the control panel. If more
than 40 key depressions are received without a valid sequence (arm,
disarm, etc.), the Control panel will disable the wireless keypad. The
inhibit is removed once a valid key sequence is received from a wired
keypad.
1*45

EXIT DELAY SOUNDING (partition-specific)
1 = beeps from the keypads during exit delay occur
0 = no keypad sound during exit delay

1*46

[0]
AUXILIARY OUTPUT MODE
0 = ground start output is required
1 = the auxiliary output is used to produce an open/close trigger
(produced only if all partitions are armed);
2 = the auxiliary output will be used to produce keypad-like sounding at
an auxiliary sounder (ex. PAL328N) This option applies only to the
partition set in field *15.
3 = AAV module is being used

[0]

NOTE: Only one of the above options can be active within a system.
1*47

CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN (partition-specific)
1 = chime annunciation using the external alarm sounder.
0 = not desired

1*48

WIRELESS 5827/5827BD KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT

[0]

1-8 = the partition in which 5827/5827BD RF keypad is used
0=
no RF keypad is used
1*49

SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND
1 = disable trouble sounding for transmitter check-in failure
0 = audible trouble sounding is desired

– 82 –

[0]

1*50

No. of SECONDS ADDED PER DAY

1*51

No. OF SECONDS REMOVED PER DAY

1*52

[0]
SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF (partition-specific)
1 = cancel reports to be sent when the system is disarmed after an
alarm, regardless of how much time has gone by.
0 = cancel reports are to be sent within alarm sounder timeout period
only.

1*53

[0]
00-30 = the number of added seconds per day to correct the real-time
clock
[0]
00-30 = the number of subtracted seconds per day to correct the real-time clock

DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK

[0]

1 = disable the callback requirement for downloading
0 = require a callback
1*54

INTERNAL CLOCK SYNC

[0]

1 = use internal crystal for real-time clock
0 = use AC sync for clock
1*55

INTERNATIONAL DATE FORMAT

[1]

1 = the event log date format shall be DDMMYY.
0 = the date format shall be MMDDYY.
1*56

[1]
AC 60Hz or 50Hz
1 = AC mains frequency is 50Hz; 0 = AC mains frequency is 60Hz.
This selection is used to synchronise the real-time clock and X-10 devices.

1*57

[0]
ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM
1 = have the system arm/disarm in accordance with the button's user's
global arming settings.
0 = the button is not to be used to global arm the system (however, home
partition arming will still occur).

1*58

[0]
ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM
1 = allow the RF Button user to force bypass all faulted zones. When
attempting to arm the system, the keypad will beep once after
pressing the button if any faulted zones are present. If this feature
is enabled, the user should then press the button again within 4
seconds to force bypass those zones and arm the system.
0 = RF button forced bypassing is not desired.

1*59

SUPRESS STATUS LED OUTPUT WHEN ZONE 7
KEYSWITCH ENABLED / RETAIN VOLTAGE
OUTPUTS

[0]

TRIGG.

1 =yes; 0 = no
1*60

[0]
ALARM VERIFICATION (audio)
1 = 2-Way Audio (AAV) is being used. Zone 5 is then not available as a
protection zone and is used only to provide feedback from the AAV
that its function has ended. Control will send Contact ID Event Code
606 to signal the central station equipment to ready itself for an
audio verification session.
0 = alarm verification is not being used.

1*61

DISPLAY “TAMP[e]R”

1*62

TAMPER DETECT IN TEST MODE

[0]
1 = yes, display “TAMPR” upon tamper condition
0 = no, display “CHECK” or “TRBL” depending on the state of field 1*07
[0]

1 = yes, terminate Test mode upon detection of tamper condition
0 = no, remain in Test mode upon tamper condition, display “FAULT”
1*66

[0]
SILENCE SOUNDER DURING AAV
1 = audio alarm verification (AAV) being used so that alarm sounders
and keypad sounders can be silenced when listening microphones
are on.
0 = AAV is not being used.

– 83 –

1*67

VIDEO ALARM VERIFICATION

1*70

EVENT LOG TYPES

[0]
1 = Video Alarm Verification (VAV) is being used. This selection enables
transmission of Contact ID Event Code 609 to signal the central
station equipment to ready itself for video image reception and
processing.
0 = otherwise
Alm Chck Byps O/C Systm

1 = enable each type of event for which event logging is desired.
0 = disable event logging for specific type
1*71

12/24 HOUR TIME STAMP FORMAT

[0]

1 = 24 hour format.
0 = standard 12 hour;
1*72

EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE

[0]

1 = have the printer print events as they occur
0 = enable the printer such that the logs are only printed upon request.
1*73

PRINTER BAUD RATE

[0]

1 = printer is set for 300 baud.
0 = printer is set for 1200 baud (preferred).
1*74

[000] | |
RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES
000-127 = enter the relay timeout minutes, in multiples of 2 minutes,
desired for #80 Menu Mode time driven event relay command
numbers "04/09" and #93 Menu Mode Relay Programming
output command "56" (refer to #93 and #80 Menu Mode
sections in this manual).

1*75

[000] | |
RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS
000-127 = enter the relay timeout seconds desired for #80 Menu Mode
time driven event relay command numbers "05/10" and #93
Menu Mode Relay Programming command "57" (refer to #93
and #80 Menu Mode sections in this manual.

1*76

ACCESS CONTROL RELAY (partition-specific)
01-96 = enter the relay number for the relay that will be used for
access control.
= not used in this partition.
00

[00] |

The system can be programmed to provide user activated access control.
If enabled, the assigned relay will pulse for 2 seconds when the user
enters his code and presses "0".
1*77

LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL

[0]

1 = log first maintenance signal from each smoke detector
2 = no logging
2*00

NUMBER OF PARTITIONS

[1]

1-8 = the number of partitions to be used in the system.
SUMMER TIME NOTE:
Summer Time starts and
ends at 2AM on the
designated month and
weekend.

2*01

SUMMER TIME
START/END MONTH

[04,10] |

00-12 = the months in which Summer time starts and ends.
00, 00 = Summer time does not apply to the user's region.
Standard setting for North America is 04,10.
2*02

SUMMER TIME
START/END WEEKEND
1 = first
3 = third
5 = last
7 = third from last
2 = second 4 = fourth
6 = next to last
Standard setting for North America is 1,5.
Enter the start and end weekends for Summer time.

– 84 –

[1,5]

2*05

AUTO-ARM DELAY (partition-specific)
01-14
00
15

[15] |
= (times 4 minutes) the time between the end of the arming
window and the start of auto arm warning time
= no delay is desired.
= auto arming is not desired.

2*06

AUTO-ARM WARNING PERIOD (partition-specific)

2*07

AUTO-DISARM DELAY (partition-specific)

[15] |
01-15 = the time in one minute increments during which the user is
warned by a keypad sounding and display to exit the premises
prior to auto arming of the system.

01-14
00
15
2*08

[15]

= (times 4 minutes) the time between the end of the disarming
window and the start of auto disarming of the system.
= no delay is desired.
= auto disarming is not desired.

ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO-ARM (partition-specific)

[0]

1 = the system should automatically bypass any faulted zones when it
attempts to auto arm.
0 = otherwise
2*09

OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION (partition-specific)

[0]

1 = open/close reports sent only if the openings/closings occur outside
the arm and disarm windows. Open reports will also be suppressed
during the closing window in order to prevent false alarms if the
user arms the system, then reenters the premises to retrieve a
forgotten item. Note that openings/closings are still recorded in the
event log.
0 = exception reporting is not desired.
Note: This field must be set to 1 if "No Opening" and "No Closing" reports
are to be sent (2*13, 2*14).
2*10

ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM/DISARM
WINDOWS (partition-specific)

[0]

1 = disarming of the system should be allowed only during the
arming/disarming windows or if the system is in alarm (if 2*11 is set
to "1"). Note that this applies only to operator level users. Installer,
Master and manager level users can disarm the system at any time.
0 = disarming can occur at any time.
2*11

ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS
[1]
1 = allow the system to be disarmed outside the programmed disarm
(opening) window if an alarm has occurred.
0 = allow disarming only during the disarm window, regardless of
system status.
Used only if field 2*10 (partition-specific field) is set to 1. If field 2*10 is
set to 0 for a partition, this field (2*11) has no effect for that partition.

2*18

ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION

[0]

(partition-specific)
1 = this partition is to be accessed from another partition's keypad using
the GOTO command.
0 = otherwise

– 85 –

2*19

USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS

[1]

1 = partition descriptors will be programmed. If enabled, the normal
keypad display will include a partition number and four-character
descriptor).
0 = cause the keypads to display a non-partitioned system type of
display (no partition number will appear).
2*20

ENABLE J7 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION

[1]

(partition-specific)
1 = enable for displayed partition
0 = disable for displayed partition
2*21

SUPERVISION PULSES FOR
TRIGGER OUTPUTS

[000]

| |

FBS
1 = enable pulses for each type of trigger (burglary, fire, silent panic).
This option causes the control to send periodic short pulses on the J7
radio triggers These pulses are used by the transmitter to determine
that its connection to the control is still intact.
0 = not desired
Used for supervised connection to applicable Long Range Radio
transmitters.
2*22

DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS

[1]

(partition-specific)
1 = allow fire alarms that occur on other partitions to be displayed at
this partition's keypads.
0 = otherwise
2*23

DISPLAY BURGLARY & PANIC ALARMS OF OTHER
PARTITIONS (partition-specific)

[1]

1 = allow burglary and panic alarms that occur on other partitions to be
displayed at this partition's keypads.
0 = otherwise
2*24

DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS

[1]

(partition-specific)
1 = allow troubles that occur on other partitions to be displayed at this
partition's keypads.
0 = otherwise

– 86 –

SECTION 21

#93 Menu Mode Programming
This section provides the following information:
• #93 Menu Mode main menu options
• Zone Programming
• Serial Number Programming
• Report Code Programming
• Alpha Programming
• Device Programming
• Relay Programming
• Relay Voice Descriptors
• Custom Index Programming (Telephone Module substitute words)
#93 Main Menu Options
The following fields should be programmed before beginning: 2*00: Number of
Partitions; 1*32: RF receiver type.
After programming all system related programming fields in the usual way, press #93 while
still in programming mode to display the first choice of the menu driven programming
options, which are as follows:
ZONE PROG?
0=No
1=Yes

For programming the following:
• Zone Number
• Zone Response Type
• Partition Number for Zone
• Dialler report code for zone
• Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)

SEQUENTIAL LEARN?

For programming the following:
• Input Device Type for zone (whether RF, polling loop, etc.)
• Enrolling serial numbers of 5800 series transmitters & serial
polling loop devices into the system (all other zone characteristics
must be pre-programmed).

0=no

1=yes

REPORT CODE PROG?

0=no

1=yes

ALPHA PROG?
0=no
1=yes

For programming the following:
• Alarm report codes for zones
• Restore & supervisory codes
• All other system report codes
For entering alpha descriptors for the following:
• Zone Descriptors
• Installer's Message
• Custom Words
• Partition Descriptors
• Relay Descriptors

– 87 –

DEVICE PROG?
0=no
1=yes

For defining the following device characteristics for
addressable devices, including keypads, RF receivers
(4281/5881/5882EU), 4204 output relay modules, and 4285
VIP Module and VGM
• Device Address
• Device Type
• Keypad Options (incl. partition assignment)
• RF House ID

RELAY PROG?
0=no
1=yes

For defining output relay functions.

RLY VOICE DESCR?

For entering voice descriptors for relays/Power Line Carrier
devices to be used with the 4285 VIP Module

0=no

1=yes

CUSTOM INDEX ?
0=no
1=yes

For creating custom word substitutes for Telephone Module
annunciation.

CLEAR RF SERIAL#?

For deleting all RF serial numbers presently enrolled in the
system.

0=no

1=yes

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES) in response to the displayed menu selection. Pressing 0 will display
the next choice in sequence.
The following is a list of commands used while in the menu mode.

#93 Menu Mode Key Commands
#93
[✴]
[#]
0
1
00

– 88 –

Enters Menu mode
Serves as ENTER key. Press to have keypad accept entry.
Backs up to previous screen.
Press to answer NO
Press to answer YES
Escapes from menu mode, back into data field programming
mode, if entered at the first prompt of each main menu option.

Zone Programming (this section has been revised from previous manuals)
Enter Programming mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0. The following fields should be
programmed before beginning:
2*00: Number of Partitions; 1*32: RF Receiver Type.
Also, before programming wireless zones, the RF receiver must be enabled in Device
Programming Mode (procedure described later in Device Programming section).
Then press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?".
Press 1 to enter ZONE PROGRAMMING mode. The following
screens will appear. Press ✴ to display the next screen. Press # to

ZONE PROG?
1=Yes 0=No

display a previous screen.
If the system has been set up to use 5800 series RF, and a programme tool has not
been programmed, the following “PROGRAM TOOL” prompt will be displayed. If the
system has not been set up to use 5800 series RF or a programme tool has already
been programmed, the system will advance to the “ENTER ZN NO.” prompt.
PROGRAM TOOL?
0 = NO, 1 = YES 0

If a programme tool is being used, enter "1." If not using a tool, enter
"0". When a “0” is entered, the system will advance to the “ENTER
ZN NO.” prompt.

010 INPUT S/N: L
Axxx-xxxx

If "1" is entered, the system will prompt for the unit’s serial number.
Enter the programme tool’s serial number using one of the following
methods:
a) Enter the 7-digit serial number for the transmitter
or
b) Press any button on the transmitter. The keypad should beep
three times and display the serial number of the tool.
In this example, the serial number is A123-4567. Once enrolled, the
upper left-hand button of the programme tool can be pressed to ready
the system for enrolling a device into the system.
The serial number for the programme tool will only remain in
the system until the programming mode is exited. (Entering
✟97 will not delete the tool.)
Press [*] to continue or press the [#] key to back the system up to the
“PROGRAM TOOL? “ prompt.

010 PROG AS BR: 3
A123-4567

ENTER ZN NO.
000 = QUIT

020

Zone Number Entered



Enter the zone number to be programmed (protection zones 001-128,
relay zones 601-696,† ECP device supervisory zones 800-831, system
supervision zones 988, 990,992 [duress], 997 or keypad panic zones
995, 996, 999). Press ✴ to accept entry.
† Programme relay zone numbers only if either of the following is true:
A: Supervision of a relay is desired (enter zone response type 5 or 19).
B: You are using only the relay output(s) of a 4208UXM or 4101
polling loop relay module without using a protection zone on the
module. This allows enrollment of the serial number of the relay
module, which is required for the control to identify and communicate
with the respective relay output. (If using a protection zone on these
modules, you need only enter the protection zone number for enrolling
the serial number. See Relay Programming V-PLEX ZONE # prompt.)

020 ZT P RC In:L
00 1 00 RF:N

A summary screen for that zone will appear. ZT=Zone Type,
P=Partition, RC=Report Code, In:=the input type of device, and L=the
device's loop number to which the sensor is connected (some devices
can support more than one zone by means of individual loops (ex.
5801, 5804, 5804EU, 5816, 5816EU, 5817, etc.)
– 89 –

020 Zone Response
Zone Disabled 00

Each zone in a system must be assigned a zone type, which defines
the way in which the system responds to faults in that zone. Refer to
ZONE TYPE DEFINITIONS section for detailed definitions of each
zone type. Enter the zone response type for this zone. The screen
will automatically display the zone type for the number entered.
Press ✴ to accept entry.

†

Zone Types are as follows:
00 Assign for unused zones
01 Entry/Exit #1, burglary
02 Entry/exit #2,
03 Perimeter, burglary
04 Interior, follower, burglary
05 Trouble by day/Alarm by night, burglary
06 24 hour silent alarm
07 24 hour audible alarm
08 24 hour auxiliary
09 Fire
10 Interior, delay, burglary
19 24 hour Trouble
20 Arm-stay†
21 Arm-away†
22 Disarm†
23 No alarm response (ex. relay action)
27 Access Point
28 MLB Supervision (if VGM installed)

For
5800/5800EU
series RF devices or
serial number multiplex
devices only.

010 ACCESS POINT
(00-31)
01

If response type 27 was selected, this prompt will be displayed.
Enter the access point to be controlled by the input type (00-31).

010 ENTRY OR EXIT
0

020 Partition

Select whether the access point is an entry or exit point.
0 = entry
1 = exit
Enter the partition number (1-8) in which this zone is located.

020 Report Code

Enter the report code for this zone.

020 Input Type
RF Trans. RF:

Enter the input device type as follows: 0 = not used; 1=wired;
3=supervised RF transmitter (RF type); 4=unsupervised RF
transmitter (UR type); 5=RF button type transmitter (BR type);
6=serial number polling loop device (SL type); 7=DIP switch type
polling loop device; 8=right loop of DIP switch type device;
9=keypad input (code + #73, code + #74); 10=PassPoint ACS
input.

Note that input types 4 & 5
are valid for certain
5800/5800EU series
transmitters only (ex. 5801,
5802, 5802CP, 5804EU&
5804). When using 5700
series transmitters, always
set the input type to 3 (RF).
The zone number of the
transmitter identifies
whether or not supervision is
required (ex. 5700 wireless
zone number 63 is not
supervised).

Right loops refer to the use of the right loop on a 4190WH zone
expander module and/or 4278 series PIR, which allow hard-wired
devices to be monitored by the polling loop.
If wired, DIP switch polling loop, or 5700 series devices are being
programmed, after completing this entry, the summary display
appears. Press ✴ to continue. The display will now return to
the "Enter Zone Number" prompt for programming the next zone
into the system. If all zones are programmed, enter 00 and press
(✴) to exit back to normal programming mode.
If either 5800 series RF or polling loop serial number devices are
being programmed, continue to the next prompt.

– 90 –

010 SMART CONTACT
1 = YES 0 = NO

If input type 6 was selected, this prompt will be displayed. Enter 1
for devices that monitor maintenance signals (ex. 5192SD,
5192SDT, 5808). Otherwise, enter 0.

10 V-PLEX RELAY?
1 = YES
0 = NO

If input type 6 was selected, this prompt will be displayed. Enter 1
if using 4208UXM or 4101SN relay module for this zone.
Otherwise, enter 0.

010 CONS ECP ADDR

If input type 09 was selected, this prompt will be displayed. Enter
the ecp address of the keypad that is being used for entry/exit for
this access point (01-31).

(01-31)

If input type 10 was selected, this prompt will be displayed. Enter
the Passpoint ACS zone ID that this Vista zone maps to (00-31).

010 ACS ZONE NO
(00-31)
01

Press [*] to continue.
010 LOOP #
1

010 LEARN S/N?
1 = YES, 0 = NO

010 INPUT S/N
Axxx-xxxx

010 INPUT S/N
A022-4064

The cursor should now be flashing on the loop number. The default
is "1." To accept this, press [*]. If a different loop number is being
used on this device, enter the loop number (1-4) and press [*] to
continue.
(Refer to the transmitter’s instructions for loop
numbers.) The loop number must be entered here, whether
using Zone Programming or Sequential Mode to enroll
serial numbers. If you want to delete the serial number, enter
"0" and press [*]. The system will then prompt, "DELETE S/N?"
Press the "1" (YES) key to complete the delete sequence. This
process deletes the serial number only, not the loop number. The
assumption is that the proper loop number was programmed, but
the wrong serial number was enrolled.
If the device’s serial number has not been previously “enrolled,” you
may enter the enrollment mode now by either entering "1" (YES) or
by pressing the upper left-hand button of the programme tool. If
using the programme tool, move to the physical location of
the device to be enrolled before pressing the button. A
single short beep will verify that the button has been pressed. The
system will respond to the first serial number transmitted after the
"1" key on the keypad or the button of the programme tool is
pressed. Enter "0" (NO) to enroll later. (If "0" is entered, the
system will advance to the summary screen prompt.)
This prompt is displayed if "1" (YES) is entered in response to the
"Learn S/N?" prompt. The serial number may be enrolled by one of
two methods:
a) Enter the 7-digit serial number printed on the device using an
alpha keypad, OR
b) Activate the device (e.g., press a button, open or close a door,
etc.).
The system will enroll the serial number of the first device heard.

If the serial and loop number combination is already present in the system, the keypad will sound a
single long beep and display the word "DUPLICATE" along with the serial number, and the number
of the zone containing the serial/loop number combination.

– 91 –

The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so
that the operation of the actual programmed input can be
confirmed. Activate the loop input or button that corresponds to
We recommend that you confirm the
this zone.
programming of every device before proceeding to the
next zone.
010 CONFIRM RF:1
A022-4064
1

When the system sees activity on the appropriate input, it will beep
three times and display the confirmation message.

The summary screen for the zone will appear. Note that an "s"
indicates that a serial number has, in fact, been enrolled. Press [*]
to accept the zone information.
If you want to delete the serial number, press [#]. This will bring
you back to the “INPUT TYPE” prompt. Press [*] to change input
type, loop number, and serial number.

When you have finished programming all zones, test each using the system's TEST mode. Do not
use the Transmitter ID Sniffer mode for this, as it will only check for transmission of one zone on a
particular transmitter, NOT the zones assigned to each additional loop, and will not verify polling
loop type zones.

– 92 –

Sequential Mode Programming (this section has been revised from previous manuals)
Usually, serial numbers are enrolled during zone programming. If not, use #93 menu mode
to enroll serial numbers (for example, if all other programming was done via downloading).
Use this mode only after all other zone information has been programmed, including transmitter loop
numbers.
1. Enter data field programming mode: installer code + 8 0 0 0.
2. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.
3. Press 0 (NO) repeatedly until the "SEQUENTIAL LEARN?" prompt appears.
To enroll or delete a device's serial number, enter 1 (yes). Enter 0
to move to skip to the next main menu option.

SEQUENTIAL LEARN?
0=no 1=yes

If the system has been set up to use 5800 series RF, and a programme tool has not been
programmed, the following “PROGRAM TOOL” prompt will be displayed. If the system has not been
set up to use 5800 series RF or a programme tool has already been programmed, the system will
advance to the “TECHNOLOGY TYPE” prompt.
PROGRAM TOOL?
0 = NO, 1 = YES 0

If a programme tool is being used, enter "1." If not using a tool,
enter "0". When a “0” is entered, the system will advance to the
“TECHNOLOGY TYPE” prompt.

010 INPUT S/N: L
Axxx-xxxx

010 PROG AS BR: 3
A123-4567
3

In this example, the serial number is A123-4567. Once enrolled,
the upper left-hand button of the programme tool can be pressed to
ready the system for enrolling a device into the system.
The serial number for the programme tool will only remain
in the system until the programming mode is exited.
(Entering *97 will not delete the tool.)
Press [*] to continue or press the [#] key to back the system up to
the “PROGRAM TOOL ?” prompt.

TECHNOLOGY TYPE
WIRELESS
0
Default 

Enter the type of device(s) to be enrolled as follows:
0 = Wireless (Default)
1 = Polling Loop
2 = Both
Press ✴ to continue.

ENTER ZN NO.
(000 = QUIT)

Enter the first zone number to be enrolled (e.g., zone 010).
Press ✴
to continue.

Zone Number Entered

010


The system will, starting with this zone number, search for the
first device which had all of the following attributes preprogrammed in Zone Programming:
a) An input type of RF, UR, BR, or SL (if serial polling
loop devices enabled) programmed
b) A loop number programmed
c) No serial number programmed

– 93 –

If the first zone number entered does not have one or more of the above attributes, the system
will search its database for the first zone that does and will display it on the next screen.
This prompt is displayed when the system has found the next
zone which needs to be enrolled. The system will respond to the
first serial number transmitted. A serial number may be
enrolled by one of two methods:
a) Enter the 7-digit serial number printed on the device.
or
b) Activate the device (e.g., press a button, open or close a door,
etc.).

010 INPUT S/N
Axxx xxxx

If you do not wish to enroll the zone displayed, press the # key on the keypad or the upper righthand button on the programme tool (a long beep will be heard to verify). The following prompt
will appear:
To enroll now, enter "1" (YES). If "0" (NO) is entered, the
following prompt will appear.

010 LEARN S/N?
0 = NO, 1 = YES 0
ENTER ZN NUM.
(000 = QUIT)

010

010 INPUT S/N
A 022-4064

Enter the next zone number to be enrolled (e.g., zone 010). The
system will search for that zone and will display the “ENTER
ZONE NO.” prompt. If you wish to exit the enrollment mode
completely, enter 000 and press [*].
The system will enroll the first serial number heard, display the
serial numbers, and cause the keypad to beep twice.
If the serial and loop number combination is already present in
the system, the keypad will sound a single long beep and display
the word "DUPLICATE" along with the serial number, and the
number of the zone containing the serial/loop number
combination.
The system will then enter an optional confirmation mode so
that the operation of the actual programmed input can be
confirmed. Activate the loop input or button that corresponds to
this zone.
We recommend that you confirm the
programming of every device before proceeding to the
next zone.

010 CONFIRMED SL:1
A022-4064

When the system sees activity on the appropriate input, it will
beep three times and display the confirmation message. Press
[*] or the upper left-hand button of the programme tool when
you are ready to enroll the next serial number device.
The system will search for the next zone that does not have a
serial number associated with it. If one is found, the system
will return to the “INPUT S/N” prompt for the remaining
zones.
After all zones have been displayed, whether enrolled or not, the
"ENTER ZN NO." prompt will appear. Enter "000" to exit the
Sequential mode and return to data field programming mode.

– 94 –

At any time during this step, you may press the [*] key on the keypad or the upper left-hand
button of the programme tool if you are satisfied with the serial and loop number
combination that has been enrolled, regardless of whether or not the enrolled input has
been "confirmed." This will ready the system to enroll the next serial number device.
If the incorrect device has been enrolled, press the [#] key on the keypad or the upper righthand button of the programme tool to delete the serial number and return to the "LEARN
S/N" prompt. A single long beep will be heard from the keypad to verify pressing of the
upper right-hand button. Then, press "1" (Yes) or press the upper left-hand button of the
programme tool (a single short beep will verify the system is ready for enrolling) and reactivate the proper device or device loop input.
When you have finished programming all zones, test each using the system's TEST mode.
Do not use the Transmitter ID Sniffer mode for this, as it will only check for transmission of
one zone on a particular transmitter, NOT the zones assigned to each additional loop, and
will NOT verify polling loop type.

Report Code Programming
All report codes are entered using #93 menu mode programming, either through Report
Code Programming, or through the Zone Programming mode while entering other zone
information. In the Vista-120, reports are divided into six categories. These categories
represent the main menu options found in the Report Code Programming mode. Reports and
the categories in which they are found are as follows:
ALARM CODES
Zone Alarm Reports

SYSTEM GROUP #2
Arm Stay Early Open
Time Set, Log Reset
Log 50%, 90% Full
Event Log Overflow
Autobypass by Zone
Autobypass by User
Recent Close

RESTR, SUPV. CODES
(for groups of 16 zones)
Alarm Restore
Trouble
Trouble Restore
Bypass
Bypass Restore

SYSTEM GROUP #1
Closing (arm away)
Opening (disarm)
System Low Battery
Low Battery Restore
AC Mains Loss
AC Mains Restore
Periodic Burg. Test
Power
Cancel
Programme Tamper
Callback Request

SYSTEM GROUP #3
Early Close
Late Open
Late Close
Failed to Open
Failed to Close
Auto-Arm Failed
Schedule Change

The programming sequence that follows assumes that you will be entering all reports for the
system at one time. In actuality, you may skip from one main menu option to another by
pressing 0 (N) to each main menu option. Main menu options are highlighted in bold text.
To enter report codes, do the following:
Enter Programme mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0 0. Then press #93. Enter (N) to the main
menu options until the Report Code Programming option is displayed.
REPORT CODE PROG
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

Press 1 (Y) to enter to Report Code Programming
mode.

– 95 –

Zone Alarm Reports
ALARM, ID DIGIT?
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

Press 1 (Y) to enter alarm report codes for zones.
Press 0 (N) to skip to the next main menu option.

ENTER ZONE NO.
000 = QUIT
001

Enter the zone number for which you are entering
the report code. Press ✴ to continue.

001 REPORT CODE
1st 00 2nd 00
00

Enter the first digit of the alarm report code
(double-digit entry) and press ✴. Enter the 2nd
digit of the alarm report code. Press ✴.

ENTER ZONE NO.
000 = QUIT
001

Enter the zone number for which you are entering
the report code. When all zone alarm codes have
been programmed, enter 000 to Quit. Press ✴.

QUIT REPORT MENU
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

If you have completely finished entering report
codes, press 1 (Y) to quit Report Code
Programming mode. If you wish to enter other
system report codes, enter 0(N) and press ✴.

Restore/Supervisory Codes

– 96 –

RESTR, SUPV. CODE
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

Press 1 (Y) to enter restore and supervisory codes for zones.

ENTER ZN FOR GRP
000 = QUIT
001

Enter one zone for each group of 16 zones (001-016, 017-032,
etc.)

ALARM RESTORE
GRP 001-016 00

Enter the first digit of the alarm restore report code for this
group of zones (double-digit entry). The second digit will be
the ID (second) digit of the alarm report code for each zone (if
programmed). Press ✴ to continue.

TROUBLE
GRP 001-016

Enter the first digit of the trouble report code for this group
of zones (double-digit entry). The second digit will be the ID
(second) digit of the alarm report code for each zone (if
programmed). Press ✴ to continue.

TROUBLE RESTORE
GRP 001-016 00

Enter the first digit of the trouble restore code (single-digit
entry) and press ✴. The second digit will be the ID (second)
digit of the alarm report code for each zone (if programmed).
Press ✴ to continue.

BYPASS
GRP 001-016

Enter the first digit of the bypass report code (double-digit
entry) and press ✴. The second digit will be the ID (second)
digit of the alarm report code for each zone (if programmed).
Press ✴ to continue.

BYPASS RESTORE
GRP 001-016 00

Enter the first digit of the bypass restore report code (doubledigit entry) and press ✴. The second digit will be the ID
(second) digit of the alarm report code for each zone (if
programmed). Press ✴ to continue.

ENTER ZN FOR GRP
000 = QUIT
017

Enter one zone for each group of 16 zones. When finished
entering restore and supervisory codes for all zone groups,
enter 000 and press ✴ to continue.

QUIT REPORT MENU
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1
(Y) to quit Report Code Programming mode. If you wish to
enter other system report codes, enter 0 (N) and press ✴to
continue.

System Group 1 Codes
SYSTEM GROUP #1?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #1 codes, press 1 (Y).

CLOSE
1st 00

Enter the first digit of the Closing (Arm-Away) report. Press
✴. Enter the second digit of the report. If the user number
is desired as the second digit, enter 01 (not necessary for
Contact ID or High Speed formats). Press ✴to continue.

2nd 00

Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other codes in
System Group #1 are:
• Opening (Disarm)
• Periodic Test
• System Low Battery
• Power
• Low Battery Restore
• Cancel
• AC Mains Loss
• Programme Tamper
• AC Mains Restore
• Callback Request
Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:
QUIT REPORT MENU
1 = YES 0 = NO 0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1 (Y)
to quit Report Code Programming mode. If you wish to enter
other system report codes, enter 0 (N) and press ✴.

System Group 2 Codes
SYSTEM GROUP #2 ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #2 codes, press 1 (Y).

STAY
1st 00

Enter the first digit of the Arm-Stay report. Press ✴. Enter the
second digit of the report. If the user number is desired as the
second digit, enter 01 (not necessary for Contact ID or High Speed
formats). Press ✴ to continue.

2nd 00

Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other codes in
System Group #2 are:
• Time Set, Log Reset
• Autobypass by Zone
• Log 50%, 90% Full
• Autobypass by User
• Event Log Overflow
• Recent Close
Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:
QUIT REPORT MENU
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1 (Y)
to quit Report Code Programming mode. If you wish to enter
other system report codes, enter 0 (N) and press ✴ continue.

System Group 3 Codes
SYSTEM GROUP #3 ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0

To enter System Group #3 codes, press 1 (Y).

EARLY OPEN
1st 00 2nd 00

Enter the first digit of the Early Opening report code. Press ✴.
Enter the second digit of the report Code. If the user number is
desired as the second digit, enter 01 (not necessary for Contact ID
or High Speed formats). Press ✴ to continue.
Enter the rest of the codes in the same manner. Other codes in
System Group #2 are:
• Early Close
• Failed to Close
• Late Open
• Auto-Arm Failed
• Late Close
• Schedule Change
• Failed to Open
Once you have entered these report codes, the system will prompt:

QUIT REPORT MENU
1 = YES 0 = NO
0

If you have completely finished entering report codes, press 1(Y)
to quit Report Code Programming mode. If you wish to enter
other system report codes, enter 0(N) and press ✴ to continue.
– 97 –

Programming Alpha Descriptors
General Information
• You can programme a user friendly English language description/location keypad display
for all protection zones, relays, keypad panics, polling loop short, and RF receiver
supervision troubles.
• Each description can be composed of a combination of words (up to a maximum of 3) that
are selected from a vocabulary of 244 words stored in memory, and any word can have an
"s" or " 's " added to it.
• In addition, up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to those already in memory.
Thus, when an alarm or trouble occurs in a zone, an appropriate description for the
location of that zone will be displayed at the keypad.
• A custom installer's message can be programmed for each partition which will be
displayed when the system is "Ready" (ex. THE PETERSON'S).
1. To programme alpha descriptors, enter Programming mode, then press #93 to display
"ZONE PROG?"
2. Press 0 (NO) twice to display "ALPHA PROG?".
3. Press 1 to enter ALPHA PROGRAMMING mode.
There are 6 sub-menu selections that will be displayed one at a time.
Press 1 to select the mode desired.
Press 0 to display the next mode available. The alpha menu selections are:
ZONE DESCRIP.?

for entering zone descriptors.

DEFAULT SCREEN?

for creating custom message; displayed when system ready.

CUSTOM WORD?

for creating custom words for use in descriptors.

PART DESCRIP?

for creating 4-character partition names.

EXIT EDIT MODE?

Press 1 to exit back to #93 Menu Mode.

4. Refer to the sections that follow for adding alpha descriptors.
Zone Descriptors
1. Select ZONE DESCRIPTOR mode.
The keypad keys perform the following functions:
[3] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in ascending alphabetical order.
[1] Scrolls both alphabet and actual words in descending alphabetical order.
[2] Adds or removes an "s" or " 's " to a vocabulary word.
[6] Switches between alphabet and actual word list; used to accept entries.
[8] Saves the zone description in the system's memory.
[#] # plus zone number displays the description for that zone.
2. Enter the zone number to which you want to assign a descriptor.
Ex.. Key *001 to begin entering the description for zone 1, (key *002 for zone 2, *003 for
zone 3 etc.). The following will be displayed: * ZN 001 A
Note that the first letter of the alphabet appears after the zone number, and that the
zone number is automatically included with the description.
3. Enter the descriptor for that zone.
Use one of two methods as follows:
(assume, for example that the desired description for zone 1 is BACK DOOR)
a) Press [#] followed by the 3 digit number of the first word from the fixed dictionary
shown later in this section (e.g., [0][1][3] for BACK).
Press [6] in order to accept the word and proceed, or press [8] to store the complete
descriptor and exit, or...

– 98 –

b) Select the first letter of the desired description (note that "A" is already displayed).
Use the [3] key to advance through the alphabet and the [1] key to go backward.
Press the [3] key repeatedly until "B" appears (press [1] to go backwards if you
happen to pass it), then press key [6] to display the first available word beginning
with B.
Press the [3] key repeatedly to advance through the available words until the word
BACK is displayed.
To add an "s" or " 's," if you need to, press the [2] key. The first depression adds
an "s," the second depression adds an " 's, " the third depression displays no
character (to erase the character), the fourth depression adds an "s," etc.
4. Accept the word.
To accept the word, press the [6] key, which switches back to alphabet list for the next
word, or press [8] to store the complete descriptor and exit.
5. Select the next word.
For selection of the next word (DOOR), repeat step 3a (word #057) or 3b, but selecting
the word "DOOR".
To accept the word, press the [6] key, which again switches back to alphabet list.
6. Store the descriptor.
When all desired words have been entered, press key [8] to store the description in
memory.
7. To review the zone descriptors, key [#] plus zone number (e.g., #01).
To edit zone descriptors, key [*] plus zone number (e.g., *01)
8. Exit zone description mode: enter 00.
Custom Words
Up to 20 installer-defined words can be added to the built-in vocabulary. Each of the 20
"words" can actually consist of several words, but bear in mind that a maximum of 10
characters can be used for each word string.
1. Select CUSTOM WORD mode. The keys perform the following functions:
[3] Advances through alphabet in ascending order.
[1] Advances through alphabet in descending order.
[6] Selects desired letter; moves the cursor 1 space right.
[4] Moves the cursor one space to the left.
[7] Inserts a space at the cursor location, erasing any character at that location.
[8] Saves the new word in the system's memory.
[*] Returns to description entry mode.
2. Enter the custom word number 01-20 you want to create.
For example, if you are creating the first word (or word string), enter 01; when creating the
second word, enter 02, and so on. A cursor now appears at the beginning of the second line.
3. Type the word using one of two methods as follows:
a) Press the [#] key, followed by the two digit entry for the first letter you would like to
display (e.g., [6][5] for "A"),
When the desired character appears, press the [6] key to select it. The cursor will
then move to the right, in position for the next character. Press [#] plus the two digit
entry for the next letter of the word.
OR...
b) Use the [3] key to advance through the list of symbols, numbers, and letters. Use the
[1] key to move back through the list.
When you have reached the desired character, press the [6] key to select it. The
cursor will then move to the right, in position for the next character.
5. Repeat step 3 to create the desired custom word (or words).
Use the [4] key to move the cursor to the left if necessary,
Use the [7] key to enter a blank (or to erase an existing character).
Each word or word string cannot exceed 10 characters.
– 99 –

6. Save the word by pressing the [8] key.
This will return you to the CUSTOM WORD? display. The custom word (or string of
words) will be automatically added to the built-in vocabulary at the end of the group of
words beginning with the same letter.
Custom words are retrieved as word numbers 250 to 269 for words 1 to 20 respectively,
when using method 3a to enter alpha descriptors.
When using method 3b, each word will be found at the end of the group of words that
begin with the same letter as it does.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to create up to 19 additional custom words (or word strings).
8. Exit Custom Word Mode by entering 00 at the custom word prompt.
Partition Descriptors
1. Select "Part DESCRIPT." mode. The system will ask for the partition number desired.
Enter the number as a single key entry 1-8.
2. Follow the same procedure as for CUSTOM WORDS, except that partition descriptors
are limited to four (4) characters (ex. WHSE for warehouse).
Custom Message Display (Installer's Message)
Normally, when the system is in the disarmed state, the following display is present on the
keypad.
****DISARMED****
READY TO ARM

Part or all of the above message can be modified to create a custom installer message for
each partition. For example, ****DISARMED**** on the first line or READY TO ARM on the
second line could be replaced by the installation company name or phone number for service.
Note that there are only 16 character spaces on each of the two lines. To create a custom
display message, proceed as follows:
1. Select DEFAULT SCREEN mode. Enter the partition number for this message. Press [*]
to accept entry. The following will appear:
****DISARMED****
READY TO ARM

A cursor will be present at the extreme left of the first line (over the first "star"). The [6]
key is used to move the cursor to the right and the [4] key to move the cursor to the left.
Key [7] may be used to insert spaces or erase existing characters.
2. Create the message. For example, to replace READY TO ARM with the message
SERVICE: 424-0177, proceed as follows:
Press the [6] key to move the cursor to the right, and continue until the cursor is
positioned over the first location on the second line.
Press the [3] key to advance through the alphabet to the first desired character (in this
case, "S"). Use the [1] key to go backward, when necessary. When the desired character is
reached, press [6].
The cursor will then move to the next position, ready for entry of the next character (in
this example, "E"). When the cursor reaches a position over an existing character,
pressing the [3] or [1] key will advance or back up from that character in the alphabet.
Repeat until all characters in the message have been entered.
3. Save the message.
Store the new display message in memory by pressing the [8] key.
4. The system will ask for a new partition number.
Enter 0 to quit or 1-8 for a new partition number.

– 100 –

ALPHA DESCRIPTOR VOCABULARY
(For Entering Alpha Descriptors. To select a word, press [#] followed by the word's 3-digit number.)
NOTE: This vocabulary is not to be used for relay voice descriptors. See the RELAY VOICE DESCRIPTORS
section when programming relay voice descriptors.
000 (Word Space)
• 001 AIR
• 002 ALARM
003 ALCOVE
004 ALLEY
005 AMBUSH
• 006 AREA
• 007 APARTMENT
008 ART
• 009 ATTIC
010 AUDIO
011 AUXILIARY
• 012 BABY
• 013 BACK
• 014 BAR
015 BARN
• 016 BASEMENT
• 017 BATHROOM
• 018 BED
• 019 BEDROOM
020 BELL
• 021 BLOWER
• 022 BOILER
023 BOTTOM
024 BOX
025 BREAK
• 026 BUILDING
027 BURNER
028
• 029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
• 037
038
039
• 040
041
042
043
044
045
• 046
047

CABINET
CALL
CAMERA
CAR
CASE
CASH
CCTV
CEILING
CELLAR
CENTRAL
CIRCUIT
CLIP
CLOSED
COIN
COLD
COATROOM
COLLECTION
COMBUSTION
COMPUTER
CONTACT

• 048
049
• 050
051

DAUGHTERS
DELAYED
DEN
DESK

102 INTERIOR
103 INTRUSION

• 052 DETECTOR
• 053 DINING
054 DISCRIMINATOR
055 DISPLAY
056 DOCK
• 057 DOOR
058 DORMER
• 059 DOWN
• 060 DOWNSTAIRS
061 DRAWER
• 062 DRIVEWAY
063 DRUG
• 064 DUCT
• 065
066
067
068
• 069
070
• 071
072

EAST
ELECTRIC
EMERGENCY
ENTRY
EQUIPMENT
EXECUTIVE
EXIT
EXTERIOR

• 073
074
075
• 076
• 077
078
• 079
• 080
081
082
• 083
084
• 085
086
087

FACTORY
FAILURE
FAMILY
FATHERS
FENCE
FILE
FIRE
FLOOR
FLOW
FOIL
FOYER
FREEZER
FRONT
FUR
FURNACE

151 POLICE
152 POOL
• 153 POWER

104 JEWELRY
• 105 KITCHEN

154 QUAD
155
• 156
157
158
159
160
• 161
• 162
163

• 106 LAUNDRY
• 107 LEFT
108 LEVEL
• 109 LIBRARY
• 110 LIGHT
111 LINE
112 LIQUOR
• 113 LIVING
• 114 LOADING
115 LOCK
116 LOOP
117 LOW
• 118 LOWER

088 GALLERY
• 089 GARAGE
• 090 GAS
091 GATE
• 092 GLASS
093 GUEST
094 GUN

• 136
137
• 138
139
• 140
141
142

OFFICE
OIL
OPEN
OPENING
OUTSIDE
OVERFLOW
OVERHEAD

164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193

• 095 HALL
• 096 HEAT
097 HIGH
098 HOLDUP
099 HOUSE

143
• 144
145
• 146
147
• 148
149
150

PAINTING
PANIC
PASSIVE
PATIO
PERIMETER
PHONE
PHOTO
POINT

194
195
196
197
198
• 199
200
• 201

• 119
120
121
122
• 123
124
• 125
126
127
128
129
• 130
• 131
132
133

•
•

MACHINE
MAGNETIC
MAIDS
MAIN
MASTER
MAT
MEDICAL
MEDICINE
MICROWAVE
MONEY
MONITOR
MOTHERS
MOTION
MOTOR
MUD

•
•
•
•
•
•

• 134 NORTH
135 NURSERY

100 INFRARED
• 101 INSIDE

202 TRANSMITTER
203 TRAP

•

RADIO
REAR
RECREATION
REFRIG
REFRIGERATION
RF
RIGHT
ROOM
ROOF
SAFE
SCREEN
SENSOR
SERVICE
SHED
SHOCK
SHOP
SHORT
SHOW
SIDE
SKYLIGHT
SLIDING
SMOKE
SONIC
SONS
SOUTH
SPRINKLER
STAMP
STATION
STEREO
STORE
STORAGE
STORY
STRESS
STRIKE
SUMP
SUPERVISED
SUPERVISION
SWIMMING
SWITCH
TAMPER
TAPE
TELCO
TELEPHONE
TELLER
TEMPERATURE
THERMOSTAT
TOOL

•
•
•
•

204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212

213
214
215
• 216
• 217
218
• 219
220
221

ULTRA
UP
UPPER
UPSTAIRS
UTILITY
VALVE
VAULT
VIBRATION
VOLTAGE
WALL
WAREHOUSE
WASH
WEST
WINDOW
WINE
WING
WIRELESS
WORK

222 XMITTER
223 YARD
224 ZONE (No.)
• 225 ZONE
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
250
to
269

0
1
1ST
2
2ND
3
3RD
4
4TH
5
5TH
6
6TH
7
7TH
8
8TH
9
9TH
Custom Word 1
Custom Word 20

CHARACTER (ASCII) CHART (For Adding Custom Words)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

(space)
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51

*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3

52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61

4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=

62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71

>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G

72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81

H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q

82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90

R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z

*Notes: This factory-provided vocabulary of words is subject to change.
Bulleted words in bold face type are those that are also available for use by the 4285 VIP module. If using a
VIP module, and words other than these are selected for alpha descriptors, the voice module will not provide
annunciation of those words.

– 101 –

Device Programming
This menu is used to programme keypads, receivers and relay modules.
From Data Field Programming mode, press #93 to display "ZONE PROG?". Press 0
repeatedly to display "DEVICE PROG?".

DEVICE PROG?
1=YES 0=NO
DEVICE ADDRESS
01-30, 00=QUIT

Press 1 to enter DEVICE PROGRAMMING mode.
The device address identifies the device to the control. Enter the
2-digit device address number to match the device's physical
address setting (01-30). Press ✴ to accept entry.
Note: Device Address 04 must be used for the 4285 Voice Module,
if one is utilized. If not, it can be used for another device type.

DEVICE TYPE

Select the type of addressable device as follows:
00 = device not used
06 = LRR or Contact ID on keypad bus
01 = keypad (6139)
09 = Vista Gateway
03 = RF receiver (4281/5881/5882)
04 = output relay/trigger module (4204)
05 = telephone module (4285)
Press ✴ to accept entry.

01 CONSOLE PART.

If device type 01 was selected, this prompt will appear. Enter the
addressable device's default partition number (01 to maximum
number of partitions programmed for system in field 2*00). This is
the primary partition for which the device is intended to be used.
Enter "9" to make this "Master" keypad for the system. Press ✴ .

01 SOUND OPTION

Addressable keypads can be individually programmed to suppress
arm/disarm beeps, entry/exit beeps and chime mode beeps. This
helps prevent unwanted sounds from disturbing users in other
areas of the premises.
Enter a number 00-03 for the keypad sounding suppression options
desired for the keypad as follows:
00 = no suppression.
01 = suppress arm/disarm & entry/exit beeps.
02 =suppress chime mode beeps only.
03 = suppress arm/disarm, entry/exit and chime mode beeps.
The screen will display the next device number to be programmed.
Press 00 + ✴ to exit Menu Mode.
Press *99 to exit programme mode.
Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the system's settling
delay.

01 KEYPAD GBL
1=YES 0=NO

If device type 01 was selected, this prompt will appear. Press 1 to
enable this particular keypad to execute global arm/disarm
functions.

03 RF EXPANDER
HOUSE ID
00

If device type 03 is selected, this prompt will appear. Enter the 2digit House ID (00-31). This is required for 5700 series systems
only, or if using a wireless keypad (5827/5827BD) with a 5800
series system.

04 MODULE PART.

If device type 05, telephone module was selected, enter the
partition number 1-8 in which the telephone module is located.
Press ✴ .

Device Address 00 is always set as an alpha keypad assigned to Partition 1 with no
sounder suppression options.
– 102 –

Relay Programming
The system supports up to 32 X-10 and/or relay outputs, plus up to 64 polling loop
trigger/relay outputs. Once a device is programmed, there is no distinction between an X-10,
triggers, or relay output device.
Relays can be used to perform different functions and actions. Each relay must be
programmed to begin one of four types of ACTIONS at a designated START event, and end
that ACTION at a designated STOP event. The options used to start and stop these devices
are described below, followed by the actual screen prompts and available entries.
The letter(s) in parentheses after each function described below, such as (A) after ACTION,
are those that appear in the various summary displays of programmed data during
programming.
ACTION (A)

The "ACTION" of the device is how the device will respond when it is
activated by the "START" programming. There are four different choices of
actions:
• ACTIVATE for 2 SECONDS and then reset.
• ACTIVATE and REMAIN ACTIVATED until stopped by some other event.
• PULSE ON and OFF until stopped by some other event.
• NO RESPONSE when the device is not used.
START (STT) The "START" programming determines when and under what conditions the
device will be activated. The following START options are available:
1)

a.EVENT (EV) is the condition (Alarm, Fault, Trouble) that must occur to a
zone or group of zones (zone list) in order to activate the device. These
conditions apply only when a zone list is used. The different choices for
"EVENT" are listed below and in “Programming Relays & Powerline Carrier
devices” in the section that follows.
• ALARM
• FAULT
• TROUBLE
• NO RESPONSE

Relay action begins upon any alarm in an assigned zone in the
zone list.
Relay action begins upon any opening (or short) of an assigned
zone in the zone list.
Relay action begins upon any trouble condition on an assigned
zone in the zone list.
Relay action is not dependent upon one of the above events.

b. ZONE LIST (ZL) is a group of zones to which the “EVENT” applies in
order to activate a particular device. Note that there are a total of 15 zone
lists that can be programmed in field *81 mode. When the selected EVENT
(Alarm, Fault or Trouble) occurs in any zone in the selected “Start” ZONE
LIST (01-15), activation of the selected device will START.
a. ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). If all zones to be used to
start this device have the same response type, and there are no other zones
of this type which are not to activate this device, then "ZONE TYPE" may
be used instead of using a "ZONE LIST" and "EVENT” to activate the
device.
If a system operation, such as "DISARMING," is to activate the device, the
appropriate choice would also be entered under the "ZONE TYPE" option.
The "ZONE TYPE" option functions independently of the
"EVENT/ZONE LIST" combination.
If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that response type going
into alarm, trouble, or fault will cause the device to activate as selected in
"ACTION.” If the same “ZONE TYPE” is also chosen for the STOP
programming, any zone of that type that restores will de-activate the device.
If a System Operation, such as “DISARMING” or “ANY FIRE ALARM,” is to
activate the device, the appropriate choice would also be entered under the
“ZONE TYPE” option. The selected operation will cause the device to
activate as selected in "ACTION.” The different choices for "ZONE TYPE"
and "SYSTEM OPERATION" are listed in “Programming Relays &
Powerline Carrier devices” later in this section, and in the Programming
Form.
– 103 –

The “ZONE TYPE” option functions independently of the “EVENT/ZONE LIST”
combination.
b.PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Start" ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM
OPERATION may be limited to an occurrence on either one partition (1-8)
or any partition (0).
The "STOP" programming determines when and under what conditions the
STOP (STP):
device will be de-activated. The following options are available:
1)
a.RESTORE ZONE LIST (ZL). If a "ZONE LIST" is used as the “Stop”
event, the device will de-activate when all the zones in that list restore from
a previous fault, trouble, or alarm condition. This will occur regardless of
what is programmed to "START" the device; therefore, a "RESTORE ZONE
LIST" would normally only be used when a "ZONE LIST" is used to start the
device.
2).
a.ZONE TYPE/SYSTEM OPERATION (ZT). Instead of using a "RESTORE
ZONE LIST", a specific zone (response) type or system operation action can
be selected to de-activate the device.
If a specific "ZONE TYPE" is chosen, any zone of that response type that
restores from a previous alarm, trouble, or fault condition will cause the
device to de-activate.
If a "SYSTEM OPERATION" is chosen, that operation will cause the device
to de-activate. The different choices for "ZONE TYPE" and "SYSTEM
OPERATION" are listed in “Programming Relays & Powerline Carrier
devices” later in this section, and in the Programming Form.
b.PARTITION No. (P). The device's "Stop" Zone Type/System Operation may
be limited to an occurrence on either one partition (1-8) or any partition (0).

Programming Output Devices
1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.
2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RELAY PROG" prompt appears. Press 1
(YES).
While in this mode, press ✴ to advance to next screen. Press # to backup to the previous
screen.
Enter Relay No.
(00=Quit)
01

Enter the relay (output device) identification number 01-96. This is a
reference number only, used for identification purposes. The actual
module address and relay number is programmed in the last two
prompts. Press ✴ .

01 A EV ZL ZT P
STT 0 0 00 00 0

The keypad will display a summary START screen. Press ✴

01
A ZL ZT P
STOP 0 00 00 0

The keypad will display a summary STOP screen.

continue.
Press ✴

continue.

01 Relay Action
No Response

The Relay Action is the way in which the relay will respond when
activated by the "start" event. Enter the desired action for this relay
as follows: 0=not used; 1=closed for 2 secs.; 2=stay closed; 3=pulse
on/off

01 Start Event
Not used

A relay may be activated either by an Event used in conjunction with
a Zone List, or by a Zone Type/System Operation. If using an
Event/Zone List combination, enter the event code as follows: 0=not
used; 1=alarm; 2=fault; 3=trouble; 4=restore
If not using a Zone List to activate the relay, enter 0. Press ✴ to
continue.

– 104 –

01 Start: Zn LIST
No list

A Zone List is a set of zones that can be used to initiate the start or
stop relay action. If a zone list is being used to start this relay action,
enter the Zone List number 01-15. If a zone list is not being used,
enter 00. Press ✴ to continue.

01 Start: Zn Typ

A Zone Type/System Operation can be used instead of an Event/Zone
List combination to start the relay action. If a Zone Type/System
Operation is being used, enter the 2-digit code as listed below. Press
✴ to continue.

Choices For Start/Stop Zone Types
00 = No Response (Not Used)
01 = Entry/Exit #1
02 = Entry/exit #2
03 = Perimeter
04 = Interior Follower
05 = Trouble Day/Alarm Night
06 = 24 Hr Silent
07 = 24 Hr Audible
08 = 24 Hr Aux
09 = Fire Alarm or Trouble
10 = Interior w/Delay
19 = 24 Hour Trouble
23 = No Alarm Response
(for output relay activation, such
as for access control purposes)
26 = Verified Alarm
27 = Access Point
28 = ACS MLB Supervision Fail

Choices For Start/Stop System
Operation:
20 = Arming-Stay
21 = Arming-Away
22 = Disarming (Code+Off)
31 = End of Exit Time
32 = Start of Entry Time
33 = Any Burglary Alarm
34 = Code + # + 71 Key Entry
35 = Code + # + 72 Key Entry
36 = At Bell Timeout **
37 = 2 Times Bell Timeout**
38 = Chime
39 = Fire Alarm
40 = Bypassing
41 = AC Power Fail
42 = System Battery Low

43 = Communication failure
44 = RF low battery
45 = polling loop failure
51 = RF receiver failure
52 = kissoff
54 = fire zone reset
55 = disarm + 1 minute
56 = XX minutes (enter XX in field 1*74;
stop condition only)
57 = YY seconds (enter YY in field 1*75;
stop condition only)
58 = Duress
60 = Audio/Video Alarm Verification
** Or at Disarming, whichever occurs earlier

If using options 56 and/or 57 (usually as the STOP Zone Type), data fields 1*74
and 1*75 for the respective relay timeouts for minutes and seconds must be
programmed.
01 Start Part

If the starting event will be limited to occurring on a specific
partition, enter the partition number (1-8) in which the start event
will occur. Enter 0 for any partition. Press ✴ to continue.

01 Stop: Zn LIST
No list

If a zone list is being used to stop this relay action, enter the zone list
number 01-15. The restore of all zone s on the Zone List will stop
the relay. If a zone list is not being used, enter 00. Press ✴ .

01 Stop: Zn Typ

If a Zone Type/System Operation is being used to stop the relay
action, enter the 2-digit code as listed in the start Zone Type/System
Operation prompt paragraph. Press ✴ to continue.

01 Stop Part

This is the partition to which the stop condition will be limited. Enter
0 for any partition. Enter 1-8 for specific partition number. Press ✴

Relay Group

Restriction
1=yes 0=no

.
Relays may be grouped for common activation by time driven events
(commands 06-10--see Section 20: SCHEDULING OPTIONS for more
information). Enter 0 (no group) or 1-8 for a specific group number.
Press ✴ to continue.
The system may have some devices which are not intended to be
under end user control, such as relays activating fire doors or
machinery. Enter 1 if the end user will be restricted from accessing
this relay. Press ✴ to continue.

– 105 –

Relay Type

Enter 0 for polling loop trigger or relay. Enter 1 for 4204 relay
to
outputs. Enter 2 for Powerline Carrier devices. Press ✴
continue.

V-PLEX ZONE #

For polling loop trigger outputs (4208UXM)/4101SN), enter the
protection zone number (010-128) linked to each output, if used. If
not using a protection zone on these modules, enter the relay zone
number (601-696). Be sure to enroll the module’s serial number (see
Zone Programming ZONE NUMBER prompt). Press ✴ to continue.

ECP ADDRESS

For relay module (4204) outputs, enter the actual relay module's
address (01-15) as set by its DIP switches.

MODULE
RELAY #

For 4204 relay outputs, enter the specific relay number on that
module (1-4). Press ✴ to continue.

House Code

For Powerline Carrier devices, enter the numerical equivalent of the
House Code of the device as follows:
A=00
B=01
C=02
D=03

Unit Code

E=04
F=05
G=06
H=07

I=08
J=09
K=10
L=11

M=12
N=13
O=14
P=15

Enter the numerical unit code of the Powerline Carrier device (00-31).
Press ✴ to continue.
The keypad will display the Start and Stop summary screens again.
Press ✴ to continue.

3. When all relays have been programmed, enter 00 at the "ENTER RELAY NO." prompt.
4. If defining a Zone List, continue to the next procedure in this section. If not, enter 00 +
✴ at the next two prompts. Then enter *99 to exit programming completely. After
exiting, enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the system's settling delay.
5. If supervision of the relay is desired, enter a response type for the relay's corresponding
supervisory zone. This is equal to 6 + 2-digit relay number. For example, if you are
programming relay no. 1, the relay's supervisory zone would be 601. Programme this
zone for response type 19 (24 hr. trouble) or 05 (trouble by day, alarm by night) in #93
Programming Mode.

Zone List Programming
After all relays have been programmed, upon entering 00 at the "ENTER RELAY NO."
prompt, you will be asked to enter a Zone List. If a Zone List number was used to start/stop
a relay, you must define the zones belonging to that list:
Enter the zone list number 01-15. Enter 00 to quit.
Enter Zone LIST
00=QUIT 00
001 Enter Zn Num.
000=QUIT 000

Using three-digit entries, enter each zone to be included in this
zone list. Press ✴ after each zone number is entered. When all
zones have been entered, enter 00, then press ✴

– 106 –

001 Del Zn LIST?
0=No 1=Yes

Enter 0 to save the zone list entered. Enter 1 to delete that zone
list.

001 Delete Zone?
0=No 1=Yes

Enter 1 to delete one or more zones in that zone list. Enter 0 if no
changes are necessary. If 1 is entered, the next screen will appear,
otherwise the "Enter Zone List" prompt will reappear.

001 Zn to Delete?
000=QUIT 000

Enter each zone number to be deleted from the zone list, pressing ✴
after each number.

This will appear if 00 is pressed at the ENTER ZONE LIST prompt.
Enter the zone list number that you wish to view. Press ✴ to

View Zn LIST
00=QUIT 00

continue.
XXASSIGNEDZONE
000=QUIT 000

Press ✴

to scroll through all zones in that list. Enter 00 + ✴

quit.

Press *99 to exit programme mode or continue to the next procedure in this section to
programme Relay Voice Descriptors. Upon exiting programme mode, enter the [Installer
Code] + OFF to cancel the system's settling delay.

Relay Voice Descriptors
If using the 4285 VIP Module, voice descriptors can be programmed for each of the 96
relays/Powerline Carrier/output trigger devices used in the system. These descriptors will be
announced by the voice module when accessing the relays via the # 70 relay access mode via
telephone.
Each voice descriptor can consist of up to 3 words selected from the relay voice descriptor
vocabulary list (found later in this section).
The index numbers from this vocabulary list are to be used for relay voice descriptors
only. For normal system voice annunciation (eg. alarms, troubles, status), use the
highlighted words in the alpha vocabulary list found in the alpha programming section.
To enter relay voice descriptors, do the following:
1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?"
prompt.
2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "RLY VOICE DESCR?" prompt is
displayed. Follow the instructions below. While in this mode, press ✴ to
advance to next screen. Press #

to backup to previous screen.

RLYVOICEDESCR?
0=no 1=yes

Press 1 to programme voice descriptors for relays.

ENTER RELAY NO.
00=QUIT
01

Enter the 2-digit relay/X-10 module/trigger number (01-96) for the
relay desired, or enter 00 to quit relay voice descriptor programming
mode. Press ✴ .

01 ENTER DESC
d1

From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter the 3-digit
index number for the first word of the relay descriptor phrase. Press
✴ .

01 ENTER DESC
d2

From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter the 3-digit
index number for the second word of the relay descriptor phrase. If
second word is not desired, press 000. Press ✴ .

01 ENTER DESC d3

From the relay voice descriptor vocabulary list, enter the 3-digit
index number for the third word of the relay descriptor phrase. If
third word is not desired, press 000. Press ✴ to accept entry.
The ENTER RELAY NO. prompt appears. Enter the next relay to
be programmed. When all output devices have been programmed,
enter 00 to quit.
Enter *99 to exit programme mode.
Enter the [Installer Code] + OFF to cancel the system's settling
delay.

– 107 –

Relay Voice Descriptors and Custom Word Substitutes Vocabulary
Word
Index
Air.........................116
Alarm ....................255
And.......................067
Apartment.............117
Appliances............161
Area......................118
Attic ......................119
Baby .....................120
Back .....................121
Bar........................122
Basement .............021
Bathroom..............051
Battery ..................053
Bed.......................092
Bedroom...............015
Blower ..................123
Boiler ....................124
Bright....................162
Building ................125
Burglary ................039
Call .......................009
Central..................089
Chime ...................054
Closed ..................126
Computer..............127
Console ................066

Word
Index
Daughter's ........... 208
Den ...................... 052
Detector ............... 128
Device.................. 060
Dim ...................... 163
Dining .................. 031
Door ..................... 016
Down.................... 008
Downstairs ........... 184
Driveway .............. 130
Duct ..................... 131
East ..................... 132
Eight .................... 077
Eighth .................. 221
Equipment............ 133
Exit....................... 004
Factory................. 134
Father's................ 211
Fence................... 135
Fifth...................... 218
Fire ...................... 040
First ..................... 136
Five...................... 074
Floor .................... 029
Four ..................... 073
Fourth .................. 217
Foyer ................... 137
Front .................... 087

Custom Word
Substitutes for VIP
Module
Annunciation

Word
Index
Garage .................023
Gas.......................138
Glass ....................139
Hall .......................050
Heat......................010
Inside....................209
Kitchen .................022
Laundry ................140
Left .......................027
Library ..................141
Light .....................019
Living....................030
Loading ................142
Lower ...................094
Machine................143
Master ..................144
Medical.................014
Mother's................212
Motion ..................145
Nine......................078
Ninth.....................222
No.........................165
North ....................146
Not........................012

Word
Index
Off........................ 011
Office ................... 147
On........................ 058
One...................... 070
Open.................... 148
Outside ................ 210

Word
Index
South....................155
Stairs....................006
Station..................156
Storage ................157
Sun.......................154
System .................062

Panic.................... 013
Partition ............... 090
Patio .................... 149
Phone .................. 061
Power .................. 063
Pump ................... 166

Temperature.........158
Third.....................159
Three....................072
Tool ......................213
Two ......................071

Rear .................... 088
Right .................... 028
Room ................... 018
's .......................... 007
Second ................ 056
Service................. 150
Seven .................. 076
Seventh ............... 220
Shed .................... 151
Shop .................... 152
Side ..................... 153
Six........................ 075
Sixth..................... 219
Smoke ................. 024
Son's.................... 223

Up ........................025
Upper ...................187
Upstairs................183
Utility ....................185
West.....................215
Window ................017
Wing.....................216
Zero......................069
Zone.....................002

A substitute word can be programmed for each of the 20 custom words used in
your alpha zone descriptions. This substitute word will be announced by the VIP
module in place of the custom word that is displayed on the alpha keypad. For
example, an alarm display of "John's Bedroom" could be announced as "Son's
Bedroom," since there is no annunciation for the custom word "John." Note that
if a substitute word is not assigned, the VIP module will not annunciate the zone
descriptor at all, but will only annunciate the zone number.
To enter custom words substitutes, do the following:
1. From data field programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?"
prompt.
2. Press 0 (NO) to each menu option until the "CUSTOM INDEX " prompt is
displayed.

CUSTOM INDEX?
0=no
1=yes

Enter 1 at this prompt.

CUSTOMWORDNO.
00=QUIT

Enter the custom word number (01--20) for which a voice
substitute is desired. Enter 00 to quit this programming mode.
Press ✴ to accept entry.

01 ENTERINDEX#

Enter the 3-digit substitute word index number from the relay
voice descriptor and custom word substitutes vocabulary list found
in the Relay Voice Descriptors section. Press ✴ .
The "CUSTOM WORD NO." prompt will be displayed. Enter the
next custom word number to be substituted or enter 00 to quit.

– 108 –

RF Serial Number Clear Mode
This mode may be used in the event that an undesired transmitter has been enrolled during
sequential enrolling, causing each subsequent serial number to be assigned to an incorrect
zone. Performing this operation will delete all RF serial numbers, leaving all other zone
information intact. You may then return to Sequential mode to re-enroll wireless
transmitters.
The RF Serial Number Clear mode will not delete polling loop serial numbers.

To clear all RF wireless serial numbers, do the following:
1. Enter programming mode: installer code + 8 0 0 0.
2. From programming mode, press #93 to display the "ZONE PROG?" prompt.
3. Press 0 (NO) repeatedly until the "CLEAR RF SERIAL #?" prompt appears.
CLEAR RF SERIAL#?
1 = YES, 0 = NO
0

Enter "1" to clear all RF wireless serial numbers. The "ARE YOU SURE?"
prompt is displayed as follows:

ARE YOU SURE?
1 = YES, 0 = NO 0

Enter "1" to clear all RF serial numbers. Re-enter the Sequential mode to
enroll wireless transmitters.

— 109 —

SECTION 22

Scheduling Options
This section provides the following information:
• Main features of scheduling
• Time Window Definitions
• Open/Close Schedule Definitions
• Programming in the #80 Scheduling menu mode
• Programming:
Time Windows
Open/Close Schedules
Holiday Schedules
Time Driven Events
Access Schedules

Introduction To Scheduling
This section describes the scheduling features provided with this control panel.
General

Auto Arming

Auto-Arm Delay

Auto-Arm Warning

– 110 –

• The scheduling features of this control allow certain
operations to be automated, such as auto-arming, autodisarming, auto-bypassing and un-bypassing of zones,
and activating relay outputs (using powerline carrier
devices or 4204 modules).
• The system uses time windows for defining open/close
schedules, holiday schedules and user defined
temporary schedules.
Scheduled events are
programmed by user-friendly menu modes of
programming (#80, #81 & #83 modes), explained in
detail in this section. These menus take you step by
step through the options.
• The system can automatically arm (AWAY mode) itself
at the end of a pre-determined closing (arming) time
window, if the system has not been armed manually.
Auto arming can be delayed three ways: by use of the
auto arm delay, the auto arm warning, or by manually
extending the closing (arming) time window with a
keypad command. The system can also automatically
bypass any open zones when auto arming.
• Auto-arm delay provides a delay (grace period) before
auto arming. It starts at the end of the closing window.
Delay is set in 4 minute increments, up to 56 minutes in
partition-specific programme field 2*05. The expiration
of this delay causes auto-arm warning to start.
• The auto-arm warning causes the keypad sounder to
warn the user of an impending auto-arm. The warning
can be set to start 01 to 15 minutes prior to arming in
partition-specific programme field 2*06. During this
period the keypad will beep every 15 seconds and
display "AUTO ARM ALERT" ("AA" on non-alpha
keypads). The beeps may be silenced by pressing any
key on a keypad. When the remaining time drops below
60 seconds, the keypads will begin to beep every 5
seconds. The panel will arm at the conclusion of the
auto-arm warning period.

Extend Closing
Window

Force Arm

Auto Disarming

Disarm Delay

Restrict
Disarming

Exception
Reports

Time Driven
Events

Limitation of
Access By Time

• A user can manually extend the arm (closing) time window
by 1 or 2 hours. This is done by entering a keypad command
(security code + #82), which then prompts the user to enter
the desired extension time of 1 or 2 hours (refer to the
SYSTEM OPERATION section of the Installation
Instructions). This feature is useful if a user must stay on
the premises later than usual.
• The Enable Force Arm option causes the panel to attempt to
bypass any faulted zones prior to auto-arming (panel will
perform a force-arm). This option is set in partition-specific
programme field 2*08.
• The system can automatically disarm at the end of a predetermined time window, if the system has not been
disarmed manually. The disarming time can be delayed by
using the auto disarm delay feature. In addition, the system
can restrict disarming to a pre-determined time.
• Auto-disarm delay provides a delay before Auto disarming.
This delay is added to the end of the disarm window. The
delay is set in 4 minute increments, up to 56 minutes, in
partition-specific programme field 2*07.
• This option, set in partition-specific field 2*10, allows
disarming by operator level users only during the disarm
time window, the arming window (in case user needs to
reenter premises after arming), or when the system is in
alarm.
• This option allows a means of reporting openings and
closings by exception (sent only if event occurs outside of the
predetermined opening/closing time windows).
• The system sends missed open/close reports if no
opening/closing occurs by the end of the corresponding
window.
• By using time windows, the system can automatically
activate and de-activate relays and/or power line carrier
(X-10) devices at pre-determined times to turn lights or other
devices on and off.:
• The system can perform the same actions on a daily basis, or
can be made to perform an action only once (i.e., turn on the
porch light this Wednesday at 8:00pm).
• The system also provides up to 20 "timers" available to the
end user for the purpose of activating output devices at
preset times and on preset days.
• A user's access can be limited to a certain time period,
during
which he can perform system functions. Outside this time,
that user's code will be inactive. The system provides up to 8
Access Schedules, each consisting of two Time Windows (one
for opening, one for closing) for each day of the week and two
time windows for holidays. The access schedules are
programmed via #80 Menu Mode, and enabled for a given
user when that user is added to the system. If a user tries to
operate the system outside of the schedule, the alpha keypad
will display "Access Denied."

— 111 —

Time Windows Definitions

– 112 –

Time Windows

• Scheduled events are based on time windows, which are
simply periods of time during which an event may take
place. Time windows are defined by a start time and stop
time. The system supports up to 20 Time Windows. The
windows are shared by the 8 partitions, and the windows are
used for open/close schedules as well as for time driven event
control.

Example

• To understand time windows and scheduling, take for
example a store that has the following hours:
Monday to Thursday:
9am to 6pm
Friday
9am to 9pm
Saturday
10am to 4pm
Sunday
Closed
Holidays
Closed
Assume the owner desires the following time windows to
allow time for employees to arm or disarm the system:
Monday to Thursday:
Open (disarm)
8am to 9am
Close (arm)
6pm to 6:30pm
Friday
Open (disarm) 8am to 9am
Close (arm)
9pm to 9:30pm
Saturday Open (disarm) 9am to 10am
Close (arm)
4pm to 4:30pm
Sunday & Holidays
Closed
• To provide these schedules, the following five time windows
need to be programmed:
Window Start
Stop
Purpose
1
8am
9am
Monday-Friday open window
2
9am
10am
Saturday open window
3
4pm
4:30pm
Saturday close window
4
6pm
6:30pm
Monday-Thurs. close window
5
9pm
9:30pm
Friday close window
• Using the #80 Menu Mode (described in a later section), the
installer can programme open/close schedules by assigning
each time window to a day of the week (windows are entered
as 2-digit entries):
Mon
Tue
Wed
Thu
Fri
Sat
Sun
Hol
Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl Op/Cl
01/04 01/04 01/04 01/04 01/05 02/03 00/00 00/00
Note: 00 is entered for those days on which the store is
closed.
When programmed, employees can arm and disarm the
system within the open and close time windows respectively
without causing a report to be sent to the central station
(reporting by exception). At the end of these windows, the
system can be programmed to automatically arm/disarm if
an employee fails to arm/disarm manually (auto arm/auto
disarm).
Time driven events can be activated at different times using
a window as follows:
• At the beginning of a time window
• At the end of a time window
• During a time window active period only (on at beginning of
window, off at end)
• At both the beginning and end of the time window (Ex: to
sound a buzzer at the beginning and end of a coffee break)

Open/Close Schedule Definitions
General

Daily Schedule

• The Open/Close scheduling is controlled by one of three
individual schedules. Each schedule consists of one time window
for openings and one time window for closings. There are three
types of schedules available: Daily, Holiday, and Temporary.
• Each partition can have one daily schedule consisting of one
opening window and one closing window per day.

Holiday Schedule

• A holiday schedule will override the regular daily schedule on
selected holidays throughout the year.

Temporary
Schedule

• The temporary schedule provides a method for the end user
to override the daily and holiday schedules. It consists of one
opening window and one closing window for each day of the
week. The schedule automatically takes effect for up to one
week, after which it is deactivated. This schedule is programmed
using the #81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. Refer to that
section for procedures.

Additional
Schedules

• Additional opening and closing schedules can be
programmed using the time-driven event programming
options. For example, a schedule for normal store
opening/closing can be programmed with open/close schedules,
and another open/close schedule for beginning and ending lunch
hour can be programmed using the time driven event schedule
programming. Refer to the Time Driven Events paragraph later
in this section for detailed information.

Open/Close
Reports by
Exception

• The system can help reduce communication traffic to the
central station by using the exception reporting feature, set
in partition-specific programme field 2*09. The Open/Close by
exception option suppresses these reports from being sent to
central station if an arm or disarm is done within the expected
time window. Reports are only sent if the open/close occurs
outside the assigned time window. The system keeps a record of
all openings/closings in its event log.
• In the event an opening occurs immediately following a closing
during the closing window (a person who arms the system
forgets something and has to reenter), the opening report
(although outside of the opening window) will not be sent. (as
long as the reentering occurs within the closing window);
otherwise a report will be sent). This feature is designed to
prevent false alarms to central station.
• The following diagram gives an example of how the open/close by
exception reporting works.

– 113–

Example of Open/Close Exception Reporting & Scheduling
6:01PM

5:59AM

"Early opening" reports

6AM

9AM

Opening Window

will be sent if system
No reports sent
is disarmed before
if system disarmed
opening window begins. during this time
window.

9:01AM

3:59PM

Auto-disarm delay begins .

4PM

6PM

Closing Window

Auto-disarm occurs after delay.
(if auto-disarm is enabled)

No reports sent
if system armed*
during this time
"Missed opening" reports will
window.
be sent if user disarming has not * or disarmed if
occurred at expiration of
user reenters
opening window.
premises.
"Late opening" reports will be
sent if disarm occurs after
the opening window expires
"Early closing" reports will be
sent if user arming occurs before
the closing window begins.

6:01PM

5:59AM

Auto-arm delay begins
Auto-arm warning begins.
Auto-arm occurs after
warning expires.
(if auto arm is enabled)
"Missed closing" reports
will be sent if user
arming has not
occurred at expiration
of closing window.
"Late closing" reports
will be sent if system
is armed after the
closing window

expires.

Programming with #80 Scheduling Menu Mode
The #80 Scheduling Menu Mode is used to programme most of the scheduling
and timed event options.
To enter this mode, the system must first be in normal operating mode (all
partitions disarmed). Enter [Installer Code] + # + 80.
The following can be programmed while in this mode:
• Define time windows
• Assign open/close schedules to each partition
• Assign holiday schedules
• Programme time-driven events (for system functions and relay
activation)
• Assign access control schedules
Some scheduling features are programmed in data field programming mode
(installer code +800). The general programming mode scheduling fields are
listed below.
System Wide Fields:

1*74 -1*75 Relay timeout values
2*01-2*02 Summer time options
2*11
Allow Disarming outside window if
alarm occurs

Partition specific fields: 1*76
2*05
2*06
2*07
2*08
2*09
2*10

Access control relay for this partition
Auto-arm delay value
Auto-arm warning time
Auto-disarm delay value
Force arm enable
Open/close reporting by exception
Restrict disarm only during windows

Event driven relay activation options are programmed using the #93 Menu
Mode, Relay Programming. These actions are in response to a programmed
action. However, relay activation can also be time driven, and thus be used
to initiate a desired action. Time driven relay activation options are
programmed using the #80 Scheduling Menu Mode. Refer to the Time Driven
Event Programming section for procedures.

– 114 –

Steps To Programming Scheduling Options
To use #80 Scheduling Menu Mode, do the following:
Using the worksheets:
Define time windows (up to 20)
Define the daily open/close schedules (one schedule per day, per partition)
Define the holidays to be used by the system (up to 16)
Define the holiday schedules (up to 8, one per partition)
Define temporary schedules
Define limitation of access times (up to 8 schedules)
Define the time driven events (up to 20)
Using #80 Scheduling Menu Mode:
Programme the time windows
Programme the open/close schedules
Programme the time driven events
Programme the access schedules

Basic Scheduling
Menu Structure

To programme schedules, enter: [Installer Code] + # + 80.
There are 5 sets of scheduling menus as shown below. Entering "1" at a displayed
main menu prompt selects that menu. Prompts for programming that feature will
then appear. Enter "0" to skip a menu screen and display the next menu option.
Time Window ?
1 Yes 0 = No

Enter 1 to programme time windows. Refer to the
Programming Time Windows section for detailed
procedures. Enter 0 to move to the Open/Close Schedules
prompt.

O/C Schedules ?
1 Yes 0 = No
0

Enter 1 to programme opening and closing schedules.
Refer to the Programming Open/Close Schedules section
for detailed procedures. Enter 0 to move to the Holidays
prompt.

Holidays ?
1 Yes 0 = No

Enter 1 to programme holiday schedules. Refer to the
Holiday Programming section for detailed procedures.
Enter 0 to move to the Timed Events prompt.

Timed Events ?
1 Yes 0 = No

Access Sched. ?
1 Yes 0 = No
0
Quit ?
1 Yes 0 = No

Enter 1 to programme timed events for relay outputs,
power line carrier devices, additional schedules or other
system functions. Refer to the Programming Timed Events
section for detailed procedures. Enter 0 to move to the
Access Schedule prompt.
Enter 1 to programme access schedules. Refer to the
Programming Access Schedules section for detailed
procedures. Enter 0 to move to the "Quit?" prompt.
Enter 1 to quit #80 Scheduling Menu Mode and return to
normal operating mode. Enter 0 to make any changes or
review the scheduling programming options. If 0 is
pressed, the TIME WINDOW menus are displayed.

– 115 –

Time Windows
Definitions
Worksheet

The system provides 20 time windows that are defined with start and stop times.
These windows are used for various open/close and access schedules, as well as for
output controls and are the basis of the scheduling system. These windows are shared
among all 8 partitions. The following worksheets will help you define time windows
and scheduling aspects of this system before programming the time window
definitions for this installation. Note that time windows can span midnight.
Time Window

Start Time (HH:MM)

Stop Time (HH:MM)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Time windows are defined by a start and a stop time using the Time Windows programming menu.

– 116 –

Programming Time Windows
Enter Scheduling Mode by entering the installer code + # + 80. The keypad
will display the Time Window programming prompt.
Time Window ?
1 Yes 0 = No

Enter 1 at this main menu prompt to programme time
windows.

Enter the 2-digit time window number to be
programmed. Press * to accept the entry.
Enter 00 then * at the "TIME WINDOW #" prompt to
quit Time Window programming and display the Quit
? prompt.

Time Window # ?
01-20, 00 = Quit 01

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to Quit ?
return to the main menu choices 1 = YES 0 = NO 0
and
continue
programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu
Mode.
If a time window number was entered, the cursor will
be positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start of
window entry. Enter the desired start of window hour
and press *. The cursor moves to the minutes. Enter
the desired minutes and press *. Toggle the AM/PM
indication by pressing any key 0-9 while the cursor is
under the letter A/P position. Repeat for the end of
window time entry .
When the entry is completed, the "TIME WINDOW #"
prompt is displayed again. Enter the next time
window number to be programmed and repeat the
procedure.

01 TIME WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM

When all time windows have been programmed, enter 00 at the TIME
WINDOW # prompt to quit Time Window menus.
Since the time windows are shared among all partitions, it is important to make
sure that changing a time window does not adversely affect desired actions in
other partitions.

Daily Open/Close Worksheet
Write in the open & close time window numbers for each partition.
Part

Monday
Op

Tuesday
Op

Wednesday Thursday
Op

Friday

Saturday

Sunday

Holiday

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

– 117 –

Programming Open/Close Schedules
Each partition can be assigned one daily open/close schedule, plus a holiday
open/close schedule. Temporary schedules are programmed separately, using
the #81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode. To programme additional
open/close schedules, see the Time Driven Events section.
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the O/C Schedules
prompt appears.
O/C Schedules ?
1 Yes 0 = No
0

Enter 1 to programme opening and closing schedules.

Partition # ?
01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter the appropriate partition number to which the
following open/close schedules will apply.
Enter 00 then * at the "PARTITION #" prompt to quit
O/C Schedules programming and display the Quit ?
prompt.
Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to Quit ?
return to the main menu choices 1 = YES 0 = NO 0
and
continue
programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu
Mode.

Mon P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00

For each day in which an opening or closing schedule
is desired, beginning with Monday, enter a time
window number (01-20) for the displayed day's
opening schedule. Enter 00 if no schedule is desired
for a particular day. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for that window will
be displayed as a programming aid. Press the * key to
accept the entry.

Mon P1 CL WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00

Enter the time window number for the displayed day's
closing schedule. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window will
be displayed. Press the * key to accept the entry.

Tue
P1
OP
WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00

The keypad will now prompt for Tuesday's open/close
schedule, etc. Follow the procedure for Mondays
prompts. When the last day of the week has been
programmed, the holiday opening and closing window
prompts are displayed.

Hol P1 OP WIND.?
00:00 00:00
00

Enter the holiday opening time window number.
Press the * key to accept the entry.

Hol P1 CL WIND.?
00:00 00:00 00

Enter the holiday closing time window number. Press
the * key to accept the entry.
When the entries are completed, the PARTITION #
prompt is displayed again. Repeat this procedure for
each partition in the system.

When all partitions have been programmed, enter 00 at the PARTITION #
prompt to quit open/close schedules.

– 118 –

Holiday Definitions & Schedule Worksheet
Hol.

Partition
Month/Day

Programming Holiday Schedules
Up to 16 holidays can be defined for the system. After entering Scheduling
Menu Mode, press 0 until the Holidays ? prompt appears.
Holidays ?
1 Yes 0 = No

Enter 1 to programme holiday schedules.
0

HOLIDAY NUMBER ?

01-16, 00=Quit 01

Enter the 2-digit holiday number to be programmed
and press * to accept entry.
Enter 00 then * at the Holiday Number prompt to quit
the Holiday menus and display the Quit ? prompt.
Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to Quit ?
return to the main menu choices 1 = YES 0 = NO 0
and
continue
programming.
Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu
Mode.

01 ENTER DATE
00/00

The cursor will be positioned on the tens of months
digit. Enter the appropriate month, then press * to
proceed to the day field. Enter the appropriate day for
the holiday and press * to accept the entry.

Part ? 12345678
Key 0-8 x x

Holidays can be set for any partition as follows. Press
0 to turn all partitions on or off, or else use keys 1-8 to
toggle the letter x under the partition to which this
holiday will apply. Press the * key when all desired
partitions have been assigned.
The Holiday Number prompt will be displayed again.
Repeat the procedure for each holiday to be
programmed.

When all holidays have been programmed, enter 00 at the HOLIDAY
NUMBER prompt to quit the holiday menus.
– 119 –

Time-Driven Events
These are the schedules used to activate outputs, bypass zones, etc. based on a time
schedule. There are 20 of these events that may be programmed for the system, with
each event governed by the previously defined time windows.
The actions that can be programmed to automatically activate at set times are relay
commands, arm/disarm and zone bypassing commands, and open/close access
conditions.
To fill out the worksheet:
1) First enter the schedule number (01-20) and time window number (0120), and note the day of the week the action is desired.
2) Enter the code for the desired action and action specifier. The action
codes are the events that are to take place when the scheduled time is reached.
Each action also requires an action specifier, which defines what the action will
affect (relay, relay group, partition, zone list, user group). The action specifier
varies, depending on the type of action selected.
The following is a list of the "Action" codes (desired actions) used when
programming time driven events. Note that these codes are independent of the
"relay codes" programmed during the #93 Menu Mode–Relay Programming mode.
Relay Commands
Action Code
01 Relay On
02 Relay Off
03 Relay Close for 2 seconds
04 Relay Close XX minutes (set in field 1*74)
05 Relay Close YY seconds (set in field 1*75)
06 Relay Group On
07 Relay Group Off
08 Relay Group Close for 2 seconds
09 Relay Group Close XX minutes (set in field 1*74)
10 Relay Group Close YY seconds (set in field 1*75)

Action Specifier
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #
Relay Group #

Arm/Disarm Commands
Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices for
automatic arming and disarming functions.
"During" can be used to arm or disarm the control for specific time only. For example,
if "during" is selected with arm-stay, the system will arm-stay at the beginning of the
window and disarm at the end of the window.
Action Code
20 Arm-Stay
21 Arm Away
22 Disarm
23 Force Arm Stay (Auto-bypass faulted zns)
24 Force Arm Away (Auto-bypass faulted zns)

Action Specifier
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)
Partition(s)

The auto-arm warning (field 2*06) applies.

Bypass Commands
Activation times 1 (Beginning), 2 (End), 3 (During) are the only valid choices for
bypass commands. If 3 (During) is selected for auto-bypassing, the system will
bypass the zone(s) specified on a particular Zone List at the beginning of the window
and unbypass the zone(s) at the end of the window. If it is selected for auto
unbypassing, the system will remove the bypass of the zone(s) at the beginning of the
window and will restore the bypass of the zone(s) at the end of the window.

– 120 –

Action Code
30 Auto bypass - Zone list
31 Auto unbypass - Zone list

Action Specifier
Zone list #
Zone list #

Open/Close Windows
Activation time 3 (During) is the only valid choice for these commands.
Action Code
Action Specifier
40 Enable Opening Window by partition
Partition(s)
41 Enable Closing Window by partition
Partition(s)
42 Enable Access Window for Access group
Access Group
3) Enter the desired Activation time, which refers to when the action is
to take place relative to the time window. Select from:
Activation
Time
1
2
3

Description
Beginning of time window
End of time window
During time window active period only (On at beginning of
window, off at end). This can be used in conjunction with the
arm, disarm or bypass commands to control a part of the system
during the window. For example, if bypass is selected to activate
during the window, the zones in the zone list will be bypassed at
the beginning of the window and unbypassed at the end of the
window.
Beginning and end of time window (ex. -Coffee break buzzer). In
this example, if relay pulse was selected, the relay would pulse
for 2 seconds at the beginning of the window, signaling the
beginning of the coffee break. At the end of the window it would
pulse again, signaling the end of coffee break.

Time Driven Events Worksheet
Sched. Time
Num. Window

Day(s)
M T W T F S S H

Action
Desired

Action
Specifier

Activation
Time

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

– 121 –

Time-Driven Event Programming
The following schedules can be used to activate outputs, bypass zones,
arm/disarm the system, etc. based on a time schedule. Up to 20 events can be
programmed for the system. Time windows must first be defined in order to be
used to trigger events.
If using Time Driven Events to control relays and/or Powerline Carrier
devices, the following menu items must first be programmed using #93
Menu Mode - Relay Programming:
• Enter Relay No. (reference identification number)
• Relay Group (if applicable)
• Restriction
• Relay Type (4204 or X-10)
• House code and Unit code if X-10 devices
• ECP address and specific Relay No. if 4204 relays
After entering Scheduling Menu Mode, press 0 until the Timed Events ? prompt
appears.
0

Enter 1 to programme timed events using relay outputs or
X-10 devices.

TIMED EVENT # ?
01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the timed event number to be programmed (01-20)
and press the ✴ key. The system will then prompt the

Timed Events ?
1 Yes 0 = No

user to enter the desired action to be taken.
Enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT prompt to quit the timed
event menus and display the Quit ? prompt.
Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return Quit ?
to the main menu choices and 1 = YES 0 = NO
continue programming. Enter 1 to quit 0
Scheduling Menu Mode.
01 ACTION ?
none
00

Enter the action code for the desired action for this event number
from the list at the left. This could be an output command, an
arming command, or any other time-driven event. Press ✴ to
accept the entry and display the appropriate action specifier
prompt as follows on the next page.

Action Codes:
01=Relay On
02=Relay Off
03=Relay Close for 2 seconds
04=Relay Close XX minutes
05=Relay Close YY seconds

06=Relay Group On
07=Relay Group Off
08=Relay Group Close for 2 seconds
09=Relay Group Close XX minutes
10=Relay Group Close YY seconds

Actions 01-05
Enter the relay number and press ✴

01 RELAY # ?
00

to accept entry. The Time Window ?
prompt appears.
01 RELAY GRP # ?
Actions 06-10
00
Enter the relay group number and
press ✴ to accept entry. The Time

Window ? prompt appears.
20=Arm-Stay
21=Arm Away
22=Disarm
23=Force Arm Stay
24=Force Arm Away
40=Enable Open Window by part
41=Enable Close Window by part

PART? 12345678
Actions 21-24 and 40-41
Enter the partition to which the action Key 0-8 X X
applies. Enter 0 to select all partitions.
Enter a partition number again to
deselect it. Press ✴ to accept entry.
The Time Window ? prompt appears.

– 122 –

30=Auto bypass - Zone list
31=Auto unbypass - Zone list

Actions 30-31
Enter the zone list number which
contains the zones to be bypassed or
unbypassed. Press ✴
to accept

01 ZONE LIST ?
ENTER 1-8
1

entry. The Time Window ? prompt
appears.
42=Enable Access Window for
Access group(s)

Action 42
Enter the group number to which the
time window will apply. Press ✴ to

GROUP ? 12345678

Key 0-8

accept entry. The Time Window ?
prompt appears.
01 Time Window ?
00:00 00:00 01

Enter the time window number (01-20) for which this timed
event is to occur. As the number is keyed in, the actual time
that has been stored for the window will be displayed. Press
the ✴ to continue.

01 Active time ?

Enter the activation code number from 1-4 (listed below). As
the number is keyed in, the activation time will be
displayed. The choices are:
1: Trigger at the start of the window
2: Trigger at the end of the window
3: Take effect only for the duration of the window
4: Trigger at both the start and the end of the
window. Example - coffee break buzzer.
Press the ✴ key when the desired choice is showing.

Days ? MTWTFSSH
Key 0-8 x x

The system will then ask for which days the event is to
be activated. Press 0 to toggle all days on or off or else
press keys 1-8 to toggle the letter x under the day on or
off (Monday = 1, Holiday = H = 8 ).
When all entries have been made, the TIMED EVENT #
prompt is displayed again. Repeat the procedure for each
timed event required by the installation.

When all timed events have been programmed, enter 00 at the TIMED EVENT
prompt to quit this set of menus.

– 123 –

Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet
Limitation of Access is a means by which a user's access code is limited to working
during a certain period of time.. The system provides 8 Access Schedules, each of
which consists of two time windows for each day of the week and two time windows
for holidays (typically one for an opening time window and the second for a closing
time window). If an Access Schedule has been programmed, a user required to follow
that schedule would be assigned to an Access Group of the same number (1-8) when
that user is added to the system. If no limitations apply, enter 0.
Enter the appropriate time window numbers for each access group.
Holiday Note: Holidays used
for access groups are those
defined for partition 1 only.

Acc
Sch

Monday
W1 W2

Tuesday
W1 W2

Wed.
Thursday
W1 W2 W1 W2

Friday
W1 W2

Saturday
W1 W2

Sunday
W1 W2

Holiday
W1 W2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Access Control Schedules
Enter Scheduling Menu Mode [Installer Code] + # 80. After entering Scheduling
Menu Mode, press 0 until the Access Sched. ? prompt appears.
Access Sched. ?
1 Yes 0 = No
0

Enter 1 to programme access schedules.

ACCESS SCHED # ?

Enter the access control schedule number between 01 and 08.
Press * to accept entry.
Enter 00 at the Access Sched # prompt to quit the Access
control menus and display the Quit ? prompt.

01-08, 00 = Quit 01

Enter 0 at the Quit ? prompt to return to the main menu choices
and continue programming. Enter 1 to quit Scheduling Menu
Mode.
MON A1 Window 1?

00:00 00:00

MON A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00

Enter the first time window number from 01-20 for which this
access schedule applies for the displayed day. The actual time
that has been stored for the window will be displayed. Press * to
continue.
Enter the second time window number from 01-20 for which this
access schedule applies for the displayed day. The actual time
that has been stored for the window will be displayed. Press * to
continue.

TUE A1 Window 1?
00:00 00:00
00

Repeat the procedure for the other days of the week. When the
last day of the week has been programmed, the holiday
opening/closing windows may be entered.

Hol A1 Window 1 ?

Enter the first time window number for holidays for which this
access schedule applies. As the number is keyed in, the actual
time that has been stored for the window will be displayed.
Press * to continue.

00:00 00:00 00

Hol A1 Window 2 ?

00:00 00:00 00

– 124 –

Quit ?
1 = YES 0 = NO 0

Enter the second time window number for holidays for which
this access schedule applies. As the number is keyed in, the
actual time that has been stored for the window will be
displayed. Press * to continue.
When all access control schedules have been programmed,
enter 00 at the Access Sched # prompt to quit this set of menus.

#81 Temporary Schedule Menu Mode
Each partition can be assigned a Temporary Schedule which will override the regular
open/close schedule (and the holiday schedule). This schedule takes effect as soon as it
is programmed and remains active for up to one week.
Partition/Windows
1

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Disarm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM
Arm Window
Start Time HH:MM
Stop Time HH:MM

– 125 –

Programming Temporary Schedules
Enter [Security Code] + # + 81 to enter this mode. Note that only users with
authority level of manager or higher can programme temporary schedules.
Temporary schedules only affect the partition from which it is entered.
Temporary schedules can also be reused at later dates simply by scrolling (by
pressing #) to the DAYS? prompt (described below) and activating the
appropriate days. This should be considered when defining daily time
windows.
Mon DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt asks for the start and end time of
disarm (opening) window. Upon entry of this
mode, the cursor will be positioned on the tens of
hours digit of the start time for Monday's disarm
window. Enter the desired hour. Press * to move
to the minutes field. The minutes are entered in
the same manner. The AM/PM indication is
toggled by pressing any key in the 0-9 range while
the cursor is under the letter A/P position. Repeat
for the stop time entry. Press the * key to move to
the arming window for Monday.
Press # if no changes are desired.

Mon ARM WINDOW
00:00AM 00:00AM

This prompt asks for the start and end time of
arm (closing) window. The cursor will be
positioned on the tens of hours digit of the start
time for the arm window. Enter the desired hour.
Press * to move to the minutes field. The minutes
are entered in the same manner. The AM/PM
indication is toggled by pressing any key in the 09 range while the cursor is under the letter A/P
position. Repeat for the stop time entry.
After the windows for that day have been
completed, the system will prompt for disarm and
arm time windows for the next day.
Press # if no changes are desired.

Tue DISARM WIND.
00:00AM 00:00AM

Repeat the procedure described above for all days
of the week.
When all of the days have been completed, the
system will ask which days are to be activated.

Days ? MTWTFSS
Key 0-7 x x

This is the prompt that actually activates the
temporary schedule, and allows the temporary
schedule to be customized to a particular week's
needs. To select the days which are to be
activated, enter 1-7 (Monday = 1). An "X" will
appear under that day, indicating the schedule for
that day is active. Entering a day's number again
will deactivate that day. Pressing 0 will toggle all
days on/off.
The temporary schedule will only be in effect for
the days which have the letter x underneath
them. As the week progresses, the selected days
are reset to the inactive state.
When completed, press * or # to exit the
temporary schedule entry mode.

– 126 –

#83 User Scheduling Menu Mode
The system provides up to 20 "timers" which will be available to the end user
for the purpose of controlling output devices (4204 relays or Powerline
Carrier devices (e.g., X-10). These timers are analogous to the individual
appliance timers that might be purchased at an electrical appliance store.
The output devices themselves are programmed into the system by the
installer during #93 Menu Mode–Relay Programming. The end user needs
only to know the output device number and its alpha descriptor.
The installer may set certain relays to be "restricted" during # 93 Menu
Mode-Relay Programming. These relays may not be controlled by the end
user (prevents end- user from controlling doors, pumps, etc.)
To enter this mode, the user enters [Security Code] + # + 83.
Output Timer # ?
01-20, 00=Quit 01

Enter the output timer number to be programmed (01-20). Press
* to accept entry and move to the next prompt.
Enter 00 to quit and return to normal mode.

06 07:00P 11:45P
PORCH LITE 04

If that timer number has already been programmed, a
summary screen will appear. In this example:
06 = Timer #
04 = Output Device # affected by this timer
PORCH LITE = Descriptor for Output Device # 4
07:00PM = Start Time
11:45PM = Stop Time

Press * to continue.
06 ENTER OUTPUT#

PORCH LITE

Enter the desired output number (01-16)
As the number is entered, the descriptor changes to indicate
which output device is being affected.
Note: 00 entered as the output # deletes the timer (Timer 06
in this example) and displays output descriptor "None".
Devices are programmed via #93 Menu Mode.

06 ON TIME ?
07:00 PM

Enter the ON time in 00:01 - 11:59 format.
When the display shows the desired time, press the * key to
move to the AM/PM field. In this field, any of the keys 0-9 may
be used to toggle the AM/PM indication. Enter 00:00 to skip.
Note: May use two commands to perform an ON one day and an
OFF another day

06 OFF TIME ?
11:45 PM

Enter the OFF time in 00:01 - 11:59 format.
When the display shows the desired time, press the * key to
move to the AM/PM field. In this field, any of the keys 0-9 may
be used to toggle the AM/PM indication. Enter 00:00 to skip.

06 Days? MTWTFSS

To select the days which are to be activated, enter 1-7 (Monday
= 1). An "X" will appear under that day, indicating the output
for that day is active. Entering a day's number again will
deactivate that day. Pressing 0 will toggle all days on/off.

Key 0-7 x x

The outputs will only be in effect for the days which have the
letter x underneath them. As the week progresses, the
selected days are reset to the inactive state, unless the
permanent option is selected (next screen prompt). When
completed, press * to continue.
06 Permanent ?
0 = NO,1 = YES 0

Selecting "Permanent" means that this schedule will be in effect
on a continuous basis. An answer of 0 means means that this
schedule will be in effect for one week only. The letter "x"
under the day will then be cleared.
Press * to accept entry. The system will quit User Scheduling
mode and return to normal mode.

– 127 –

SECTION 23

System Communication
This section provides the following information:
•
•
•
•

The process of a successful transmission
An explanation of reporting formats for this system
Loading communication defaults
Contact ID report codes

A Successful Transmission
When a control panel calls the central station receiver, it waits to hear a
“handshake” frequency from the receiver to confirm that the receiver is online and ready to receive its message. Once the panel hears the handshake it
is programmed to listen for, it sends its message. The panel then waits for a
“kissoff” frequency from the receiver acknowledging that the message was
received and understood.
If the handshake frequency is not given or is not understood by the panel, the
panel will not send its message. Once the handshake frequency is received
and understood by the panel, the panel will send its message. If there is an
error in the transmission (the receiver does not receive a “valid” message),
the kissoff frequency will not be given by the central station receiver.
The panel will make a total of eight attempts to the primary telephone
number and eight attempts to the secondary telephone number (if
programmed) to get a valid message through. If the panel is not successful
after its numerous attempts, the keypad will display “Communication
Failure” (Alpha keypad).

Reporting Formats
The following chart defines the three sets of (handshake/kissoff) frequencies
that the panel supports and the different formats that can be sent for each.
FORMAT

HANDSHAKE

TRANSMITS DATA

KISSOFF

Low Speed

1400Hz

1900Hz (10PPS)

1400Hz

3+1
4+1
4+2
Sescoa/Rad 2300Hz

TRANSMIT TIME
Under 15 secs.
(Standard report)

1800Hz (20PPS)

2300Hz

Under 10 secs.

3+1
4+1
4+2
Express

(Standard report)

1400–2300Hz

DTMF (10 cps)

1400Hz

Under 3 secs.

4+2
High Speed

1400–2300Hz

DTMF (10 cps)

1400Hz

Under 5 secs.

Contact ID

1400–2300Hz*

DTMF (10 cps)

1400Hz

Under 3 secs.

* Only 2300Hz for Robofon version
ADVISORY: Ademco's Contact ID reporting is capable of uniquely reporting
all 128 zones of information, as well as openings and closings for all 150
users, to central stations equipped with the Ademco 685 receiver using
software level 4.4 or higher. Must be level 4.7 or higher to fully support all
new VISTA-120 report codes. 685 software levels below 4.4 cannot support
Contact ID reporting. For information regarding updating the 685 receiver,
contact your nearest Ademco Support location.
– 128 –

The following describes each format in greater detail.
3+1 and 4+1 Standard Formats
3+1 and 4+1 Expanded Formats

4+2 Format
Ademco Contact ID
Reporting Format
Ademco Expanded High Speed

Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number and a single
digit report code (e.g. Alarm, Trouble, Restore, Open, Close, etc).
Comprised of a 3- (or 4-) digit subscriber number, and a two-digit
report code. The first digit is displayed on the first line, followed
by a second line where the first digit is repeated 3 (or 4) times
and followed by the second digit. This is the “expanded” digit.
Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number and 2-digit report
code.
Comprised of a 4-digit subscriber number, 1-digit event qualifier
("new" or "restore"), 3-digit event code, 2-digit Partition No., and
3-digit zone number, user number, or system status number.
Comprised of 13 digits as follows: A 4-digit account number +
eight channels of zone information (1-8 or duress plus 9-15) +
one status channel, which identifies the type of events being
reported in the eight zone locations.

Report

3+1/4+1
Standard

3+1/4+1
Expanded

4+2
Low Spd or
Express

Alarm

SSS(S) A

SSSS AZ

Trouble

SSS(S) T

Bypass

SSS(S) B

ACMains Loss

SSS(S) E

SSS(S) A
AAA(A) Z
SSS(S) T
TTT(T) t
SSS(S) B
BBB(B) b
SSS(S) E
EEE(E) AC

Low Batt

SSS(S) L

SSSS Tt
SSSS Bb
SSSS EAC

SSS(S) L

SSSS LLB

LLL(L) LB
Open

SSS(S) O

SSS(S) C

Test

SSS(S) G

Restore
Alarm
AC Mains Restore

SSS(S) R

LoBat Res.
Trouble Res.
Bypass Res.

SSS(S) RA

SSS(S) O
OOO(O) U
SSS(S) C
CCC(C) U
SSS(S) G
GGG(G)g
SSS(S) R
RRR(R) Z
SSS(S) RA

SSSS OU

SSS(S) RL

RARARA(RA)Ac
SSS(S) RL

SSSS RLLB

SSS(S) RT

RLRLRL(RL)LB
SSS(S) RT

SSSS RTt

SSSS CU
SSSS Gg
SSSS RZ

RTRTRT (RT)t
SSS(S) RB
RBRBRB (RB)b

SSS(S) RB

SSSSRA Ac

SSSS RBb

Where:
SSS or

SSSS =
A=
Z=
Tt =
Bb =

Subscriber ID
Alarm Code-1st digit
Typically Zone Number*-2nd digit
Trouble Code (1st & 2nd digits)
Bypass Code (1st & 2nd digits)

EAC =
LLB =

Low Battery Code(1st & 2nd digits)

RBb =
RAAC =

Restore Code (AC Mains)1st & 2nd digits

Open Code-1st Digit

RLLB =

Restore Code (Bat)1st & 2nd digits

AC Mains Loss Code (1st & 2nd digits)

C=
U=
Gg =
R=
RTt =

*Zone numbers for:
[✴] + [#], or [B] = 99;
[1] + [✴], or [A] = 95;
Duress = 92

Close Code-1st Digit
User Number (1st & 2nd digits)
Test Code (1st & 2nd digits)
Restore Code (Alarm)1st & 2nd digits
Restore Code (Trbl)1st & 2nd digits
Restore Code (Byps)1st & 2nd digits

[3] + [#], or [C] = 96;

– 129 –

Ademco Contact ID Reporting takes the following format:
CCCC QEEE GG ZZZ
where: CCCC = Customer (subscriber) ID
Q = Event qualifier, where:
E = new event , and R = restore
EEE = Event code (3 hexadecimal digits)
GG = Partition Number (system messages show “00”)
ZZZ = Zone/contact ID number reporting the alarm, or user
number for open/close reports. System status
messages (AC Loss, Walk Test, etc.) contain zeroes in
the ZZZ location.
Ademco Expanded High Speed Reporting events by channel:
Channels 1 through 8 could have one of the following conditions:
1 = NEW EVENT
2 = OPENING (Status Channel Always = 2)*
3 = RESTORE
4 = CLOSING (Status Channel Always = 4)*
5 = NORMAL, NO EVENT TO REPORT
6 = PREVIOUSLY REPORTED, NOT YET RESTORED
* NOTE: Channel 1 will contain the user ID 1-9, A-F if Open/Close reporting
is enabled.
The status channel might have one of the following conditions:
1 = DURESS (For Duress Plus Channels 9-15 Only)
2 = OPENING
3 = BYPASS (For Channels 1-8 Only)
4 = CLOSING
5 = SUPERVISORY/TROUBLE (For Channels 1-8 Only)
6 = SYSTEM STATUS:
• AC MAINS LOSS in Channel 1
• LOW BATTERY in Channel 2
• TIME SET in Channel 3
• LOG CLEAR in Channel 3
• LOG 50% FULL in Channel 3
• LOG 90% FULL in Channel 3
• LOG OVERFLOW in Channel 3
• POWER ON RESET in Channel 4
• WALK TEST START, END in Channel 8
7 = NORMAL ALARM STATUS (Channels 1-8 Only)
9 = TEST REPORT
A typical expanded high speed report may look as follows:
1234 5115 5555 7 (Acct #1234 with alarms on channels 2 and 3)
LIMITATIONS
1. When using Ademco Expanded High Speed, remember there are only 15
channels available, plus a duress channel. If more than 15 zones are
being used, they will have to share channels.
2. With Ademco Expanded High Speed reporting, channels 9-15 cannot
report troubles or bypasses. Use these channels for zones that will not
report these conditions.
3. Only user numbers 1-15 can be uniquely reported with open/close reports
in Ademco Expanded High Speed.

– 130 –

Loading Communication Defaults
To help expedite the installation, the system provides 4 different
communication defaults (Low Speed, Ademco Express, Ademco High Speed &
Ademco's Contact ID). These defaults automatically programme industrystandard code assignments for zones, keypad panics, non-alarm and
supervisory conditions, and can be loaded at any time without affecting noncommunication programme fields.
You may load communications defaults at any time. However, it is
recommended that the panel be defaulted first (*97) only if no other
programming has been done. If other programming has already been
done, there is no need to default the panel.
To load communication defaults, do the following:
Enter programme mode [Installer Code] + 8 0 0. Once the Programming
mode is entered, first press *94 and then enter one of the following field
numbers:
TABLE OF DEFAULT PROGRAMMING COMMANDS
PRESS
*80
*81
*82
*83

TO LOAD THIS DEFAULT PROGRAMME SET
Low Speed communication defaults
Ademco 4 + 2 Express communication defaults
Ademco High Speed communication defaults
Contact ID communication defaults

– 131 –

TABLE OF CONTACT ID EVENT CODES
Code
110
111
113
121
122
123
124
125
131
132
133
134
135
140
142
150
200
301
302
305
306
308
309
310
311
320
321
322
332
333
338
339
342
343
351
352
354
373
374
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
389
401
403

– 132 –

Definition
Fire Alarm
Smoke Alarm (Fire w/Verification)
Water Flow Alarm
Duress
Silent Panic
Audible Panic
Duress Access Grant
Duress Egress Grant
Perimeter Burglary
Interior Burglary
24 Hour Burglary
Entry/Exit Burglary
Day/Night Burglary
ACS Zone Alarm
Polling Loop Short Alarm
24 Hour Auxiliary
Fire Supervisory
AC Loss
Low System Battery
System Reset
Programme Tamper
System Shutdown
Battery Test Fail
Ground Fault
System Engineer Reset
ACS Relay Supervision
Bell 1 Trouble
Bell 2 Trouble
Poll Loop Short-Trouble
Expansion Module Failure
ACS Module Low Battery
ACS Module Reset
ACS Module AC Loss
ACS Module Self-Test Fail
Main Dialer Trouble
Backup Dialer Trouble
ACS RS232 Fail
Fire Loop Trouble
Exit Error by Zone
Trouble (global)
Loss of Supervision (RF)
Loss of RPM Supervision
RPM Sensor Tamper
RF Transmitter Low Battery
High Sensitivity Maintenance Signal
Low Sensitivity Maintenance Signal
Detector Self-Test Failed
O/C By User
Power-Up Armed/Auto-Arm

Code
406
407
408
409
411
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
441
451
452
453
454
455
457
459
501
520
521
522
524
551
570
576
577
602
604
607
608
611
612
621
622
623
624
625
631
632

Definition
Cancel by User
Remote Arm/Disarm (Download)
Quick Arm
Keyswitch O/C
Call back Requested
Access Denied
Access Granted
Door Force Open
Egress Denied
Egress Granted
Door Prop Open
Access Point DSM Trouble
Access Point RTE Trouble
ACS Programme Entry
ACS Programme Exit
ACS Threat Change
Access Point Relay/Trigger Fail
Access Point DSM Shunt/Unshunt
Access Point RTE Shunt
Armed STAY
Early Open/Close
Late Open/Close
Fail to Open
Fail to Close
Auto-arm Fail
Exit Error by User
Recent Close
ACS Reader Disable
ACS Relay Disable
Bell 1 Bypass
Bell 2 Bypass
Auxiliary Relay Bypass
Main/Backup Dialer Bypass
Bypass
ACS Zone Shunt
ACS Point Bypass
Communicator Test
Fire Test
Burglary Walk Test
Off-Normal
Fire Walk Test – Point Tested
Fire Walk Test – Point Not Tested
Event Log Reset
Event Log 50% Full
Event Log 90% Full
Event Log Overflow
Time/Date Reset
Exception Schedule Change
Access Schedule Change

COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING GUIDE
Field #

Low Speed

Contact ID

High Speed

Express

*46, *48

Choose transmission
speed and frequency

No effect

*52, *53

Send as either 4+2
or expanded

No effect

*79, *80

Enables alarm restores

*49

Add checksum digit

No effect

Add checksum digit

No effect

*50

Sescoa/Radionics;
Selects fixed digit time
instead of fixed interdigit.

No effect

NOTES

Note: Low Speed will
not send 3+2
messages. Zone ID
digit is suppressed.

Loading communication defaults results in the following
• Selects low speed, standard format, with no checksum, for both phone
Low Speed
numbers.
(*94*80)
• Assigns the following report codes:
03 for zones 002-047, 056-128
01 for zones 001 & 048-055 (fire zones)
02 for zones 062, 063 (panic trans), & 995, 996, 999 (keypad panics)
09 for all alarm restores
• Enables all zone type restores.
For "expanded" reporting, enable fields *52 and *53.
ADEMCO Express
(*94*81)

• Selects Ademco express reporting format, with checksum, for both phone
numbers.
• Report codes for zones 1-99, RF receiver, and keypad panics are sent as their
respective zone ID numbers (01-86, 88-91, 95-99), Duress is sent as "DD".
Alarm restore is "E" + 2nd digit.
• Enables all zone type restores.

ADEMCO High Speed
(*94*82)

• Selects Ademco High Speed format, with no checksum, for both phone
numbers.
• Zone reporting is assigned to channels as described later in this section.
• Enables all zone type restores.
• Enables Duress to be sent.

ADEMCO's Contact ID
(*94*83)

•
•
•
•

Selects Contact ID format for both phone numbers.
Reporting is enabled for all zones.
Enables all zone type restores.
Refer to the SYSTEM COMMUNICATION section for event code
definitions.

– 133 –

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for LOW SPEED FORMAT (*94*80)
*45

PRIMARY FORMAT

Ademco Low Speed

*46

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

Ademco Low Speed

*47

SECONDARY FORMAT

Ademco Low Speed

*48

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*49

CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

*51

DUAL REPORTING

*52

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
0

No checksum

*50

Ademco Low Speed

Alarm

*53

Primary

Alarm

Secondary

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT 0

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
0

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

Radionics

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPRESS FORMAT (*94*81)
*45

PRIMARY FORMAT

*46

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*47

SECONDARY FORMAT

Ademco Express

*51

DUAL REPORTING

*52

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
0

Ademco Express

Alarm

*48

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*49

CHECKSUM VERIFICATION
No checksum

*50

*53

0
0
Primary

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Alarm

Secondary

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
0

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

Radionics

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO EXPANDED HIGH SPEED FORMAT (*94*82)
*45

PRIMARY FORMAT

Ademco Exp. High Spd*51

*46

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*52

*47

SECONDARY FORMAT

*48

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*49

CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

*50

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

No checksum

Alarm

*53

Primary

Alarm

Secondary

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
0

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
0

Ademco Exp. High Spd

DUAL REPORTING

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

Radionics

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS for ADEMCO's CONTACT ID FORMAT (*94*83)
*45

PRIMARY FORMAT

*46

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Primary)

*47

SECONDARY FORMAT

*48

LOW SPEED FORMAT (Sec.)

*49

CHECKSUM VERIFICATION

Ademco Contact ID

*50

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT

Radionics

*51

DUAL REPORTING

*52

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR PRIMARY
0

Primary

Alarm

Secondary

No checksum

*53

Bypass

Trbl

standard

Opn/Cls Low Bat

STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT FOR SECONDARY
0
Alarm

– 134 –

0
Rstr

Rstr

Bypass

Trbl

Opn/Cls Low Bat

standard

Communication Defaults For Zones
To programme report codes, see Report Code Programming in the #93 MENU MODE PROGRAMMING section.
ZONE #
LOW SPEED
EXPRESS
HIGH SPEED CONTACT ID
1st
2nd
1st
2nd
1st
2nd
1st
2nd
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057

01
01
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
03
03

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07

01
01
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
04
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
05
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
06
06

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

- 135 -

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES (cont'd)

– 136 –

ZONE #

LOW SPEED
1st
2nd

EXPRESS
1st
2nd

HIGH SPEED
1st
2nd

CONTACT ID
1st
2nd

058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114

03
03
03
03
02
02
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03

05
05
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
06
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
07
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
08
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
09
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
11

06
06
06
06
09
09
06
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13

13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES (cont'd)
ZONE #

LOW SPEED
1st
2nd

EXPRESS
1st
2nd

HIGH SPEED
1st
2nd

CONTACT ID
1st
2nd

115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826

03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
03
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

11
11
11
11
11
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
13
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

10
11
12
13
14
15
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

- 137 -

COMMUNICATION DEFAULTS FOR ZONES (cont'd)

– 138 –

ZONE # LOW SPEED
1st

EXPRESS
2nd
1st

HIGH SPEED
2nd
1st

CONTACT ID
2nd
1st

2nd

827
828
829
830
831
988
990
995
996
997
999
ALARM RST.
TROUBLE
TRBLE. RST
BYPASS
BYPASS RST.
DURESS (992)

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
08
00
05
06
07
09
00
00
00
00
00
13

00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

00
00
00
00
00
07
07
02
02
07
02
09
05
09
00
00
02

00
00
00
00
00
08
09
09
09
09
09
14
15
14
00
00
13

00
00
00
00
00
07
08
10
11
07
12
01
01
01
00
00
01

00
00
00
00
00
09
10
04
05
12
06
01
01
01
00
00
11

SECTION 24

Downloading
This section provides the following information:
• General information about downloading
• Getting on-line with a control panel
• Advisories
• Access security
• Connecting the 4100SM module for direct wire downloading

General
Information

Downloading allows the operator to remotely access, programme, and control the
security system over normal telephone lines. Anything that can be done directly
from the keypad can be done remotely, using ADEMCO's VLINK® downloading
software. To communicate with the control panel, the following is required:
1. An IBM PC compatible 286, 386, 486 or Pentium computer with at least 1MB
RAM, a hard disk with 12MB available disk space, running MS DOS 3.1 or
higher operating system.
2. An Ademco designated compatible modem.
3. Alternately, you may use a 4100SM interface module to "direct wire" the
control panel to your computer at the site (see Figure .)
4. V-LINK® DOWNLOADING software, from ADEMCO. This software is
available on both 3-1/2" and 5-1/4" diskettes, and includes a complete User's
Manual.

Getting On-Line
with a Control
Panel

At the protected premises, the Control panel must be connected to the existing
telephone line (refer to the PHONE LINE CONNECTIONS section). No
programming of the panel is required before downloading to an initial
installation.
To download, do the following:
1. Enter the installer code + [#] + [5]. The panel temporarily enables a ring
count of 5 and sets the Download Callback option to "1" (callback not
required).
2. Call the panel using the downloader software set to "FIRST
COMMUNICATION" mode.
3. The downloader will establish a session with no callback. The panel
information can then be downloaded.
In order to remotely access, control, or programme the alarm panel, a "link"
must be established between the computer and the control panel, as follows:
a. The computer calls up the Control panel. (The phone number for each
customer is entered into the customer's account file on the computer).
b. The Control panel "answers" at the pre-programmed ring count and
executes a handshake with the computer.
c. The computer sends a request for call-back to the Control, unless callback is not required.
4. The panel acknowledges the request and hangs up. During the next few
seconds, the Control will process the request making sure certain encrypted
information, received from the computer, matches data in its own memory.
5. Upon a successful match, the Control panel will seize the phone line and call
the computer back, unless call-back is not required.
6. The computer answers, usually by the second ring, and executes a handshake
with the panel.
6. The panel then sends other default information to the computer. If this
information matches the computer's information, a successful link is
established. This is known as being "ON-LINE".

- 139 -

1. Alarm and trouble responses and reports are only disabled during EEROM
update during on-line time. Should an event occur during this time, the
response will take place and the report will go through as soon as the remote
access sequence is completed. Alarm and trouble conditions are not ignored,
they are simply delayed. At other times during the on-line session, the control
will signal the PC that an alarm has occurred and will break off the session to
transmit alarms.
2. The keypads are inactive during downloading communication, and resume
normal functions after hang up. All keypad entries are ignored during on-line
time.

On-Line Control
Functions

The following functions can be performed while on-line with a control panel:
• Arm the System in the Away Mode; Disarm the System (if field *38 Armed
Restriction is not programmed)
• Bypass a Zone
• Force the System to Accept a New Programme Download
• Shut Down Communication (dialler) Functions (non-payment of
monitoring fees in an owned system)
• Shut Down all Security System Functions (non-payment for a leased
system)
• Inhibit Local Keypad Programming (prevents takeover of your accounts)
• Leave a message for customer
• Command the System to Upload a Copy of its Resident Programme to the
office
• Read: Arming Status, AC Mains Status, List of Faulted Zones, List of
Bypassed Zones, 224 Event Log, List of Zones Currently in Alarm, List of
Zones Currently in Trouble
• Set the Real-Time clock.
• Initiate a test report from the control.
• Command relays/triggers to activate and de-activate.

Access Security

Accessing the Control from a remote location is protected against compromise
by the use of 4 levels of protection:
1. Security Code Handshake: The subscriber's account number as well as an
8-digit ID number (known only to the office) must be matched between
the Control and computer.
2. Hang-Up and Call-Back: The Control panel will "hang-up" and call the
computer back at the pre-programmed number only if the security codes
match.
3. Data Encryption: All data that is exchanged between the computer and
Control is encrypted to reduce the possibility of anyone "tapping" the line
and corrupting data. Additionally, all account files are encrypted to
prevent them from being opened on another installer's VLink®
downloading software package.
4. Operator Access Levels: Up to 15 operators can have access to the
DOWNLOADER, each having their own log-on code. However, each
operator can be assigned one of three levels of access in both FILE and
COMMAND functions, as follows:
FILE ACCESS:
Read Only: able only to look at the database; cannot change any
information, and cannot see the customer's access codes.
Part Read/Write: able to look at and change all information. except the
customer's access codes.
Full Read/Write: able to look at and change any and all information in
the database.

– 140 –

CONTROL/COMM ACCESS:
Read Only: able only to Upload and arm the system. Not able to
DISARM, BYPASS, or change any information.
Part Read/Write: able to ARM, BYPASS, UPLOAD, DOWNLOAD but
cannot shutdown the system.
Full Read/Write: able to perform all control and status commands, as
well as shutdown all or part of the system.

connection is to be temporary, and is not part of the permanent installation. Direct
wire downloading is meant as a tool for the installer during the installation
process.
The connections between the Control and the 4100SM are different than those
shown in the 4100SM Installation Instructions. See the diagram below for correct
connections. In addition, when the "green" wire is referred to in step 2 of the IN CASE
OF DIFFICULTY section of the 4100SM Instructions, use the "violet" wire.
Connector J8, located above connector J7 on the right hand side of the main PC
board (see the Summary of Connections diagram on the inside back cover of this
manual), is intended to be interfaced to either a local serial printer (see EVENT
LOG PRINTER CONNECTIONS) or a computer. Make connections to a
computer as shown below. Note that the violet wire connection for a
computer differs from that used when connecting a serial printer.
1

J8 CONNECTOR
BLACK

BLUE

GR
OU
ND
GR
OU
ND

GREEN

OU
T6

RED

OU
T5

GR
OU
ND

BROWN

NU
PR IN 2
INT
GR ER D VIOLET
OU TR
ND
GRAY
IN
3
YELLOW

Connecting a
4100SM Module
for Direct Wire
Downloading

NOTES:
1. Each time the Control panel is accessed successfully, a PROGRAMME
TAMPER report (*81) is sent to central station, if programmed.
2. When downloading, the keypad displays "MODEM COMM."
3. Whenever a download or a save is done, an automatic time stamp is done,
indicating the date and time of the last download (or save) and the
operator ID number.
4. The average time for a complete download, including initial call-up,
hang-up and call-back is under 4 minutes.
5. A complete hard copy of each individual account can be obtained by
connecting a printer to the computer. Refer to your computer owner's
manual or contact your distributor for printer recommendations.
The Control can be downloaded without using a modem or telephone line by using
VLINK® Software and a 4100SM Serial Module. The direct wire downloading

4142TR CABLE (SUPPLIED WITH 4100SM)
4100SM SERIAL MODULE
To TB6 Aux. Power (+)
(25mA current draw)
To TB7 Aux. Power (-)

+ PWR

- (GND)

RXD

not used

TXD

not used

RED

BLUE WHITE

Figure 31: Direct Wire Downloading Connections

- 141 -

SECTION 25

Setting The Real - Time Clock
This section provides the following information:
• General information about the real-time clock
• Setting the time and date

General Information
This system provides a real-time clock, which must be set in order for the
system's event log to keep track of events by time and date. It must also be
set in order to execute scheduling programs (time-driven events).
Use a keypad to set the real-time clock, or set the clock via the Downloader
software. Only users with installer or master authority level can set the real-time
clock.

Setting the Time and Date
1. Enter installer or master code + # 63. Typical display shows
TIME/DATE
12:01 AM

–– THU
01/01/90

2. The day of the week is automatically calculated based on the date
entered. Time and date entries are made by simply entering the
appropriate hour, minute, day, month, and year.
Press the ✴ key to accept the entered value. The cursor then moves to
the right.
Press the ✴

key to move the cursor to the left of the display, to the

previous position.
Enter the correct hour then press ✴

to move to the minutes and make

the correct entry.
Press ✴ again, then press any key 0-9 to set AM/PM (or enter in 24
hour format, if selected in field 1*55). Press any key again to change AM
to PM, or PM to AM.
Press ✴ to move cursor to the day position and enter the correct day
using a 2-digit entry.
Press ✴ and enter the correct month.
Press ✴ and enter the correct year.
3. Exit clock mode by pressing the ✴
position.

– 142 –

key after the cursor is in the year

PART 3

SYSTEM OPERATION
AND TESTING

- 143 -

SECTION 26

Security Access Codes
This section provides the following information:
• General information about security access codes
• Definition of user authority levels
• How to add a user access code
• How to change a user access code
• How to delete a user access code

General
Information

This system allows a total of 150 security access codes to be allocated, each
identified by a user ID number.
Note that regardless of the number of partitions each code has access to,
it occupies only one user slot in the system. If a particular code is not
used in all partitions, that user ID number cannot be used again.
The Quick Arm feature can also be programmed (partition-specific programme
field *29), which allows the [#] key to be pressed instead of entering the security
code when arming the system. The security code must always be entered to
disarm the system.
1. User #2 must be programmed for the Quick Arm feature to function.
2. In order to protect the system from attempts to defeat the security access code by
trying many possible codes in sequence, the system has code tampering protection.
If someone enters 20 keystrokes at a keypad within a 15 minute period, all further
keypad entries from keypads in this partition will be ignored for the 15 minute period.
This protection will then be repeated indefinitely.

User Codes &
Levels Of Authority

Each user of the system can be assigned a level of authority (tells system what
system functions that user is authorized to do), and can have different levels of
authority within different partitions. In general, users can perform most system
functions, including Test and Chime modes, but certain authority levels restrict
disarming, bypassing or the assigning of other user codes. These restrictions are
noted in the descriptions below.
Use the "View Capabilities" keypad function to view the partitions and authority
levels for which a particular user is authorized. In highest to lowest ranking, these
levels are described below.
Auth

– 144 –

Title

Installer

Master

Manager

Operator level A

Operator level B

Operator level C

Duress

Level 0: Installer (User 1)
• Programmed in field *00 (default=4-1-4-0). Installer open/close reporting is
selected in field *39.
• Can perform all system functions (arm, disarm, bypass, etc.), but cannot
disarm if armed by another code (or by Quick Arm).
• Can add, delete, or change all other authority level codes, and can select
open/close reports for any user.
• Is the only code that can enter programme mode, but even this can be
prevented by exiting programme mode using *98. (The only way to access
Programming mode if this done is by powering down the system, powering up
again, and then pressing both the * and # keys at the same time within 30
seconds of power up.)
• Must programme at least one master code during initial installation. Master
codes are codes intended for use by the primary user(s ) of the system.

Open/Close Reporting
Note: When adding a user, the system will only prompt for Open/Close reporting
capability if the user is being added by the Installer. When a Master or Manager
adds a new user, the new user's Open/Close reporting enable will be the same as
that of the Master or Manager adding the user. If Open/Close reports are
required to be selectable by the Master or Manager, the Installer should assign
two Master or Manager user codes: one with Open/Close reporting enabled, and
one without.
Note that Open/Close reporting of Quick Arm is enabled if User 2 is enabled for
Open/Close reporting, and that Quick Arm reports as User 0. In order for Quick
Arm reports to be sent for all partitions, User #02 must have authority and
Open/Close enabled for all partitions. If a code with access to all partitions is not
desired, it is suggested that user #02 be assigned authority level 5 in all
partitions, and that the code be kept secret. Authority level 5 cannot disarm the
system unless armed by that user.

Level 1: Master Codes
• Can perform all normal system functions
• Can be used to assign up to 148 lower level codes, which can be used by other
users of the system.
• Cannot assign anybody a level of 0 or 1.
• May change his own code.
• Can add, delete, change manager or operator codes. Each user's code can be
individually eliminated or changed at any time.
• Open/close reporting of added users are same as that of the master or
manager adding the new user.

Level 2: Manager Codes
• Can perform all system functions (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, etc.) programmed by
Master.
• May add, delete or change other users of the system below this level (Manager
cannot assign anybody a level of 0, 1, or 2).
• May change his own code.
• Open/close reporting of added users will be same as his own (enabled or
disabled as assigned by installer or master).

- 145 -

Levels 3-5: Operator Codes
• Can arm and disarm the system to the authority assigned, but cannot add or
modify any user code.
• May operate a partition with one of the three OPERATOR authority levels A
through C listed below.
Level

Title

Functions Permitted

Operator A

Arm, Disarm, Bypass

Operator B

Arm, Disarm

Operator C

Arm, Disarm only if armed with same code

• Operator C (sometimes known as Baby-sitter code), cannot disarm the system
unless the system was armed with that code. This code is usually assigned to
persons who may have the need to arm and disarm the system at specific
times only (ex. a baby-sitter needs to control the system only when babysitting).

Level 6: Duress
• Sends a silent alarm to a central monitoring station if the user is being forced
to disarm (or arm) the system under threat (only useful if the system is
connected to a central station).
• When the system's Auxiliary Voltage Triggers are connected to another
communication media (Derived Channel/Long Range Radio), note that duress
is signaled on the same trigger that signals silent panic (whereas duress has
its own unique report when digitally communicated).
• Assigned on a partition by partition basis and can be any code or codes
desired.
• Will disarm (or arm) the system, but will also send a silent alarm to the
central station (if service is connected). There will be no indication at the
keypad that an alarm was sent..
Duress Reporting Note: The Duress report triggering logic activates on the 5th key
depression (such as OFF), not the 4th key depression (last digit of code). Duress
reports will not be triggered if the 5th key is a [*], such as when performing a GOTO or
viewing the capabilities of a user.

General Rules on Authority Levels and Changes
The following rules apply to users when making modifications within the
system based on the user code authority levels:
• Master Codes and all lower level codes can be used interchangeably when
performing system functions within a partition (a system armed with a
user's temporary code can be disarmed with the Master Code or another
user's temporary code), except the Operator Level C Code described above.
• A user may not delete or change the user code of the SAME or HIGHER
authority than which he is assigned.
• A user (levels 0, 1 & 2 only) may only ADD users to a LOWER authority
level.
• A user may assign other users access to only those partitions to which he
himself has access.
• A user can only be DELETED or CHANGED from within the partition he
is assigned.
• User numbers must be entered as 3-digit entries. Single digit user
numbers must, therefore, always be preceded by a "00" (example, 003, 004,
005, etc.). Make sure the end user understands this requirement.
Temporary codes are entered as 4-digit numbers.
– 146 –

Ademco Contact ID format is capable of reporting Users 001-150 uniquely. If any
other report format is used, only user numbers #1 - #15 can uniquely report to the
central station. Users #16 - #150 will report as User #15.

Multiple Partition
Access Examples

Each user is programmed for a primary (home) partition. A user can also be
given access to operate one or more partitions. In addition, within each partition,
each user may be programmed to have different levels of authority. For example,
User #3, the V.P. of Engineering, could be assigned to work within the
Engineering Department (Partition 1) of ABC Manufacturing. Since he needs the
full capabilities in his area, he is assigned as a MASTER with Level 1 authority.
This means he may Arm, Disarm, Bypass, Add or Modify users in partition 1.
It is also a requirement that he be able to gain access to the manufacturing area
(partition 2) on an emergency basis. You can set this up easily with the
partitioned system by now requesting that he also be assigned to partition 2,
with a level of authority set lower, such as Level 4 (OPERATOR Level B) which
allows him to Arm and Disarm, but nothing else. The control will automatically
assign him the same user number within partition 2 and does not require
reprogramming of his already existing 4 digit security code.

EXAMPLE OF MULTIPLE PARTITION ACCESS
Part 1
8

Part 2

User 3
Level 1
Master

User 3
Level 4
Oper B

Part 3

Part 4

Part 5

Part 6

Part 7

Part

In the above example, User 3 has MASTER authority in partition 1 and
OPERATOR B authority in partition 2. His user number is the same for both
partitions. Note that if a user number is already being used in a partition, the
system will automatically assign an unused User number. Also notice that no
access is allowed for this user into partitions 3 - 8. Attempts to access these
partitions would be denied automatically.

To ADD a Master,
Manager or
Operator Code

During user code entry, normal key depressions at other keypads in a
partition will be ignored. However, panic key depression will cause an alarm
and terminate user entry.
Enter Installer Code†+ [8] + new user # (002-150) + new user's code
†Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than
the code being changed (i.e. Master code can add a Manager or Operator level code,
but cannot add another Master code; a Manager code can add an Operator level
code, but cannot add a Master or another Manager code).
Keypad will prompt for the Authority Level for this user.
Enter the level number as follows:
1 = Master (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, add or modify lower
level users)
2 = Manager (Arm, Disarm, Bypass, add or modify
lower level users)
3 = Operator Level A (Arm, Disarm, Bypass)
4 = Operator Level B ( Arm, Disarm)
5 = Operator Level C ( Arm, Disarm only if system
armed with this code)
6 = Duress (Arm, Disarm, triggers silent panic alarm)
Keypad will then prompt for Open/Close reporting option

User Number = 003
Enter Auth. Level

- 147 -

for this user.
Open/Close Rep.?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not
arming/disarming by this user will trigger opening &
closing reports. This prompt appears only if the installer
code is used to add a user.

Access Group?
Enter 0-8

If access schedules have been programmed, this prompt
appears. Enter the user's access group number (1-8) if
this user should have limited access to the system. Enter
0 if no access group should be assigned.

RF Button ?
0=NO , 1=YES

If a 5800 series button transmitter has been enabled for
arming/disarming functions, and is not assigned to a
user, this prompt will appear. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).

Enter Button ZN #
(001-128)

If yes was given as the answer to the RF button
question, the zone number for the button will be
requested. Enter any one of the zone numbers assigned
to the button transmitter as AWAY, STAY or DISARM.
The system will then assign all buttons of the
transmitter to this user number.

Multi-Access ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) if the user is to have access to this
partition only. Press 1 (YES) if the user is to have
access to more than one partition.
If NO, the
programme exits this mode. If yes, the Keypad prompts
for the Global Arm option for this user.

Global Arm ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not
this user will be allowed to arm more than one partition
via Global Arm prompts (described in the KEYPAD
FUNCTIONS section). The keypad now prompts for the
user’s access to the next partition.

Part. 2 – SHOP ?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES), depending on whether or not
this user will have access to the displayed partition
number. If NO, the keypad displays this prompt for the
next partition number in sequence.
If YES, the keypad prompts for the following:
• User’s authority level in the displayed partition (see
Authority Level prompt above).
• Open/Close option for this user in the displayed
partition (see Open/Close prompt above).
• Global Arm option for this user in the displayed
partition.
When all partitions have been displayed, the keypad
will scroll through all partitions to which access has
been assigned, and will display the user number,
authority level, open/close and global arm options that
were programmed for each partition the user was
granted access. For example:

Part. 1 A0✴ WHSE
User 003 Auth=3G.

– 148 –

Note that the “G” following the authority level indicates
that the global arm feature is enabled for this user in
the displayed partition, and that the period at the end
of the second line indicates open/close reporting is
enabled for this user in the displayed partition. The "✴"
indicates the partition from which the user may be
changed or deleted.

To CHANGE a
Master, Manager
or Operator Code

Enter Installer code* + [8] + User number (002-150) + new user's code.
* Or Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority than
the code being changed. (i.e. Master code can change a Manager or Operator level
code, but cannot change another Master code; a Manager code can change an
Operator level code, but cannot change a Master or another Manager code).
The system detects that the user number is already
assigned and will prompt if this is a new user. Press 0
(NO). The system will then confirm that the change is
allowed based on authorization level.

User Number = 003
NEW USER?

Adding An RF Key
To An Existing
User

To add an RF key to an existing user, or to change a user's global arm option, first
delete that user's code, then re-add the user code as described in the "Add A User"
paragraph.

To Delete a Master,
Manager or
Operator Code

Enter your code* + [8] + User number (002-150) + your code again
* Installer, Master or Manager code, but must be code with higher level of authority
than the code being deleted. (i.e. Master code can delete a Manager or Operator
code, but cannot delete another Master code; a Manager code can delete an Operator
level code, but cannot delete a Master or another Manager code).
The system will prompt to confirm that you want to delete
this user. Press 0 (NO) or 1 (YES).
If yes, that user's code will be removed from all partitions to
which it had been assigned, and all authorization levels and
other information about that user will be deleted. Note that
a user can only be deleted by a user with a higher authority
level. A user cannot delete himself.

OK TO DELETE 003?

0=NO

1=YES

A user code can only be deleted from the partition through which it was entered. If
trying to delete from another partition, the message "User [XXX] Not Deleted" will be
displayed.

To EXIT The User
Edit Mode

Press either [✴] or [#], or don't press any key for 10 seconds.

;

- 149 -

SECTION 27

Keypad Functions
This section provides the following information:
• General information about keypad usage
• Basic keypad functions
• Global arming
• Access control
• Delaying closing time
• Executing the "Go To" command
• Viewing:
Built-in user's guide
A user's capabilities
Zone descriptors
Downloaded messages
• Speed keys' macro commands
• Executing #70 Manual Relay Activation mode

General
Information

The keypad allows the user to arm and disarm the system, and perform other system
functions, such as bypassing zones, viewing messages from the central station, and
displaying zone descriptors. Zone and system conditions (alarm, trouble, bypass) are
shown in the display window.
When an alarm occurs, keypad sounding and external sounding will occur, and
the zone(s) in alarm will be displayed on the keypad. If the alarm display lock
feature is enabled (field 1*10), the first zone to go into alarm is displayed.
Pressing the [T] key will display other zones in an alarm state. Pressing any key
will silence the keypad sounder for 10 seconds. Disarming the system will
silence both keypad and external sounders. When the system is disarmed, any
zones that were in an alarm condition during the armed period will be displayed
(memory of alarm). To clear this display, simply repeat the disarm sequence
(enter the security code and press the OFF key).
The keypads also feature chime annunciation, and 3 panic keys (for silent,
audible, fire or personal emergency alarms) which can notify the central station
of an alarm condition, if that service is connected.
To protect the system against repeated code entry attempts to find a valid user
code, code entry of more than 20 key presses within a 15 minute period without
successful entry of a valid command sequence will result in a 15 minute lockout
of all keypad entries within this keypad's partition.

Arming Functions

The following is a brief list of system commands. For detailed information concerning
system functions, refer to the User's Manual.
Display Faulted
Zones

Before arming, the system must be in the READY condition
(all zones
must be intact). If the "NOT READY" message appears,
press the READY ✴ key to display faulted zones.

Arming Away

Enter code + 2 (AWAY) .

Arming Stay

Enter code + 3 (STAY) . (all zones designated as zone types

Arming Instant

4 and 10 will be automatically bypassed)
Enter
code
7 (INSTANT) (same as STAY without entry delay)

Arming MaximumEnter code + 4 (MAXIMUM) (same as AWAY without entry delay)
Disarming
– 150 –

Enter code + 1 (OFF) .

Bypassing Zones Enter code + 6 (BYPASS) + zone number. To automatically
bypass all faulted zones, use "Quick Bypass" method: Enter
code + BYPASS + # .
Enter code + 9 (CHIME) . To turn chime mode off, enter

Chime Mode

code + CHIME again.
Quick Arming:

Note that if QUICK ARM is enabled (field *29), the #

key

can be pressed instead of entering the security code, for any
arming procedure (Away, Stay, Instant, Maximum, etc.).
User #02 must be programmed into the system in order for the Quick Arm feature to work.

SUMMARY OF ARMING MODES
Features For Each Arming Mode
Exit
Entry
Perimeter
Delay
Delay
Armed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes

Mode

AWAY
STAY
INSTANT
MAXIMUM

Global Arming

Interior
Armed
Yes
No
No
Yes

If enabled for the user, the keypad will display the following:
If NO, the keypad prompts for arming each partition
individually. If YES, the system attempts to arm all
partitions allowed by this user. If there are any faults (open
doors, windows, etc.) the keypad will display them. See
notes below. These faults must be corrected or the zone
bypassed before arming will occur. When faults are
corrected, repeat the arming procedure.

ARM ALL
?
0 = NO , 1 = YES

When using the Global Arm feature, if there are faults in
any of the selected partitions, the system will enter a
summary mode in which the faulted zones of all of the
selected partitions will be displayed. These faults must be
corrected or bypassed (code + BYPASS + [#] will attempt to
bypass the faults in all of the selected partitions). This
summary mode will end in approx. 120 seconds if no keys
are pressed.
If, when disarming the system using a Global Disarm, any
of the selected partitions has a condition which would
cause the keypad to beep (such as alarm memory or a
trouble condition), the system will cause the keypad to
beep and will enter a summary mode in which the alarm
memory or trouble conditions of all of the selected
partitions will be displayed. This mode will continue until
either approx. 120 seconds elapses or a second disarm
occurs which clears the beeping.

Global arming cannot be performed from a wireless keypad.

Access Control

If programmed in data field 1*76, one relay may be used for access control in each
partition. To activate this relay: User code + 0 .The relay will pulse for 2 seconds.
In addition to this command, there are three other commands (#73, #74, #75) that
can control access points shared with the PassPoint Access Control System. Refer to
the Access Control section for details on these functions.
-

- 151 -

Delaying Closing
Time

If Open/Close schedules are used, end users can manually delay closing time by
extending the closing window by 1 or 2 hours. This is useful if a user must stay on the
premises later than usual. The user must have authority level of manager or higher.
To extend the closing window, enter user code + # +82.
Closing Delay ?
Key 0-2 Hours

Enter the number of hours, 1 or 2, by which the end of the closing
window should be extended. Note: The delay is from the scheduled
closing time, not from the current time. Press ✴ to accept entry
and exit this mode. Press [#] to exit this mode without changes.
The system will send an "Access Schedule Change"
message to the central station when the closing
window is extended.

An extension of the closing window cannot be reduced once it is set. However, a 1 hour
delay can be increased to 2 hours. This is to prevent the user from deleting the delay after
the normal window expires, thereby missing the end of the window.

Partition "GOTO"
Commands

Each keypad is assigned a default partition for display purposes, and will show only
that partition's information. To see information for another partition or perform system
functions in another partition, use the GOTO command (code + [*] +partition number
0-8). The keypad will remain in the new partition until directed to go to another
partition, or until 120 seconds has elapsed with no keypad activity. To return to your
home partition, enter ✴ + partition 0.
You must programme data field 2*18 to enable the GOTO function. This is a partitionspecific field that must be set for each partition the user wants to access from another
partition's keypad.

Viewing
Capabilities Of A
User

The keypad will display the partitions that a user is authorized for, the user number,
and the authority level for all partitions authorized. Enter code + [*] + [*]. The user's
capabilities in each authorized partition will typically be displayed as follows:
Part. 1 A0✴ WHSE
User 01 Auth.=1G.

The user's Open/Close report capability is shown by the dot
following the authority level. If Open/Close is not enabled for
a user, the dot will not appear.

Viewing Zone
Descriptors

The Alpha Keypads can display all programmed descriptors, which is useful to the
installer when checking entries, and can be helpful to the user when there is a need to
identify zones. To display descriptors, the system must be disarmed and ready
to arm. Press and hold the READY key until the built-in instructions for that key
appear, then release the key. The zone descriptors will appear one at a time, for about
2-3 seconds each. For faster viewing, press the READY key to display the next
descriptor in numerical order and so on. When all descriptors have been displayed, the
control will exit display mode. To exit display mode before all descriptors have been
displayed, enter the security code and press the OFF key.

Viewing
Downloaded
Messages

Users may occasionally receive a message from their installation company displayed on
an alpha keypad. When this occurs, the keypad will display "Message. Press 0 for 5
secs.". Instruct the user to press and hold the 0 key to display the central station's
message. Note that the system must be in the READY state to view these messages.

Using The Built-In
User's Manual

An abbreviated User's Manual is stored in the system's memory, and can be
particularly useful to the end user if the printed User's Manual is not conveniently
accessible when the user needs to perform a seldom used and unfamiliar system
procedure. The Built-in User's Guide is displayed only on an alpha keypad by simply
pressing any of the function keys (e.g., OFF, AWAY, STAY, MAXIMUM, BYPASS,
INSTANT, CODE, TEST, READY, #, and CHIME) for approximately 5 seconds and
then releasing it. Abbreviated instructions relative to the key that has been pressed
will then be displayed (2 lines of text are displayed at a time). This function works in
either armed or disarmed state.

– 152 –

Panic Keys

There are three panic key pairs (shown below) or three lettered keys (A, B, or C) that, if
programmed, can be used to manually initiate alarms and send a report to the central
station. Each key pair can be individually programmed for 24 Hour Silent, Audible or
Auxiliary (Emergency) responses, as well as Fire. The panic function is activated when
the appropriate key pair is pressed at the same time.
The panic functions are identified by the system as follows:
PANIC

Displayed as Zone
For alpha keypads, these panic keys can also
995
be programmed with an alpha descriptor.
996

✴ 1
#

✴ #

999

For the Silent panic function to be of practical value, the system must be connected to a
central station.

Speed Keys [A, B,
C and/or D]
(Macros)

The A, B, C and/or D keys can be used to activate strings of up to 32 keystrokes. These
keystrokes are known as a macro and are stored in the system's memory. Each
partition may have its own macros. Typical Speed Key functions include:
• Arming sequences that involve first bypassing certain zones before arming.
• Seldom used but repeatable sequences.
• Relay activation sequences.
To programme a macro, enter your user code + [#] + [X], where X can be A, B,
C or D. The following appears:
Enter up to 32 keystrokes. A speed key sequence can
ENTER SPEEDKEY "D"
existing sequence displayed
include different commands. Press the lettered key to
separate different commands. For example, you may want
to perform the following:
Desired function
GOTO partition 2
Bypass zones 010 & 011
11
Arm in maximum mode
Return to partition 1

Keystrokes
Enter *2
Press bypass [6], then the zone numbers 10 &
Press maximum [4] key
Enter *1

To programme that speed key sequence, type the following :
*2 D 6100011 D 4 D *1 D D
Note that the "D" key is pressed after the "2," the last "1" and the "4," separating
the different commands. Press "D" twice to complete the entry and exit.
To execute a speed key sequence, press the appropriate lettered key:
ENTER USER CODE
✴✴✴✴

Enter your user code. The programmed speedkey sequence
will begin automatically.

When defining speedkey sequences, do not use the [#] key to represent Quick Arming. The
system uses the entered code in response to the prompt to initiate commands in a
speedkey sequence, so the quick arm key is unnecessary. The system interprets the use of
the [#] key in a speedkey sequence as its designated function only (e.g. #2 is not
interpreted as arm in away mode, but rather as enter house ID sniffer mode).

- 153 -

Manual Relay
Activation Mode
(#70 Mode)

The system allows users to manually activate relays/X-10 modules by keypad command
using either the keypad or a telephone keypad (if VIP module is used). The user will be
prompted (by keypad alpha display or telephone voice module).
To activate relays from a keypad, enter 4-digit security code + [#] +70.
To activate relays using a telephone and telephone module, first dial the 2-digit phone
access code. When the system acknowledges the access, enter 4-digit security code + [#]
+ 70. The following prompts/voice responses will begin.
ENTER DEVICE NO.

00=QUIT

Voice: "ENTER DEVICE CODE NOW"
Enter the 2-digit number of the relay/X-10 module to be
activated.

nn DEVICE IS OFF
Key 0=OFF , 1=ON

Voice: "voice descriptor DEVICE nn ON/OFF. FOR voice
descriptor ON ENTER 1, FOR voice descriptor OFF ENTER 0"
Press 0 or 1 to turn the device off or on respectively. "nn"
represents the 2-digit relay/X-10 module number and voice
descriptor is the relay voice descriptor programmed by the
installer.

nn DEVICE IS OFF
Key THE "*" KEY

Voice: "voice descriptor DEVICE nn ON/OFF. TO EXIT ENTER
00 NOW"
From a keypad, press ✴

to continue. The ENTER DEVICE

NO. prompt will appear. From a telephone keypad, enter 00 to
exit, or enter the next relay number to be programmed. The
current on/off state of that relay will be annunciated.
Alternatively, if 6 seconds elapses with no key depression, the
telephone module will annunciate the "ENTER DEVICE
CODE NOW" message.

– 154 –

SECTION 28

Testing The System
This section provides the following information:
• An explanation of the following test modes:
--Battery test
--Dialler test
--Burglary Walk test
--Armed Burglary System test
• Turning the system over to the user

Battery Test

When AC power is present, the VISTA-120 will run a brief (13 seconds) battery
test every 4 minutes (alternatively, the test can be for 1.5 seconds every 50
seconds) to determine if there is a battery connected, and will run an extended
battery test every 24 hours to check on the battery's condition. This presence test
will also be conducted whenever the system or a partition is disarmed. If the
VISTA-120 finds that the battery voltage is low (less than approx. 11.5V
[10.8VDC in Vista-120FR]) during one of these tests, it initiates a keypad
"System LoBat" display and a rapid keypad beeping sound. It also sends a low
battery report to the central station (if the dialler feature is used). The keypad
can be cleared by entering any security code + OFF, and a restore report will be
sent to the central station after a subsequent test indicates that the problem
(disconnected or low battery) has been corrected.

Dialler Test

The VISTA-120 may be programmed to automatically transmit test reports to a
central station at intervals ranging from once per hour to once per 999 hours
(field *27). The VISTA-120 can be programmed to send the first report at any
time of the day, or at any day of the week after power up (field *83).

LCD Display Test
Whenever the Test Mode is entered from a keypad, all LEDs and LCD dots (that
make up characters) are activated for 2-3 seconds.

Burglary Walk Test
(code + TEST [5])

This test causes the system to sound keypad beeps in response to faults on
burglary and non-fire related 24 hour zones for the purpose of allowing proper
zone operation to be checked without triggering alarms. Note that the system
will not trigger alarms for burglary and non-fire related 24 hour zones but will
trigger fire alarms while this test is active. This test can only be activated by the
installer, a master user or manager user by entering the corresponding security
code and pressing TEST while the burglary portion of the system is disarmed.
UL requires that this test be conducted on a weekly basis.
When this test is first activated, the system will sound burglary bells/sirens for 3
seconds. The system will send a start of walk test message to the central station.
The keypads will display “Burg Walk Test in Progress” and will sound a single
beep every 15 seconds while the test remains active.
Open and close each protected door and window in turn. Each action should
produce 3 beeps from the keypad. Walk in front of any motion detectors. Listen
for three beeps when the detector senses movement. The keypad will display the
zone number and alpha descriptor while a door or window remains open or while
a detector remains activated. The system automatically issues a zone 8 glass
break detector power reset about 10 seconds after it finds a fault on this zone, to
allow faulted detectors to be reset. To end this test, enter any security code and
press OFF. An end-of-walk test message will be sent to the central station.

– 155 –

Armed
Burglary
System Test

1. Alarm messages will be sent to the central station during the following tests.
Notify the central station that a test will be in progress.
2. A display of "COMM. FAILURE" indicates a failure to communicate (no Kissoff
by the receiver at the central station after the maximum number of
transmission attempts is tried). If this occurs, verify that the phone line is
connected, the correct report format is programmed, etc.
1. Arm the system and fault one or more zones. Silence alarm sounder(s) each
time by entering the code and pressing OFF. Check that Entry/Exit delay
zones provide the assigned delay times.
2. Check the keypad-initiated alarms, if programmed, by pressing the Panic
keys (* and #, 1 and *, and/or 3 and #). If the system has been programmed
for audible emergency, the keypad will emit a loud, steady alarm sound. The
word ALARM and a descriptor "999" will be displayed for * and #. (if 1 and *
are pressed, a "995" will be displayed; if 3 and # are pressed, a "996" will be
displayed). Silence the alarm by entering the security code and pressing OFF.
If the system has been programmed for silent panic, there will be no audible
alarms or displays. A report will be sent to the central station, however.
2. Notify the central station that all tests are finished and verify results with
them.

Trouble Conditions
Check or Trouble Messages
• A display of "CHECK" or "TRBL" (as per field 1*07) accompanied by a zone
number (001-128) and an alpha descriptor descriptor indicates that a problem
exists with that zone. Zone trouble may be caused by one of the following
conditions:
--A wired fire zone is open (broken wire)
--A Day/Night (tamper) zone (Zone Type 5) is faulted
--A polling loop zone is not seen by the control panel
--A polling loop device has been tampered with (cover removed)
--A wireless zone has not checked in during the time set in field 1*31
--A 5800 series transmitter has been tampered with (cover removed)
• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "6XX," where XX = 01-32,
indicates a trouble on a 4204CF supervised bell output (corresponding relay
number 01-32)
• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "8XX," where XX = 00-31,
indicates a trouble on a peripheral device (connected to the panel's keypad
terminals) of the corresponding device address (00-31)
• "CHECK" accompanied by a numeric display of "9XX," where XX = 00-99,
indicates that a system trouble exists. See the Zone Index section.
If the problem has been corrected, key an OFF sequence (Security Code plus OFF)
twice to clear the display.

– 156 –

Other System Messages
• "COMM. FAILURE" at the keypad
Indicates that a failure occurred in the telephone communication portion of
your system.
• "LO BAT" and a zone descriptor, accompanied by a once per minute beep at
the Keypad
Indicates that a low battery condition exists in the wireless transmitter
displayed. The audible warning sound may be silenced by pressing any key.
• "SYSTEM LO BAT"
Indicates that a low battery condition exists with the system's backup battery.
• "RCVR SET UP ERROR" at the keypad
Indicates that the system has more wireless zones programmed than the
wireless receiver can support. If this is not corrected, none of the zones in the
system will be protected. If additional wireless zones are desired, use an
appropriate receiver.
• "MODEM COMM"
Indicates that the control is on-line with a remote computer.
• "HSENS" and zone number
Indicates a smoke detector with a high sensitivity level, which may cause false
alarms. The detector is probably dirty and should be cleaned or replaced.
• "LSENS" and zone number
Indicates a smoke detector with a low sensitivity level. Detectors with a low
sensitivity might not detect a smoke condition. The detector should be cleaned
or replaced.
Power Failure
If the POWER indicator is off, and the message "AC LOSS" is displayed, the
keypad is operating on battery power only. Check to see that the circuit breaker
for the branch circuit that your system's transformer is wired to has not been
accidentally turned off. Instruct the user to call a service representative
immediately if AC power cannot be restored.

Turning the System
Over to the User

1. Fully explain the operation of the system to the user by going over each of its
functions as well as the User's Manual supplied.
2. In particular, explain the operation of each zone (entry/exit, perimeter,
interior, fire, etc.). Be sure the user understands how to operate any
emergency feature(s) programmed into the system.

To The Installer
Regular maintenance and inspection (at least annually) by the installer and
frequent testing by the user are vital to continuous satisfactory operation of any
alarm system.
The installer should assume the responsibility of developing and offering a
regular maintenance programme to the user as well as acquainting the user with
the proper operation and limitations of the alarm system and its component
parts. Recommendations must be included for a specific programme of frequent
testing (at least weekly) to insure the system's proper operation at all times.

– 157 –

REGULATORY AGENCY STATEMENTS
IN THE EVENT OF TELEPHONE OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS
In the event of telephone operational problems, disconnect the control panel by removing the plug from the
RJ31X wall jack. We recommend that you demonstrate disconnecting the phones on installation of the
system. Do not disconnect the phone connection inside the Control Panel. Doing so will result in the loss of
your phone lines. If the regular phone works correctly after the Control Panel has been disconnected from
the phone lines, the Control Panel has a problem and should be returned for repair. If upon disconnection of
the Control Panel, there is still a problem on the line, notify the telephone company that they have a
problem and request prompt repair service. The user may not under any circumstances (in or out of
warranty) attempt any service or repairs to the system. It must be returned to the factory or an authorized
service agency for all repairs.

– 158 –

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR ADDRESSABLE POLLING LOOP DEVICES
4190WH ZONE EXPANDER
DIP

APPLIES TO TABLE A & B
SHOWN SET FOR ID 10 (A)
1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8
UP

SIDE VIEW
(DN)

WITH TABLE:
POS.1 MUST BE:
THIS TABLE
TABLEFOR
FOR DIPS
DIPS WITH
WITH
THIS
WORD “OFF”
"DN"
WORD
(“–” = DN)
DEVICE
ID

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
BIT
VALUE:

DIP SWITCH POSITION

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP UP UP

UP UP

–
–
–
–

–
–

–
UP

UP –
UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –
UP UP UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP –
UP UP
UP UP

– – –
– – UP
– UP –
– UP UP
UP – –
UP – UP
UP UP –

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

64 32 16

UP UP

–
–

–

A
DN

B
UP
THISTABLE
TABLEFOR
FORDIPS
DIPSWITH
WITH
THIS
WORD“ON”
"UP"
WORD
(“–” = DN)
DEVICE
ID

DIP SWITCH POSITION

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP

– UP
– –

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP UP UP
UP UP –
UP – UP
UP – –
– UP UP
– UP –
–
– UP

–
–

UP UP UP
UP UP –

64 32 16

– UP UP
– UP –
– – UP
– – –

–

– –

– 159 –

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR POLLING LOOP DEVICES

MIRROR

SHOWN SET FOR
ID 10
1

2 3 4 5 6

SIDE VIEW
(UP)

– 160 –

2 3 4 5 6

SHOWN SET FOR
ID 10

SIDE VIEW
(DN)

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

}

}
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE:

—

POS 7: UP = NORMAL MODE
DN = INSTANT MODE
POS. 8: UP = W/T DISABLE
DN = WALK TEST

POS 7: DN = INSTANT MODE
UP = PULSE COUNT
POS. 8: DN = WALK TEST
UP = W/T DISABLE

DEVICE
ID

SIDE VIEW
(DN)

SHOWN SET FOR ID 10

7 8

DIP

MIRROR

DIP

+ —

DIP

4194 REED CONTACT
(SURFACE MOUNT)

4278EX PIR

4275EX PIR

DIP SWITCH POSITION
1

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

DEVICE
ID
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE:

DIP SWITCH POSITION
1

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

DEVICE
ID
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE:

DIP SWITCH POSITION
1

—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
Up
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

—
—
—
—
—
—
Up
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP

—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP

UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP

—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP

DIP SWITCH TABLES FOR 5700 RF SYSTEM WIRELESS DEVICES
HOUSE ID
SWITCH SETTING FOR ALL
DEVICES EXCEPT 5716
2

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

SIDE
VIEW (UP)

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

SIDE
VIEW (UP)

1 2 3 4 5 6

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

5727 KEYPAD

1 2 3 4 5 6

SIDE
VIEW (UP)

7 8

}

DIP

XMTR
ID

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47

XMTR ID
(48 SHOWN)

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)
1 2 3 4 5
UP

5711/5711WM
DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

6
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55

SIDE
VIEW
(DN)

DIP SWITCH POSITION

XMTR
ID

XMTR ID
FIXED AT
“00”

IMPORTANT
SET SWITCHES WITH
BATTERY REMOVED

7
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

8
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

TERMINALS

SW4

DIP

SW3

6 5 4 3 2 1

DIP

SW4

SIDE
VIEW (UP)

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)
1 2 3 4 5 6

SIDE
VIEW
(DN)

7 8 9 10 11 12

XMTR ID (33 SHOWN)
HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

}

XMTR ID
POS.1: UP = NORMAL RESPONSE
(33 SHOWN)
DN = FAST RESPONSE
POS. 2: UP = NO COVER TAMPER
DN = COVER TAMPER (use N.C. setting)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
BIT
VALUE:

6 5 4 3 2 1

POS.12: UP = N.O.
— = N.C
(Avoid ID 32-37 with N.O.)

SW3

POS. 6: UP = N.O.
DN = N.C.

DIP SWITCH POSITION

6
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—

7
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP

8
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP

9
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP

10
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP

11
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP

XMTR
ID
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE

DIP SWITCH POSITION

6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

7
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

8
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
U
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

9
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

10
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

11
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

HOUSE
ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
BIT
VALUE:

UP = PULSE COUNT
— = INST. MODE
DIP SWITCH POSITION

6
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

7
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

8
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

9
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

5716 DOOR/WINDOW TRANSMITTER

DIP

XMTR
ID

XMTR ID
(32 SHOWN)

TERMINAL
BLOCK

1 2

7 8 9 10
UP

POS.6 UP= XMTR ID 62
DN= XMTR ID 63

DIP

MIRROR

DIP
DIP

DIP

1 2 3 4 5 6

5715
UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER

5775 PIR
DETECTOR/TRANSMITTER

}

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

5706/5707 SMOKE
DETECTORTRANSMITTER

HOUSE ID (1 SHOWN)

DIP SWITCH POSITION

DEVICE
ID

BIT
VALUE:

5701 PANIC TRANSMITTER

DIP SWITCH POSITION

5
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
——
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

4
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

3
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

2
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

1
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

TRANSMITTER
ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
BIT
VALUE:

DIP SWITCH POSITION

6
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—
UP
—

5
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—
UP
UP
—
—

4
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—

3
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

2
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

1
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
UP
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

For 5700 series transmitters not shown in this table, refer to the instructions accompanying each transmitter.

– 161 –

SPECIFICATIONS
VISTA-120 CONTROL
Physical:
Electrical:

318mm Wide X 368mm High X 76mm Deep

VOLTAGE INPUT:

In 110 volt AC mains systems, from Ademco No. 1361 Plug-In
Transformer (use 1361CN in Canada) or 4300 transformer (for X10 installations) rated 16.5VAC, 40 VA or XF10 transformer (for
220VAC, 50Hz X-10 installations)

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT: 10VDC-13.8VDC (10.7VAC-14.5VAC for Vista-120FR), 2.8 amps
max.; 750mA less aux. current drain
AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT: 9.6VDC-13.8VDC, 750mA max.
BACK-UP BATTERY:
12VDC, 4AH or 7AH gel cell. No. 467 (12V, 4AH) or 712BNP
(12V, 7AH) recommended.
STANDBY:
4 hours min. with 750 mA aux. load using 7 AH battery.
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS:
PTC circuit breakers are used on battery input to protect against
reverse battery connections and on alarm sounder output to
protect against wiring faults (Shorts).
A solid state circuit breaker is used on auxiliary power output to
protect against wiring faults (shorts).
DIGITAL COMMUNICATOR
FORMATS SUPPORTED:
ADEMCO HIGH SPEED
ADEMCO 4+2 EXPRESS
ADEMCO LOW SPEED
ADEMCO CONTACT ID
SESCOA
RADIONICS LOW SPEED
LINE SEIZE: Double Pole
6139 Remote Keypad
Physical:
Width:
159mm
Height:
121mm
Depth:
32mm
Voltage Input: 12VDC
Current Drain: 100 mA
Interface Wiring:
RED: 12VDC input (+) auxiliary power
BLUE: Not Used
GREEN: Data to control panel
YELLOW: Data from control panel
BLACK: Ground and (-) connection from supplemental power supply.
Electrical:

– 162 –

– INDEX –
1361, v, 14, 15, 58, 59, 162
24 Hour Trouble, 70
24-hour Audible Alarm, 69
24-hour Auxiliary Alarm, 69
24-hour Silent Alarm, 69
2-wire smoke detectors, 2, 19, 20, 68
4100SM, iv, v, 4, 54, 55, 65, 139, 141
4146, 4, 49, 51, 52
4191SN, 25, 29, 60
4204, ii, v, 3, 4, 21, 40, 41, 43, 46, 47, 48, 60, 63, 88, 102, 106, 110,
122, 127
4208UXM, 2
4278EX-SN, 25, 27, 28, 60
4281, ii, 3, 30, 31, 32, 60, 81, 88, 102
4285, ii, v, 3, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 68, 73, 76, 88, 101, 102, 107
4297, 24, 25, 26, 29, 60
4300, ii, v, 4, 15, 40, 41, 58, 59, 162
4939SN, 25, 29, 60
4959SN, 25, 29, 60
4-wire smoke detectors, 19, 21, 22
5800EU series, 2, 3, 30, 36, 90
5800TM, ii, 30, 32, 35, 38
5827BD, 31, 32, 35, 38, 62, 82, 102
5839EU, 3, 16, 31, 36
5881, ii, v, 3, 30, 31, 32, 60, 81, 88, 102
5882EU, 3, 30, 31, 32, 60, 88
6139, 3, 16, 60, 102, 162
6139AV, 16
675 Ground Start Module, 14, 49, 50, 60
998MX, 25, 27, 29, 60
AC 60Hz or 50Hz, 83
AC MAINS LOSS KEYPAD SOUNDING, 72
AC Power, v, 14, 15, 57, 58, 105
Access Control, 61, 151
ACCESS CONTROL RELAY, 84
Access Control Schedules, 124
Access schedules, 4
Action Codes, 122
ADD a Master, Manager or Operator Code, 147
Adding An RF Key To An Existing User, 149
addressable devices, 3, 16, 88
Ademco Expanded High Speed Reporting, 130
Ademco Express, 5, 76, 131, 134
ALARM DISPLAY LOCK, 79
ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT, 162
ALARM VERIFICATION, 83
ALLOW ARMING WITH FAULTS IN EXIT ROUTE, 71
ALLOW DISARM OUTSIDE WINDOW IF ALARM OCCURS, 85
ALLOW DISARMING ONLY DURING ARM/DISARM, 85
ALTERNATIVE COMMUNICATIONS MEDIA REPORTING, 77
ARM WITH LOW BATTERY, 71
Arm/Disarm Commands, 120
Arming Away, 150
Arming Instant, 150
Arming Maximum, 150
Arming Stay, 150
ASCII CONTACT ID BAUD RATE, 78
ASCII CONTACT ID REPORTING WITH OR WITHOUT ACK, 78
Audio Alarm Verification, v, 4, 46, 47, 49
Auto Arming, 110
AUTO BYPASS FAULTED EXIT ROUTE ZONES, 80
Auto Disarming, 111
Auto-Arm Delay, 9, 84, 110
Auto-Arm Warning, 84, 110
Autobypass, 11, 95, 97
AUTOBYPASS EXIT ROUTE FAULTS, 71
AUTO-DISARM DELAY, 85
Auxiliary Device Current Drain, ii, 58, 60
AUXILIARY OUTPUT MODE, 82
AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUT, 162
back-up battery, 15, 59, 162
Battery Standby Table, 59

Battery Test, 155
bell/siren relay, 53
built-in Users Manual, 5
BURG. ALARM COMM. DELAY, 78
BURGLARY TRIGGER FOR RESPONSE TYPE 8, 73
Burglary Walk Test, 155
Burglary/Audible Panic trigger, 49
Button type transmitters, 33, 36
BYPASS ENABLE FOR FIRE ZONES, 79
BYPASS/UNBYPASS ZONES WHEN ARMED, 82
Bypassing Zones, 151
Cabinet Lock, 13
call waiting, 12, 82
CALL WAITING DEFEAT, 82
CHANGE a Master, Manager or Operator Code, 149
Check or Trouble Messages, 156
CHECKSUM VERIFICATION, 76
Chime Mode, 151
CHIME ON EXTERNAL SIREN, 82
COMM. FAILURE, 157
COMM. SPLIT REPORT SELECTION, 81
common area, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9, 79, 80
COMMON AREA 1 PARTITION, 79
COMMON AREA 2 PARTITION, 79
COMMON AREA 3 PARTITION, 80
Communication Defaults For Zones, 135
COMMUNICATION PROGRAMMING GUIDE, 133
CONFIRMATION OF ARMING DING, 72
Contact ID, iii, 2, 3, 5, 27, 46, 47, 48, 65, 74, 76, 77, 78, 83, 97, 128,
129, 130, 131, 133, 134, 147
CONTACT ID EVENT CODES, 132
CPU FAIL TRIGGER OUTPUT, 81
CROSS ZONING PAIR FOUR, 80
CROSS ZONING PAIR ONE, 80
CROSS ZONING PAIR THREE, 80
CROSS ZONING PAIR TWO, 80
Cross-Zoning, 5, 11, 12
Custom Message Display, 100
Custom Words, 99
Daily Open/Close Worksheet, 117
Data Field programme mode, 65
Delaying Closing Time, 152
Delete a Master, Manager or Operator Code, 149
Device Programming, 102
dialler, 4, 11, 46, 48, 61, 63, 77, 140, 155
Dialler Test, 155
Direct Wire Downloading, 141
DISABLE DOWNLOAD CALLBACK, 83
Disarm Delay, 111
Disarming, 150
DISPLAY FIRE ALARMS OF OTHER PARTITIONS, 86
DISPLAY TRBL INSTEAD OF CHECK, 79
DISPLAY TROUBLES OF OTHER PARTITIONS, 86
DOWNLOAD COMMAND ENABLES, 75
DOWNLOAD ID NO, 75
DOWNLOAD PHONE NO., 75
downloader, 4, 36, 76, 139
Downloading, 139
DUAL REPORTING, 76
Duress, 144, 146
ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON FORCE ARM, 83
ENABLE 5800 RF BUTTON GLOBAL ARM, 83
ENABLE FORCE ARM FOR AUTO-ARM, 85
ENABLE GOTO FOR THIS PARTITION, 85
ENABLE J7 TRIGGERS BY PARTITION, 85
Enter programme mode, 65
ENTRY DELAY #1, 72
ENTRY DELAY #2, 72
ENTRY WARNING, 78
Entry/Exit, 3, 5, 12, 34, 61, 69, 90, 105, 132, 156
EOLR supervision, 2, 19
Event Log, ii, v, 4, 54, 55, 56, 57, 95, 97, 132, 140

– 163 –

EVENT LOG PRINTER ON-LINE, 84
EVENT LOG TYPES, 84
exception reporting, 113
EXIT DELAY #1, 72
EXIT DELAY #2, 72
EXIT DELAY RESET, 80
EXIT DELAY SOUNDING, 82
Exit Error, i, 5, 11, 57, 132
EXIT The User Edit Mode, 149
Final Contact Set, 2
FINAL CONTACT SET, 71
Fire and Silent Panic/Duress triggers, 49
FIRST TEST REPORT TIME, 78
Force Arm, 111
glassbreak detectors, 2, 19
Global arming, iv, 3, 6, 150, 151
Go/No Go Test Mode, 33 39
GOTO, 6, 85, 146, 152, 153
Holiday Definitions, 119
Holiday schedules, 4 113
House ID Sniffer Mode, ii, 32
HSENS, 157
IGNORE EXPANSION ZONE TAMPER, 73
Installer (User 1), 145
INSTALLER CODE, 71
INSTALLER CODE RESTRICTION, 71
INTELLIGENT TEST REPORTING, 73
Interior w/Delay, 70
Interior, Follower, 69
INTERMITTENT SENSOR SUPPRESSION, 78
INTERNAL CLOCK SYNC, 83
INTERNATIONAL DATE FORMAT, 83
KEYPAD PANIC ENABLE, 73
keypads, 3, 4, 6, 10, 16, 17, 18, 23, 27, 31, 32, 35, 38, 40, 44, 50, 61,
62, 63, 68, 82, 85, 86, 88, 102, 110, 140, 144, 147, 150, 153, 155
keyswitch, 4, 22, 29, 49, 51, 52, 68, 72, 75
KEYSWITCH ASSIGNMENT, 72
LCD Display Test, 155
Levels Of Authority, 144
Limitation of Access by Time Worksheet, 124
LO BAT, 157
Loading Communication Defaults, 131
LOG FIRST MAINTENANCE SIGNAL, 84
Long Range Radios, 52
LOW BATTERY TEST INTERVAL, 81
Low Speed FORMAT, 5, 65, 76, 128, 131, 133, 134
LSENS, 157
macro commands, 3, 150
Macros, iv, 3, 153
Main Logic Board, 70
MAINS PRESENCE DISPLAY, 72
Manager, 144
Manager Codes, 145
Manual Relay Activation Mode (#70 Mode, 154
Master, 144
Master Codes, 145
Master keypad, 6, 10
MAX. NUMBER OF ZONES THAT CAN BYPASSED, 82
MAXIMUM No. OF DIALLER ATTEMPTS, 77
MODEM COMM, 157
MULTIFREQUENCY OR PULSE DIAL, 74
MULTIFREQUENCY DIALLING W/ PULSE DIAL BACKUP, 81
MULTIPLE ALARMS, 73
Multiple Partition Access Examples, 147
No. of SECONDS ADDED PER DAY, 83
No. OF SECONDS REMOVED PER DAY, 83
NORMALLY CLOSED OR EOLR (ZONES 2-8), 75
NUMBER OF PARTITIONS, 84
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTING FOR KEYSWITCH, 75
OPEN/CLOSE REPORT FOR INSTALLER CODE, 75
Open/Close Reporting, 145
OPEN/CLOSE REPORTS BY EXCEPTION, 85
Open/Close schedules, 4, 113, 152
Open/Close Windows, 121
Operator Codes, 146
Operator level A, 144

– 164 –

Operator level B, 144
Operator level C, 144
output devices, 4, 40, 107, 111, 127
PABX, 12, 14, 74
PAL 328N, 50
PANIC BUTTON OR SPEED KEY, 80
panic keys, iv, 3, 38, 80, 150, 153
Partition Descriptors, 100
partitions, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 12, 18, 19, 24, 26, 30, 39, 46, 50, 70, 75,
79, 80, 82, 84, 86, 102, 112, 114, 116, 117, 118, 119, 122, 144, 145,
146, 147, 148, 149, 151, 152, 167
PassPoint, 2, 3, 4, 61, 62, 63, 90
Perimeter Burglary, 69
PERMANENT KEYPAD DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING, 82
phone line, 12, 13, 14, 44, 46, 47, 48, 76, 139, 156
Polling loop, 2, 24, 70
Polling Loop Current Drain, ii, 58, 60
Polling Loop Extender Module, v, 24, 25
POWER indicator, 157
POWER UP IN PREVIOUS STATE, 74
Powerline Carrier devices, 3, 4, 15, 40, 41, 43, 58, 103, 104, 106,
122, 127
PREVENT FIRE TIME-OUT, 73
PREVENT ZONE XXX BYPASS, 75
PRIMARY FORMAT, 76
PRIMARY PHONE NUMBER, 74
PRIMARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #, 74
PRINTER BAUD RATE, 84
Programming Alpha Descriptors, 98
Programming Holiday Schedules, 119
Programming Open/Close Schedules, 118
Programming Output Devices, 104
Programming Temporary Schedules, 126
Programming Time Windows, 117
Protection zones, 68
PSTN, 5
PTT approvals, 2
Quick Arm feature, 74, 144
Quick Arming, 151
RANDOMISE AC MAINS LOSS REPORT, 73
RCVR SET UP ERROR, 157
real-time clock, 142
RECEIVER TYPE, 81
receiver's DIP switches, 31
Relay Commands, 120
Relay Programming, 103
RELAY TIMEOUT XXX MINUTES, 84
RELAY TIMEOUT YYY SECONDS, 84
Relay Voice Descriptors, 107
Relay zones, 68
Remote Keyswitch, v, 51
Report Code Programming, 95
REPORT/LOG ZONE TYPE 23, 78
Reporting Formats, 128
RESTORE REPORT TIMING, 78
Restore/Supervisory Codes, 96
RF RCVR SUPERVISION CHECK-IN INTERVAL, 81
RF Receiver, v, 3, 57, 60, 68, 89
RF Serial Number Clear Mode, 109
RF TRANSMITTER CHECK-IN INTERVAL, 81
RF TX LOW BATTERY REPORT ENABLE, 81
RF TX LOW BATTERY SOUND, 80
RING DETECTION COUNT, 76
ROBOFON VERSION OF CONTACT ID, 77
Robofone, 2
Rules on Authority Levels, 146
Scheduling, iii, 4, 40, 110, 114, 115, 117, 118, 119, 122, 124, 127
SECONDARY PHONE NUMBER, 75
SECONDARY SUBSCRIBER ACCT #, 78
SELF ACTIVATING SIREN OUTPUT, 71
SEND CANCEL IF ALARM + OFF, 83
Sequential Mode Programming, 93
serial number multiplex, 4, 90
serial printer, 4, 54, 55, 141
Sescoa/Radionics, 5, 76, 133

SESCOA/RADIONICS SELECT, 76
Setting the Time and Date, 142
SILENCE SOUNDER DURING AAV, 83
Silent Panic/Duress trigger, 52
SOUNDER TIMEOUT, 72
Speed Keys, 153
STANDARD/EXPANDED REPORT, 76
SUMMER TIME, 84
Supervised Fire, 69
SUPPRESS ALL KEYPAD DISPLAYS, 79
SUPPRESS FIRE ALARM RELAY, 75
SUPPRESS KEYPAD ARMING STATUS INDICATIONS, 79
SUPPRESS TX SUPERVISION SOUND, 82
SUPPRESS USE OF "ARMED" LED ON KEYPADS, 79
SUPPRESS WIRELESS SIREN ACTIVATION, 76
SUPRESS STATUS LED OUTPUT, 83
SYSTEM LO BAT, 157
Telephone Line Monitor, 2
TELEPHONE MODULE PHONE CODE, 73
TELEPHONE SYSTEM SELECTION, 77
temporary schedule, 113
Temporary Schedule Menu Mode, 125
TEST REPORT INTERVAL, 73
TIME STAMP FORMAT, 84
time windows, 4, 110, 111, 112, 114, 115, 116, 117, 120, 124, 126
Time Windows Definitions, 116
Timed Events, 4, 115, 122
Time-Driven Event Programming, 122
Time-Driven Events, 113, 120
TLM INPUT ON ZONE 9, 81
Transmitter Battery Life, 33, 36
Transmitter ID Sniffer Mode, 39
trigger, 4, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 73, 81, 82, 86, 102, 103, 106, 107, 146,
148, 155
Trouble Conditions, 156
USE PARTITION DESCRIPTORS, 85
USER BYPASS OF TAMPER FAULTS, 82
user codes, 3, 6, 144, 145
USER RESET OF TAMPER ALARMS, 81
User Scheduling Menu Mode, 127
Using The Built-In User's Manual, 152
VERIFIED ALARM REPORT ENABLE, 77
VGM, 61
Video Alarm Verification, 4, 48, 83, 105
Video Receiver, 4
Video Transmitter, v, 4, 48
Viewing Zone Descriptors, 152
Vista Gateway Module, 61, 63, 70
V-Link, 4, 65, 75, 139
VOLTAGE INPUT, 162
WIRELESS 5827/5827BD KEYPAD ASSIGNMENT, 82
WIRELESS KEYPAD TAMPER DETECT, 82
wireless zones, 2, 3, 30, 33, 89, 157
XF10, v, 4, 15, 40, 41, 42, 58, 59, 162
XM10E, 4, 15, 41, 42
ZONE 9 RESPONSE TIME, 72
Zone Alarm Reports, 96
Zone Descriptors, 98
Zone Index, 68
Zone List Programming, 106
Zone Programming, 89
Zone Response Type Definitions, 68, 69
ZONE TYPE 5 ALWAYS ALARM, 71

– 165 –

WARNING!
THE LIMITATIONS OF THIS ALARM SYSTEM
While this System is an advanced wireless security system, it does not offer guaranteed protection against burglary, fire or
other emergency. Any alarm system, whether commercial or residential, is subject to compromise or failure to warn for a variety of reasons. For example:
• Intruders may gain access through unprotected openings or have the technical sophistication to bypass an alarm sensor or
disconnect an alarm warning device.
• Intrusion detectors (e.g., passive infrared detectors), smoke detectors, and many other sensing devices will not work without power. Battery-operated devices will not work without batteries, with dead batteries, or if the batteries are not put in
properly. Devices powered solely by AC will not work if their AC power supply is cut off for any reason, however briefly.
• Signals sent by wireless transmitters may be blocked or reflected by metal before they reach the alarm receiver. Even if the
signal path has been recently checked during a weekly test, blockage can occur if a metal object is moved into the path.
• A user may not be able to reach a panic or emergency button quickly enough.
• While smoke detectors have played a key role in reducing residential fire deaths, they may not activate or provide early
warning for a variety of reasons in as many as 35% of all fires. Some of the reasons smoke detectors used in conjunction
with this System may not work are as follows. Smoke detectors may have been improperly installed and positioned.
Smoke detectors may not sense fires that start where smoke cannot reach the detectors, such as in chimneys, in walls, or
roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level of a residence or
building. A second floor detector, for example, may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Finally, smoke detectors have
sensing limitations. No smoke detector can sense every kind of fire every time. In general, detectors may not always warn
about fires caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper
storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with matches, or arson. Depending on the
nature of the fire and/or location of the smoke detectors, the detector, even if it operates as anticipated, may not provide
sufficient warning to allow all occupants to escape in time to prevent injury or death.
• Passive Infrared Motion Detectors can only detect intrusion within the designed ranges as diagrammed in their installation
manual. Passive Infrared Detectors do not provide volumetric area protection. They do create multiple beams of protection,
and intrusion can only be detected in unobstructed areas covered by those beams. They cannot detect motion or intrusion
that takes place behind walls, ceilings, floors, closed doors, glass partitions, glass doors, or windows. Mechanical
tampering, masking, painting or spraying of any material on the mirrors, windows or any part of the optical system can reduce their detection ability. Passive Infrared Detectors sense changes in temperature; however, as the ambient temperature of the protected area approaches the temperature range of 32° to 40°C, the detection performance can decrease.
• Alarm warning devices such as sirens, bells or horns may not alert people or wake up sleepers if they are located on the
other side of closed or partly open doors. If warning devices are located on a different level of the residence from the bedrooms, then they are less likely to waken or alert people inside the bedrooms. Even persons who are awake may not hear
the warning if the alarm is muffled by noise from a stereo, radio, air conditioner or other appliance, or by passing traffic. Finally, alarm warning devices, however loud, may not warn hearing-impaired people.
• Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premises to a central monitoring station may be out of service or
temporarily out of service. Telephone lines are also subject to compromise by sophisticated intruders.
• Even if the system responds to the emergency as intended, however, occupants may have insufficient time to protect themselves from the emergency situation. In the case of a monitored alarm system, authorities may not respond appropriately.
• This equipment, like other electrical devices, is subject to component failure. Even though this equipment is designed to
last as long as 20 years, the electronic components could fail at any time.
The most common cause of an alarm system not functioning when an intrusion or fire occurs is inadequate maintenance. This
alarm system should be tested weekly to make sure all sensors and transmitters are working properly. The security console
(and remote keypad) should be tested as well.
Wireless transmitters (used in some systems) are designed to provide long battery life under normal operating conditions.
Longevity of batteries may be as much as 4 to 7 years, depending on the environment, usage, and the specific wireless device
being used. External factors such as humidity, high or low temperatures, as well as large swings in temperature, may all
reduce the actual battery life in a given installation. This wireless system, however, can identify a true low battery situation,
thus allowing time to arrange a change of battery to maintain protection for that given point within the system.
Installing an alarm system may make the owner eligible for a lower insurance rate, but an alarm system is not a substitute for
insurance. Homeowners, property owners and renters should continue to act prudently in protecting themselves and continue
to insure their lives and property.
We continue to develop new and improved protection devices. Users of alarm systems owe it to themselves and their loved
ones to learn about these developments.

– 166 –

WEEKLY TESTING IS REQUIRED TO ENSURE PROPER OPERATION OF THIS SYSTEM.

ZONE 4 ZONE 5

ZONE 6 ZONE 7

See Installation Instructions
for max # of keypads
and for max wire run length.
BELL

ALL CIRCUITS ARE
POWER LIMITED.
SIREN

AUXILARY POWER OUTPUT
9.6VDC - 13.8VDC,
750 mA maximum
Note: Include current drawn
by keypads and polling loop
devices when making
auxiliary power calculations.

ALARM SOUNDER OUTPUT
10VDC - 13.8VDC 2.8A maximum
(10.7VDC - 14.5VDC for VISTA-120FR)

+
N.C.

N.C.

+
N.C.

N.O.

2k EOLR
(note 1)

2k EOLR
(note 1,3)

+
Fire
Usage

N.C.

SMOKE

N.C.

N.O.
Burglary
Usage

N.O.
2k EOLR
(note 1,2)

2k EOLR
(note 1)

ZONE RESISTANCE (Excluding EOLR):
ZONE 1,8: 100 OHMS maximum
ALL OTHER ZONES: 300 OHMS maximum
ZONE RESPONSE TIME:
ZONES 1-8: 350mSec-500mSec
ZONE 9: Programmable for
Fast: 10mSec-15mSec
Normal: 350mSec-500mSec
(default response)

Handset
Connections

4190
RPM

N.C.

4192SD
SMOKE

N.C.

4278EX
PIR

N.O.
N.O.

2k EOLR
(note 1)

GLASS
BREAK

N.C.
N.C.

POLLING LOOP

N.C.

Programmable Response
(Fast/Normal) Loop

LATCHING TYPE GLASS
BREAK DETECTOR LOOP

Red Blk Grn Yel
REMOTE KEYPADS
Use 6139
ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
(e.g. 4204, 5881, 5882EU)

2-WIRE SMOKE
DETECTOR LOOP
(Also supports NO/NC Burg contacts)

Data out

NO CONNECTION

TRANSFORMER
16.5VAC, 40VA

+
+

J7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ZONE 8 ZONE 9

ZONE 1

CHARGING
VOLTAGE
13.8VDC
See
Connect to 24hr.
Installation 120VAC, 60 Hz
Instructions for
or
required
220VAC, 50 Hz
capacity

J8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

)
R
(G ING
RA
Y)
(G TIP
RE
EN
)
RI
(R NG
ED
)

MAKE CONNECTIONS USING
No. 4142TR CABLE

(B TIP
RO
WN

ZONE 2 ZONE 3

NOTE:
WHEN POWERING UP
THE PANEL, CONNECT TO AC
MAINS BEFORE CONNECTING
THE BATTERY.

Optional programming:
Out 1: Open/close or keypad-like sounding
Out 2: Armed LED, Fire, CPU Fail
Out 4: Ready LED
Ratings for Out 1:
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 4k OHMS
Not Active: 100 OHMS to ground
Ratings for out 2-4:
Active: 10VDC-13.8VDC through 5k OHMS
Not Active: 1k OHMS to ground
duress)
(Refer to Installation Instructions for information concerning Direct Wire
Downloading and printer connections using the 4100SM Serial Module.)

Red Jumper
(note 1)

Data in

GEL CELL
BATTERY

RED (+)

Connect to
12VDC, 4AH
or 12VDC, 7AH

BLK (-)

VISTA-120 SUMMARY OF CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM

3. Zone 7 may be used for remote keyswitch J7 Header
NOTES: 1. Zone 1 may be selected for EOLR supervised
J8 Header
or normally closed (no EOLR) operation via
arming/disarming.
1. Not Used
1. In 2 (Printer DTR)
cut jumper. (Cut red jumper for normally closed
See Installation Instructions for wiring
2. Ground
2. Ground3. Out 1 (Ground Start) 3. In 3 (X - 10 sync)
operation. Do not cut for Fire Usage). Zones 2-8
instructions.
4. In 4 (X - 10 sync)
may be selected for either operation via program 4. Zone 8 supports 2-wire latching type glass 4. Ground5. Ground
5. Out 2 (fire)
field *41.
break detectors.
6. Out 5 (X - 10 data)
6. Ground2. Zone 1 supports 2-wire smoke detectors.
See Installation Instructions for recommend- 7. Out 3 (burg/aud. panic) 7. Out 6 (Printer RXD)
See Installation Instructions for recommended type ed type and maximum number of detectors 8. Ground
8. Ground
BATTERY
9. Ground
and maximum number of detectors supported.
9. Out 4 (silent panic/
supported.
TABS

Incoming
Phone Line
Connections

EARTH GROUND

Connect to good earth
ground to maintain immunity
to transients. See Instructions
for proper grounding.

WARNING: TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRICAL
SHOCK, DISCONNECT
TELCO JACK BEFORE
SERVICING THIS PANEL.

2k EOLR
(note 1,4)

Polling loop rating: 128mA
maximum. See Installation
Instructions for maximum
number of devices supported
and maximum wire run length.

– 167 –

ADEMCO LIMITED WARRANTY
Alarm Device Manufacturing Company, a Division of Pittway Corporation, and its divisions, subsidiaries and affiliates ("Seller"), 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791, warrants its products to be in conformance with its
own plans and specifications and to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and
service for 24 months from the date stamp control on the product or, for products not having an Ademco date
stamp, for 12 months from date of original purchase unless the installation instructions or catalog sets forth a
shorter period, in which case the shorter period shall apply. Seller's obligation shall be limited to repairing or
replacing, at its option, free of charge for materials or labor, any product which is proved not in compliance with
Seller's specifications or proves defective in materials or workmanship under normal use and service. Seller shall
have no obligation under this Limited Warranty or otherwise if the product is altered or improperly repaired or
serviced by anyone other than Ademco factory service. For warranty service, return product transportation
prepaid, to Ademco Factory Service, 165 Eileen Way, Syosset, New York 11791.
THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, WHICH EXTEND BEYOND THE DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE
HEREOF. IN NO CASE SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR
UPON ANY OTHER BASIS OF LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, EVEN IF THE LOSS OR DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY
THE SELLER'S OWN NEGLIGENCE OR FAULT.
Seller does not represent that the products it sells may not be compromised or circumvented; that the products
will prevent any personal injury or property loss by burglary, robbery, fire or otherwise; or that the products will in
all cases provide adequate warning or protection. Customer understands that a properly installed and maintained
alarm may only reduce the risk of a burglary, robbery, fire or other events occurring without providing an alarm,
but it is not insurance or a guarantee that such will not occur or that there will be no personal injury or property
loss as a result. CONSEQUENTLY, SELLER SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY PERSONAL INJURY,
PROPERTY DAMAGE OR OTHER LOSS BASED ON A CLAIM THE PRODUCT FAILED TO GIVE WARNING.
HOWEVER, IF SELLER IS HELD LIABLE, WHETHER DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FOR ANY LOSS OR
DAMAGE ARISING UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE, REGARDLESS OF CAUSE OR
ORIGIN, SELLER'S MAXIMUM LIABILITY SHALL NOT IN ANY CASE EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF
THE PRODUCT, WHICH SHALL BE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AGAINST SELLER. This
warranty replaces any previous warranties and is the only warranty made by Seller on this product. No increase
or alteration, written or verbal, of the obligations of this Limited Warranty is authorized.

ALARM DEVICE MANUFACTURING CO.
A DIVISION OF PITTWAY CORPORATION

¬19-l
N5944-8V1 Rev. B 6/99

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2001:12:02 09:09:07
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.0 for Windows
Modify Date                     : 2006:06:17 13:55:59-05:00
Page Count                      : 176
Page Mode                       : UseThumbs

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Vista 120 Installation Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation